JP2023045768A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine allowing a player to recognize execution of a movable body performance while preventing disturbance of an operation confirmation of a movable body by performance operation.SOLUTION: When a movable body performance is executed in a variable display started during a predetermined period when conformation movable control is underway on power-on not accompanying initialization, display of an effect display and output of a movable body performance sound are performed while performance movable control is restricted in execution of the movable body performance during the predetermined period, and the performance movable control and display of the effect display and then output of a movable performance sound are performed when the movable body performance is executed after a predetermined period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 66

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines, there is a game machine that has an operable movable body and can execute a movable body presentation in which the movable body is moved while a pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

In this type of game machine, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure, an initial operation (long initial operation) that makes the movable body operate in the same way as the production operation (long initial operation), or one of the production operations. There is a device capable of executing an initial operation (short initial operation) in which a part is omitted (for example, see Patent Document 1). Also, there is a game machine in which a plurality of types of decoration identification information (decorative patterns) are variably displayed in correspondence with the variable display of specific identification information (special patterns) (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2015-113217 A JP 2017-86392 A

In the game machine having the functions and configurations of Patent Documents 1 and 2, there is room for improving marketability.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The game machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that executes variable display of specific identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
a movable body;
game control means;
display means;
movable body control means;
and a production control means,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information,
The effect control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
In one production mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed,
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is capable of executing a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually reduced when executing
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased,
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced,
an execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than an execution period of the identification information fade-in display;
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
The game control means is
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-to-enter state in which game media can easily enter,
When a power failure occurs while the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on, special control can be performed to put the variable means in the easy-to-enter state again,
The display means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display the startup preparation display,
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a restoration in progress display,
In the advantageous state, when a power failure occurs while the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on,
The display of the startup preparation display is performed,
After that, the special control is performed,
After that, the display during recovery is displayed,
After that, the confirmation movable control is performed,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that the power supply to the game machine has started by the startup preparation display, and when the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, the power is cut off, and when the power is turned on (recovery from power failure), the game can be played. To provide a game machine in which a player can quickly confirm that a variable means is in the easy-to-enter state that is the same as before power cutoff and without being distracted by a movable body operated by confirmation movement control. Furthermore, since the fade-in display basically gives the impression that the fade-in display is performed in a short period of time, it appears more abruptly. It can be noted that the variable display of the decoration identification information ends when the information fade-in display is performed in a shorter period of time than the background fade-in display. Therefore, marketability can be improved.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. (A) is a diagram illustrating a variable display result specifying command, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a game state background specifying command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2, and (C) is an explanation showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol). It is a figure, (D) is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), (E) is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing of a jackpot classification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning command buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small-hit completion|finish process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of initial operation control processing; 7 is a flowchart showing an example of origin placement control processing; 6 is a flowchart showing an example of operation confirmation control processing; 6 is a flowchart showing an example of operation confirmation control processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a switching control table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of control during an execution period of confirmation control and control during an execution period of post-confirmation operation control; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which it is located at the performance position. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which it is located at the performance position. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the frame-top movable body and the chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which they are located at the performance position. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation list which CPU for production|presentation control can perform. (A) is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during a variable display period of SP reach, and (B) is a diagram that shows a list of effects that can be executed in a big hit game state. It is a figure which shows the example of operation|movement of the advance notice of a movable body. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the advance notice at the time of a start. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body announcement/pseudo continuous announcement. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a reach notice and a button notice. It is a figure which shows the operation example of SP reach advance notice. It is a figure which shows the example of operation|movement of a big hit production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a jackpot production (promotion production). It is a figure which shows the operation example of state transition operation control. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a customer waiting demonstration production. (A) is a diagram explaining the operation of the movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the mode of lamps and sounds according to the operation of the movable body. (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an operation example of operation check control during cold start processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power failure occurs; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power failure occurs; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power failure occurs; FIG. 10 is a timing chart in the case of executing the movable body advance notice after the initial operation by cold start; FIG. 4 is a timing chart in the case of restricting advance notice of a movable body during initial operation by cold start; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a starting prize is generated during initial operation by cold start; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a starting prize is generated during initial operation by cold start; FIG. 10 is a timing chart when executing the movable body advance notice after the initial operation by hot start; FIG. 4 is a timing chart in the case of restricting advance notice of a movable body during initial operation by cold start; FIG. 10 is a timing chart when restricting the advance notice of the movable body after the initial operation by cold start; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for restricting advance notice of a movable body during initial operation by cold start; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a starting prize is generated during the initial action, and variable 2 display for executing the advance notice of the movable body is started during the initial action period in response to the starting prize. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a starting prize is generated during an initial action, and a variable display for executing a movable body advance notice is started during the initial action period in response to the starting prize. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a starting prize is generated after an initial action, and a variable display for executing a movable body advance notice is started during the initial action period in response to the starting prize. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a starting prize is generated during an initial action, and a variable display for executing a movable body advance notice is started during the initial action period in response to the starting prize. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the case where the movable body moves to the performance position as the initial motion and the case where the movable body does not move to the performance position as the initial motion. When the movable body moves to the production position as the production action of the movable body notice, and when the movable body moves to the production position as the production action of the movable body notice It is a timing chart of advance notice of the movable body when the movable body stops on the way from the origin position to the effect position as the initial motion. 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by cold start; 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; 10 is a timing chart of a demonstration effect when the movable body stops on the way from the origin position to the effect position in the initial motion; It is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the big hit variation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of a fanfare effect; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example when operation confirmation control is executed for fanfare effect; (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays. It is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation check control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of one round game. It is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of one round game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power failure occurs immediately after the start of a special interval; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control as a modification when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the special interval; It is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the start of the round game in which the promotion effect is executed. It is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation|movement of a movable body when operation check control is started based on power interruption having generate|occur|produced during time saving, and having been switched on after that. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the button announcement is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the change before the start notice is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the variation in which the pseudo continuous notice is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of the movable body when operation confirmation control is started based on power failure occurring during normal fluctuation and then power being turned on. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation|movement of a movable body when operation check control is started based on power-off having generate|occur|produced during a big hit, and having been turned on after that. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation|movement of a movable body when operation check control is started based on power interruption having generate|occur|produced during time saving, and having been switched on after that. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of initial operation by cold start; A timing chart at the time of initial operation by cold start and a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start. 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control; (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an operation example of operation confirmation control during cold start processing as a modified example. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the win/fail button effect as a modified example. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an operation example when an error occurs in operation confirmation control. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to Embodiment 1; FIG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of big hit types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning command buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure for demonstrating a decoration design and a small design. (A1) and (A2) are the first production mode, (B1) and (B2) are the second production mode, (C1) and (C2) are the third production mode, and (D1) and (D2) are the fourth production mode. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the first effect mode, and (B1) and (B2) in the second effect mode. (C1) and (C2) are the third effect mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the fourth effect mode, and (E) is the variable display of the decoration pattern and the small pattern. It is a diagram for explaining the aspect of , (A) is a variation start action of decorative symbols, (B) is a variation stop action, and (C) is a loop action. (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative patterns and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of the lamp. (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an operation example of the hold display. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 1st production|presentation mode. 139. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative design following FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 2nd production|presentation mode. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. 141; 141. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow of the variable display of the decoration design of FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design as the modification 1. FIG. 144. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative design following FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 3rd production mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the appearance of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 4th production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the stop display of the decoration design in 1st production|presentation mode (2nd production|presentation mode). 149. It is a figure which shows the flow of the stop display of a decorative design following FIG. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first effect mode (second effect mode). (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth effect mode (third effect mode). (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a background change. It is a figure which shows the flow of a background change in 1st production|presentation mode. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first effect mode. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of each part of the variable display in 2nd production|presentation mode. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of each part of the variable display in 3rd production mode and 4th production mode. (A) is a 1st production mode, (B) is a 2nd production mode, (C) is a timing chart which shows the aspect of each part at the time of the variable display start in a 3rd production mode and a 4th production mode. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a customer waiting demonstration production. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation|movement when starting prize-winning generate|occur|produces during the customer waiting demonstration production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of pseudo consecutive notices; (A) is a diagram showing an example of pseudo-run number display and symbol colors, (B) is a diagram showing pseudo-run number display and symbol color types, and (C) is a diagram showing a pseudo-run number display color determination table. . It is a figure which shows the flow of reach production|presentation. 164 is a diagram showing the flow of ready-to-win effects following FIG. 163. FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of each part in reach production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the flow of SP reach production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the flow of SP ready-to-win production following FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of each part in SP reach production|presentation. (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing Modification 2 of the present invention. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a modification 3 of the present invention.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic part 132SG form)
[Mode 1]
The game machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R);
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The production control means is
During the variable display, it is possible to execute a movable body presentation using the movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a portion that can execute a movable body announcement in which the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down),
An effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, an effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the operation of the on-board movable body 32A. part),
A movable body effect sound corresponding to the movable body effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, the part where the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the movable body announcement shown in FIG. 49),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 31 and By executing the operation confirmation control process new in FIG.
When the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform effect movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined action (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 controls the on-board movable body 32A is moved up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position),
When the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed at the time of power-on with initialization, the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period. when the effect movement control and the output of the movable body effect sound are restricted, the effect display is displayed, and the movable body effect is executed after the predetermined period, at least the effect movement control and The effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the frame top movable body 32A, the bottom movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the During the initial action period of the body 132SG101, a starting prize is generated, and based on the starting prize, the movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101 are activated during the initial action period. When the variable display for executing the notice is started, during the execution period of the notice of the movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the notice of the movable body and the sound of the notice of the movable body corresponding to the notice of the movable body from the speakers 8L and 8R. While the output is not executed, the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. After the initial action period of the chance button 631B and the frame movable body 132SG101, the starting winning occurs, and when the variable display for executing the movable body announcement is started based on the starting winning, the movable body will be displayed during the execution period of the movable body announcement. The operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a notice and the portion where the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5),
When the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed when the power is turned on without initialization, the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period. When the effect movement control is limited, the effect display is displayed and the movable body effect sound is output, and when the movable body effect is executed after the predetermined period, the effect movement control is limited. , the effect display is displayed and the movable body effect sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by hot start, the board top movable body 32A, the board movable body 32A, and the bottom movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101 start winning during the initial operation period, and based on the starting winning, the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body. 132SG101, when the variable display for executing the advance notice of the movable body is started during the initial operation period of the 132SG101, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the notice of the movable body is not executed during the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body, while the image display device 5 , the effect display 132SG407 is displayed, and a movable object announcement sound corresponding to the movable object announcement is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and as shown in FIG. When the start winning occurs after the initial operation period of the upper movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the variable display for executing the movable body notice is started based on the starting win. , the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the movable body notice during the execution period of the movable body notice, the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the movable body notice sound corresponding to the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the movable object effect is executed with the variable display started during the confirmation movable control, the movable object effect is given to the player while the confirmation movable control is not hindered by the effect movable control. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating the execution by effect display or by outputting a movable body production sound.

The game machine of form 1-2 is
The degree of expectation for control to the advantageous state is higher when the movable object effect is executed than when the movable object effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the expectation of the jackpot is set higher than if it is not executed),
When the power is turned on with initialization, if the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed, the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period. When the movable body effect control and the output of the movable body effect sound are limited, the effect movement control limited during the predetermined period is performed after the end of the predetermined period, while the movable body effect sound is output. is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, the initial operation period of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start During the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101, based on the start-up prize, a variable display that executes the movable body notice during the initial operation period. is started, while the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the movable body notice and the output of the movable body notice sound corresponding to the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed during the execution period of the movable body notice. , on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and on-board movable body 132SG101. The part where the output of the moving object notification sound in response to the moving object notification is not executed),
When the power is turned on without initialization, if the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movable control is performed, the movable body effect is performed during the predetermined period. When executed, the effect movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the effect movable control limited during the predetermined period is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started). During the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 when activated by , a start-up prize is generated, and based on the start-up prize, these on-board movable bodies 32A , the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101. While the operation of the upper movable body 32A is not executed, after the initial operation of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101 is completed, the board movable body 32A is again operated as a movable body notice. the part where the action is performed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the production effect is not lowered due to the restricted production movement control in the movable body production, which is highly expected to be controlled in an advantageous state. .

The game machine of form 1-3 is
The movable body includes a first movable body (eg, on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (eg, under-board movable body 32B),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means controls the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation for confirming that the first movable body and the second movable body operate normally. It is possible to perform the confirmation movable control that moves and (for example, the part that executes the operation confirmation control process shown in 31 and FIG. 32 for the effect control CPU 120),
The confirmation movement control ends when the movement of the second movable body ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the The initial motion of the movable body 132SG101 is completed after the initial motion of the under-board movable body 32B is completed),
The movable body presentation is a presentation using the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the movable body announcement is a presentation for operating the on-board movable body 32A),
When the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is being performed at power-on, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, The effect movable control is limited, and when the movement of the second movable body by the confirmation movable control ends, the limited effect movable control is performed during the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, When the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a starting prize is generated during the initial operation period of the board upper movable body 32A, the board lower movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame upper movable body 132SG101, and these boards are based on the starting prize. When the variable display for executing the movable body announcement is started during the initial operation period of the upper movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101, the movable body is displayed during the execution period of the movable body announcement. A part where the effect action of the on-board movable body 32A is not executed as a notice, and the effect action of the on-board movable body 32A is executed again after the initial action of the lower-board movable body 32B is completed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the movement of the first movable body by the confirmation movement control ends, the effect movement control using the first movable body is executed, so that the confirmation movement control and the effect movement control are indistinguishable. It is possible to provide a game machine that does not run out.

The game machine of form 1-4 is
When the power is turned on with initialization, the effect control means can execute initialization notification corresponding to the initialization (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a cold start, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and the speaker 8L , the part that outputs the initialization notification sound from 8R),
The execution period of the confirmation movement control and the execution period of the initialization notification overlap (for example, as shown in FIGS. Initial operation period of movable body 132SG101, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g. , the portion where the initialization notification sound output period from 8R overlaps),
The execution period of the initialization notification is longer than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, as shown in FIGS. The upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a mode corresponding to the initialization notification, and the initialization notification sound output period from the speakers 8L and 8R are the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, and the chance button 631B. , a portion longer than the initial operation period of the frame upper movable body 132SG101),
After the end of the execution period of the confirmation movement control, when the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the execution period of the initialization notification, the movable body effect is executed during the execution period of the initialization notification. When the body effect is executed, the effect movement control and the effect display are performed, while the movable body effect sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. , the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101. After the operation is completed, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5 are executed during the execution period of the movable body advance notice, but the frame LEDs 9a and 9b and the on-board movable body LED 9d, underboard movable body LED 9e, frame upper movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g light emission in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification and output of initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even during the execution period of the notification corresponding to initialization, if the confirmation movement control is finished, the presentation movement control is executed, and the presentation effect of the movable body presentation is not lowered. can be done.

The game machine of form 1-5 is
The effect control means can execute a look-ahead movable body effect suggesting that the movable body effect will be executed in the variable display prior to the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern in which the movable body effect is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 45, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the pre-reading movable body notice),
When the look-ahead movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means can perform specific effect movement control for moving the movable body by a specific action (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, effect control The CPU 120 can move up and down a plurality of times between the origin position and the intermediate position by using the on-board movable body 32A as a preliminary advance notice of the movable body 32A),
The execution period of the variable display in which the look-ahead movable body effect is executed is shorter than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach out variable display is 12 seconds or less, and the initial action period is 30 seconds),
When the power is turned on, the start condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is being performed, and the look-ahead movable body effect is executed with a variable display that is started based on the establishment of the start condition. in the case, when the look-ahead movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the specific movable control is limited,
When the variable display in which the look-ahead movable body effect is executed ends during the predetermined period, the specific movable control limited during the predetermined period is not performed after the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 68). In the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started and execution of the advance notice of the movable body is determined due to the occurrence of variable display multiple times during the confirmation operation of each movable body as the initial operation control. If the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body overlaps with the period of confirmation operation of each movable body and the period of the initial action control, the display of the effect display 132SG407 is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body. , After the end of the variable display, the effect operation of the on-board movable body 32A is not executed again as the advance notice of the movable body),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display is straddled, the limited specific movement control is not executed during the confirmation movement control, so that the player is not confused by moving the movable body excessively after the confirmation movement control ends. Amusement machines can be provided.

The game machine of form 1-6 is
In one variable display, the effect control means controls, as the movable body effect, a first movable body effect (for example, the first movable body announcement shown in FIG. 69) and when the first movable body effect is executed It is possible to execute a second movable body effect (for example, the second movable body announcement shown in FIG. 69) in which the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is high,
The movable body control means is
When the first movable body effect is executed, a first effect movement control for moving the movable body by a first predetermined action (for example, moving the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position a plurality of times part), and
When the second movable body effect is executed, a second effect movement control for moving the movable body by a second predetermined action (for example, moving the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position a plurality of times part), and
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect are executed in one variable display started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is performed, the predetermined period When the first movable body effect is executed during, the first effect movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the first effect movable control limited during the predetermined period is performed,
When the second movable body effect is executed before the limited first effect movement control is performed, the second effect movement control is performed without performing the first effect movement control (for example, As shown in FIG. 69, when the initial motion of the movable body has already been executed during the execution period of the first advance notice of the movable body, the on-board movable body 32A as the first advance notice of the movable body is executed after the initial motion of the movable body is completed. is executed, but if the movement of the board movable body 32A as the second movable body notice has already been executed before the movement of the board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice, the first movable body The part where the movement of the board movable body 32A as the body announcement is not executed and the movement of the board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is continuously executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the movement of the movable body in the first movable body presentation does not impede the movement of the movable body in the second movable body presentation, thereby preventing the performance effect from deteriorating. can.

The game machine of form 1-7 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable bodies are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the board top movable body LED 9d for the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body LED 9e for the board bottom movable body 32B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 for the frame top movable body 132SG101). Body LED 9f, Chance button 631B is provided with Chance button LED 9g),
The movable body includes a first movable body (eg, on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (eg, under-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control for moving the second movable body by a special action for notifying that the control is in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 45). 2, the part where the production control CPU 120 can execute the decided production to raise the lower board movable body 32B),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform a specific light emission control that causes the light emitting means of the second movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the effect control CPU 120 , a portion that causes the under-board movable body 9e to emit light in an initial emphasizing mode (for example, red blinking shown in FIG. 56(B), etc.) during the initial operation of the under-board movable body 32B);
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the second movable body that is movable by the special effect movement control to emit light in a special light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (E5), the effect When the under-board movable body 32B is raised, the control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body 9e to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, the rainbow flash shown in FIG. 56(B9)),
When the special effect movement control is executed during the specific light emission control, the special light emission control is limited (for example, when the execution period of the effect is determined during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start , a portion that restricts light emission (rainbow flash) in a mode corresponding to the decision effect of the lower board movable body LED 9e during the execution period of the decision effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the special effect movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

The game machine of form 1-8 is
The motion mode of the second movable body by the confirmation motion control and the motion mode of the second movable body by the special effect motion control are common (for example, which is the initial motion or the performance motion of the lower board movable body 32B? is also the movement between the origin position and the production position),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control that causes the light emitting means of the second movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the second movable body is completed (for example, FIG. 56 (B), as shown in FIG. 61, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body LED 9e to emit light in the initial emphasis mode (red flashing)),
The light emitting means of the second movable body movable by the special effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and the first special light emission pattern is emitted in a second period after the end of the first period. can perform the special light emission control that emits light in a second special light emission pattern with a different light emission mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. A portion that causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to flash rainbow during operation, and causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to emit smooth rainbow light during the comparison operation of the under-board movable body 32B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the special movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

The game machine of form 1-9 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-board movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the on-board movable body 32A is provided with an on-board movable body LED 9d, and the below-board movable body 32B is provided with an on-board movable body LED 9e. part),
The movable body control means can move the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can control As shown in , the portion where the lower board movable body 32B is operated after the upper board movable body 32A is operated as an initial operation),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform a specific light emission control that causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the effect control CPU 120 can A portion that causes the lower movable body 9e to emit light in an initial emphasizing mode (for example, red blinking shown in FIG. 56(B), etc.) during the initial operation of the lower movable body 32B),
When the first movable body is movable by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the light emitting means of the first movable body is not subjected to the specific light emission control. Perform specific light emission control (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, during execution of the confirmation operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the on-board movable body LED 9d emits light in the initial emphasis mode, and the under-board movable body LED 9e is initialized The part that emits light in the notification mode),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of drawing attention to the movable body that is moving by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 1-10 is
The movable body is operable between an initial position (eg, origin position) and an advanced position (eg, rendering position),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, when the movable body is not placed at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 30 The part that executes the origin placement control process shown),
When the variable display is started, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427 from the timing when the variable display is started. part),
When the power is turned on, if the variable display starts during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is performed, the return control is restricted (for example, the initials of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started When a starting prize is generated during operation and the variable display based on the starting prize is started, the initial movement of each movable body is given priority over the movement to the origin position of each movable body)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The game machine of form 1-11 is
The movable body is operable between an initial position (eg, origin position) and an advanced position (eg, rendering position),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, when the movable body is not placed at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 30 The part that executes the origin placement control process shown),
When the variable display ends and the game standby state is entered, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 132SGS427 processing),
When the power is turned on, the variable display is started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movable control is performed, and the variable display is finished during the predetermined period, and when the game standby state is entered, the return control is performed. Restrict (for example, when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started in response to the end of the variable display, the customer waiting demo effect effect of each movable body is given priority over the movement to the origin position of each movable body. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The game machine of form 1-12 is
The effect control means can execute the movable body effect a plurality of times during one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, during one variable display, a first variable display notice and a second variable display notice and are executed),
When the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is being performed at power-on, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, When the effect movement control is limited (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, when variable display is executed during the initial motion of each movable body, when the first notice of the movable body is executed during the initial motion, the first 1. A part where the production action of the on-board movable body 32A is not executed as a preliminary notice of the movable body),
One of the movable body effects executed a plurality of times in one variable display is executed, and the movement of the movable body by the effect movement control corresponding to the one movable body effect ends normally. If not, when the next movable body effect is executed, the effect movement control corresponding to the next movable body effect is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. Even if the performance action of the upper movable body 32A does not end normally, the action of the board movable body 32A as the second movable body notice is executed when the execution period of the second movable body notice is reached),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the effect movement control corresponding to one movable body effect does not end normally, the game machine is capable of retrying by the effect movement control corresponding to the next movable body effect. can provide.

The game machine of form 1-13 is
The effect control means provides, as the movable body effect, a first movable body effect (e.g., first movable body announcement) and a higher proportion of control to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body effect. It is possible to execute a second movable body effect (for example, a second movable body announcement),
The movable body control means is
When the first movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform the first effect movement control to move the movable body by the first predetermined action (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may A portion that moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position a plurality of times),
When the second movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform a second effect movement control that moves the movable body by a second predetermined action (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may A portion that moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position a plurality of times),
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect are executed in the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed, the When the first movable body effect is executed, the first effect movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the first effect movable control limited during the predetermined period is performed (for example, each movable body If the execution period of the first notice of the movable body comes during the initial motion, the movement of the on-board movable body 32A as the first notice of the movable body is not executed during the execution period of the first notice of the movable body, and each movable body After the initial operation of , the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed again as the first movable body notice),
When the first movable body is moved by the restricted first effect movement control, the first effect movement control is interrupted and the second effect movement control is performed when the second movable body effect is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 72, during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice during the initial movement of each movable body, if the execution period of the second movable body notice becomes A part where the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice is interrupted and the movement of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body notice is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the movement of the movable body in the first movable body presentation does not impede the movement of the movable body in the second movable body presentation, thereby preventing the performance effect from deteriorating. can.

The game machine of form 1-14 is
The movable body is operable between an initial position (eg, origin position) and an advanced position (eg, rendering position),
first detection means (for example, origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) capable of detecting that the movable body is arranged at the initial position;
a second detection means (for example, production position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) capable of detecting that the movable body is arranged at the advanced position;
The confirmation movement control moves the movable body toward the advanced position for a first period based on the detection that the movable body is arranged at the initial position by the first detection means. and control to move the movable body toward the initial position when it is not detected by the second detection means that the movable body has been placed at the advanced position during the first period (for example, FIG. 73). , the production control CPU 120 operates the movable body toward the origin position by the production position sensor not detecting the movable body during the first period),
The effect movement control moves the movable body toward the advanced position for a second period, and the second detection means detects that the movable body is positioned at the advanced position during the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 74, the effect control CPU 120 controls the movement of the movable body by preventing the effect position sensor from detecting the movable body during the second period.) the part that stops the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the movable body effect is executed during the game, the movable body is moved based on the confirmation movement control even if the movable body corresponding to the movable body effect is not normally moved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of reducing the deterioration of the rendering effect of the movable body rendering that was not executed normally.

The game machine of form 1-15 is
The movable body control means is
When the movable body cannot operate normally over a specific period, it is possible to determine an operation error and perform the confirmation movement control (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, the effect control CPU 120 , the part where it is judged as an operation error when the movable body does not reach the production position as the initial movement, and the initial movement is repeatedly executed),
When an operation error is determined a predetermined number of times, it is possible to perform error movement control to move the movable body over a movable period longer than the movable period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control (for example, , As shown in FIG. 75, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)),
When the error movable control is performed, when the movable body effect is executed, the effect movable control is limited, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body effect sound is output (for example, As shown in FIG. 75, the action of the movable body is not executed in the movable body presentation after the dead end determination, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, Under-board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, light emission in a mode corresponding to the movable body notice by the chance button LED 9g, and sound output according to the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that prevents a malfunction from being caused by forcibly operating the movable body in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, and does not reduce the performance effect of the movable body performance. can do.

[Mode 2]
The game machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, a performance 31 and 32 by the control CPU 120 to perform the initial movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101) ,
When the power is turned on, the effect control means can perform demonstration display control to display a demonstration display on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 76, the effect control CPU 120 can The part that displays the customer waiting demonstration in
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movement control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed when a power failure occurs and the power is turned on. 76 to 78, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started after power failure, the initial operation control of each movable body is executed, and then the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 2-2 is
The movable body control means can perform the confirmation movable control over a predetermined period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 requires 30 seconds for the initial movement of each movable body),
The effect control means can perform the demonstration display control after a period of at least the same length as the predetermined period has elapsed after the end of the confirmation movable control (for example, after the end of the initial operation of each movable body). The part where the customer waiting demo effect is executed after 30 seconds),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not hindered due to the demonstration display being displayed immediately after the confirmation movable control.

The game machine of form 2-3 is
The effect control means can perform the demonstration display control at different timings depending on whether the power is turned on with initialization or when the power is turned on without initialization (for example, each movable The period from the end of the initial movement of the body to the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start or by hot start),
The movable body control means is
It is possible to perform the confirmation movement control in common when the power is turned on with initialization and when the power is supplied without initialization. The period until the waiting demonstration effect is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start or by a hot start),
When power is turned on with initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed by the effect control means,
When the power is turned on without initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is finished before the demonstration display control is performed by the effect control means (for example, pachinko game machine Even if the period until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed after the initial movement of each movable body is different depending on whether 1 is started by cold start or by hot start, each movable body The part where the customer waiting demonstration is executed after the initial movement of the body),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the demonstration display is hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control both when the power is turned on with initialization and when the power is turned on without initialization. It is possible to provide a game machine that will never be lost.

The game machine of form 2-4 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
and an operation means (eg, selection button 132SG35),
The movable bodies are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the board top movable body LED 9d for the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body LED 9e for the board bottom movable body 32B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 for the frame top movable body 132SG101). Body LED 9f, Chance button 631B is provided with Chance button LED 9g),
By operating the operation means, the brightness of the light emitting means can be changed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the volume/light amount adjustment processing shown in FIG. 28, and various lamps 9a The part where the light amount (brightness) of ~9g can be adjusted),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform a specific light emission control that causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the effect control CPU 120 can A portion that causes the lower movable body 9e to emit light in an initial emphasizing mode (for example, red blinking shown in FIG. 56(B), etc.) during the initial operation of the lower movable body 32B),
When the operation means is operated during the specific light emission control, at least the light emission means emitting light under the specific light emission control is restricted so that the brightness is not based on the operation (for example, in FIG. 56(B) As shown, when the initial motion of each movable body is executed, the portion where the light amount (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g cannot be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control is not changed, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the movement confirmation of the movable body.

The game machine of form 2-5 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
and an operation means (eg, selection button 132SG35),
The movable bodies are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the board top movable body LED 9d for the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body LED 9e for the board bottom movable body 32B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 for the frame top movable body 132SG101). Body LED 9f, Chance button 631B is provided with Chance button LED 9g),
By operating the operation means, the brightness of the light emitting means can be changed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the volume/light amount adjustment processing shown in FIG. 28, and various lamps can be 9a to 9g where the amount of light (brightness) can be adjusted),
The effect control means can display a changeable display suggesting that the luminance of the light emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, A portion of the image display device 5 where the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed),
The display of the changeable display is restricted during the predetermined period, and the display of the changeable display is performed after the predetermined period ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, the image display device is 5, the menu/sound volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is not displayed, and the menu/sound volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the initial motion of each movable body),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not lose attention to the confirmation movement control by displaying the changeable display during the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 2-6 is
The movable body includes a first movable body (eg, on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (eg, under-board movable body 32B),
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the on-board movable body 32A is provided with an on-board movable body LED 9d, and the below-board movable body 32B is provided with an on-board movable body LED 9e. part),
The movable body control means moves the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control (for example, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, The part where the lower board movable body 32B is operated after the upper board movable body 32A is operated as an initial operation),
The light emission control means can perform specific light emission control for causing the light emission means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion where the control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body 9e to emit light in an initial emphasizing mode (for example, red blinking shown in FIG. 56(B), etc.) when the under-board movable body 32B is initialized.
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed by the light emission control means for the light emission means of the second movable body (for example, FIGS. 61 and 62). As shown in , when the on-board movable body 32A performs the initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e does not emit light in the initial emphasizing mode),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of drawing attention to the movable body that is moving by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 2-7 is
The production control means is
During the demonstration display, a movable body effect using the movable body can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, the on-board movable body 32A can be positioned between the origin position and the effect position). The part that can execute the production to operate between),
an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation can be displayed on the display means (for example, a portion where effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 55);
The movable body control means is
When the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform a demonstration movement control that moves the movable body in a common movement mode with the movement mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control (for example, a board After moving the upper movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position, the board movable body 32A is moved from the performance position to the origin position),
When the movable body cannot operate normally over a specific period, it is possible to determine that it is an operation error and perform the confirmation movement control (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, the effect control CPU 120 , the part where it is judged as an operation error when the movable body does not reach the production position as the initial movement, and the initial movement is repeatedly executed),
When an operation error is determined a predetermined number of times, it is possible to perform error movement control to move the movable body over a movable period longer than the movable period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control (for example, , As shown in FIG. 79, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)),
When the error movement control is performed, when the demonstration display is displayed, the movement control during the demonstration is restricted while the effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, the dead end In the customer waiting demonstration effect after the determination, the motion of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top The portion where the movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body notice),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine which prevents a malfunction from being caused by forcibly operating a movable body in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, and which does not reduce the performance effect of the demonstration display. be able to.

[Form 3]
The game machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game that makes it impossible to enter,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect before being controlled by the round game during the advantageous state,
The fanfare production is
An introductory part (for example, an introductory part. See FIGS. 52 (F2) to (F6)) for informing about the advantageous state;
A shooting direction notification part (for example, a right-handed notification part, see (F7) to (F8) in FIG. 52) that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the player of the shooting direction of the game medium;
consists of
The movable body control means is adapted to end the confirmation movement control before the start of the shooting direction notification part when power is turned on immediately before execution of the fanfare effect. control the body (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is activated by a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect, a fanfare effect accompanied by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A (right-hand hitting notification The part where the movable body is controlled so that the initial motion is completed before the part) is started (see FIG. 80),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the operation direction notification part in the fanfare effect is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 3-2 is
There are multiple types of advantageous states (for example, big hits A to E),
In the introductory part, it is possible to notify which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is the advantageous state, and as the notification, an advantageous state name display (for example, a jackpot type display) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state 132SG421), and before the advantageous state name display is displayed, the introduction display before the display of the name of the advantageous state (for example, the display of the introduction before the display of the jackpot type 132SG422) can be performed,
The confirmation movement control is a control to move the movable body so as to end the operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the display of the name of the advantageous state is displayed. (For example, in the operation confirmation control, the part where the initial operation ends before the display of the jackpot type display 132SG421 is performed in FIG. 52 (F6).),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that allows the user to grasp which advantageous state the control is to be in even if the confirmation movement control is performed during the fanfare effect.

The game machine of form 3-3 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When the fanfare effect is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is not movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part). part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating that the movable body is under the confirmation movement control even during the fanfare effect, by means of the specific light emission control and the fanfare light emission control.

The game machine of form 3-4 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
When the confirmation movement control is executed, it is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasizing mode). ,
When the fanfare effect is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect,
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means controls the first movable body when the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control when power is turned off at the same time when the fanfare effect is executed and when the power is turned on. The light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emission control, while the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the fanfare light emission control (for example, when the first movable body is moving, the first movable body The LED of the movable body emits light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting), while the LED of the second movable body emits light in a lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare production (introduction part)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating that the movable body is under the confirmation movement control even during the fanfare effect.

The game machine of form 3-5 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
When the fanfare effect is executed, it is possible to perform light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect with a first luminance,
When a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect, and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means corresponds to the fanfare effect with a second luminance during a predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed. It is possible to perform light emission control to emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare effect with the first luminance, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b , Board movable body LED 9d, board movable body LED 9e, and frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second luminance (low luminance) lower than the first luminance (high luminance) (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing power consumption and lightening the load when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 3-6 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means moves the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When the first movable body is movable by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the light emitting means of the first movable body is not subjected to the specific light emission control. Perform specific light emission control (for example, when the first movable body is operating, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial emphasized mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial emphasized mode part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of drawing attention to the movable body that is moving by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 3-7 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The production control means is capable of executing a movable body production using the movable body in the operation direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control for moving the movable body by a special action when the movable body effect is executed,
The light emission control means is
The specific light emission control is performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
The light emitting means of the movable body movable by the special effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and the first special light emission pattern emits light in a second period after the end of the first period. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned special light emission control that emits light in a second special light emission pattern with a different aspect (for example, the movable body LED of the movable body during the initial operation is advanced from the origin position to the effect position. While emitting light in a common initial emphasis mode (white lighting) at times and when retracting from the production position to the origin position, the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the production operation control is illuminated when the movable body is at the origin position. It is possible to emit light in different light-emitting modes when moving forward from to the production position and when retreating from the production position to the origin position (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the special movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

The game machine of form 3-8 is
light emitting means;
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
further comprising sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The effect control means is capable of executing a movable body effect using the movable body in the firing direction notification part,
When the movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means may perform special effect movement control for moving the movable body in a motion mode common to the motion mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control. is possible and
The light emission control means is
The specific light emission control is performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the special effect movement control to emit light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the firing direction notification part when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control. (For example, in the movable body effect, light is emitted in a mode different from the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) and in a mode corresponding to the right-handed notification part, and the sound output is limited when the movable body operates in the initial motion. , In the movable body production executed in the right-handed notification part, the part where the sound corresponding to the right-handed notification part is output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movement control and the special effect movement control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

The game machine of form 3-9 is
Display means (for example, image display device 5) is further provided,
The production control means is
A movable body effect using the movable body (see FIG. 52 (F7)) can be executed in the firing direction notification part,
an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation can be displayed on the display means;
The movable body control means is
When the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform special effect movement control for moving the movable body by a special action,
When the confirmation movement control cannot be normally completed over a specific period, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again,
When the confirmation movable control is performed over the specific period, when the movable body effect is executed, the special effect movable control is limited, while the effect display is displayed (for example, fanfare When executing a movable object effect in the right-handed notification part of the effect, the movable object is moved by a special action, and an effect display corresponding to the movable object effect can be displayed, and the operation confirmation control is performed normally over a specific period. It is possible to determine that an operation error occurs if the operation cannot be completed within a specified period of time, and perform motion confirmation control again. When the special action is restricted, the part where the effect display is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating to the player that the movable body production has been executed by displaying an effect while preventing the confirmation movement control from being hindered by the special production movement control. can.

[Mode 4]
The game machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
light emitting means;
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect movement control (for example, the movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is performed to move the movable body by the action for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance when the confirmation movable control is performed by the movable body control means;
controlling the light emitting means so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness when the effect movement control is performed by the movable body control means;
The first luminance is lower in luminance than the second luminance (for example, the movable body that performs the initial motion LED 9d on the board, the underboard movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the initial emphasized mode (white). Lighting), but the part that emits light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the production operation control (see FIG. 56 (B)),
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect before being controlled by the round game during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means, when power is cut off immediately after the fanfare effect is started by the effect control means, and the power is turned on after that, the movable body control means can perform the confirmation before the end of the fanfare effect execution period. The movable body is controlled so that the control ends (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately after the fanfare effect is started, it corresponds to a round game The part where the operation confirmation control ends before the round production starts (see FIG. 81),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the load on the game machine by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, so that the motion of the movable body is dazzling. is prevented from becoming difficult to confirm, and furthermore, the confirmation movable control when the power is turned off and the power is turned on at the same time as the execution of the fanfare performance is terminated within the execution period of the fanfare performance, and the player can perform the confirmation movable control. It is possible to provide a game machine that can face an advantageous state without worrying about the movable body that operates by.

The game machine of form 4-2 is
The effect control means displays when the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the variable display, and when the power is turned on after the power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect. It is possible to display a restoration in progress display (e.g., restoration in progress display 132SG510) on the means,
The light emission control means is operated in the following cases: a case where the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during variable display; It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
In the movable body control means, when a power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on, It is possible to perform the confirmation movement control (for example, when power is turned off during variable display and then turned on, or when power is turned off at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed, and then power is turned on). The part where it is possible to perform operation check control in the case where the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents complicated processing when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 4-3 is
The production control means is capable of displaying a restoration-in-progress display (for example, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the fanfare production and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect, and then the power is turned on, the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not movable is controlled by the confirmation movement control over the execution period of the fanfare effect. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights off) corresponding to the display during restoration) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of attracting attention to the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control even during restoration.

The game machine of form 4-4 is
The production control means is capable of displaying a restoration-in-progress display (for example, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the fanfare production and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
When a power failure occurs at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration-in-progress display during the execution period of the fanfare effect. It is possible to control light emission,
The light emission control during restoration is performed at a luminance lower than that of the fanfare light emission control (for example, during restoration from a power failure, the light emission luminance of the movable body LED in the effect movable control (movable body effect in the success/failure button effect). A portion that may emit light (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing power consumption and lightening the load when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 4-5 is
The production control means is capable of displaying a restoration-in-progress display (for example, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) when a power failure occurs during the fanfare production and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
When a power failure occurs at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration-in-progress display during the execution period of the fanfare effect. It is possible to perform light emission control,
The light-emitting mode used in the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the display during restoration is not used in the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during restoration is a fanfare effect (a song during the big hit) is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of informing that the system is being restored when the power is turned on, even if the fanfare effect is being performed before the power failure.

The game machine of form 4-6 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movement control and the operation mode of the movable body by the effect movement control are common,
The light emission control means is
performing the specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed;
The light-emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light-emitting pattern during a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, the light-emitting mode is different from that of the first light-emitting pattern. It is possible to perform the special light emission control that emits light in a different second special light emission pattern (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by performance operation control (for example, from the origin position The movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e on the board, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B are common to the action mode of moving to the production position), and the initial action ends in the operation confirmation control. It emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until it is done, and in the effect operation control (for example, win/fail button effect), it emits light in the rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance operation period), and in the second period ( For example, during the retraction operation period), a portion that emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the effect movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

[Mode 5]
The game machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
light emitting means;
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect movement control (for example, the movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is performed to move the movable body by the action for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance when the confirmation movable control is performed by the movable body control means;
controlling the light emitting means so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness when the effect movement control is performed by the movable body control means;
The first luminance is lower in luminance than the second luminance (for example, the movable body that performs the initial motion LED 9d on the board, the underboard movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the initial emphasized mode (white). Lighting), but the part that emits light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the production operation control (see FIG. 56 (B)),
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect before being controlled by the round game during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means is configured to end the confirmation movement control before the end of the easy-to-enter state when power is turned off immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on. Control the movable body (for example, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on just before the fanfare effect ends, the operation confirmation control is ended before the opening control of the big winning opening in the first round game ends. The part where it becomes possible (see Figure 82),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the load on the game machine by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, so that the motion of the movable body is dazzling. In addition, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, the confirmation movable control is ended before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (initial It is possible to provide a game machine where the attacker can aim for winning even after the action.

The game machine of form 5-2 is
The effect control means controls a specific display area (for example, right game area, second path, ) indicates the shooting direction of the game medium (for example, a right-handed promotion display 132SG430), and a round game-related display related to the round game in the special display area (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball number display 132SG452, number of pitches displayed 132SG453, number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.) can be displayed,
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display region with respect to the specific display region (see FIGS. 83 and 84).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that can be moved by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 5-3 is
In the round game after the fanfare effect is completed, the effect control means provides a shooting direction instruction display (for example, right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the shooting direction of the game medium in the specific display area and a special display area. It is possible to display the given game value display related to the game value (for example, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, etc.),
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display region with respect to the specific display region (see FIGS. 83 and 84).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 5-4 is
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When power is cut off immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means of the movable body that is not movable by the confirmation movement control is caused to emit light in a lamp pattern corresponding to the round game. It is possible to perform medium emission control,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the big hit song (round production) part (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of attracting attention to the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control even during a round game by the specific light emission control.

The game machine of form 5-5 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When the power is turned off immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during the round to cause the light emission means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game. can be,
When the first movable body is movable by the confirmation movement control, the light emitting means of the first movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emission control, and the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light during the round. Light is emitted by control (for example, when the first movable body is movable by operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting), while the second movable body is movable The part where the body LED emits light in a manner corresponding to the song (round production) during the big hit),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating that the movable body is moving by the confirmation movement control even during the round game.

The game machine of form 5-6 is
The light emission control means is
In the round game after the fanfare effect is executed, it is possible to perform light emission control during the round in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
When a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light by the during-round light emission control,
The light emission control during the round, which is performed when the power is turned on immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on, is performed when the power failure does not occur immediately before the end of the fanfare effect. The brightness is lower than that during the round light emission control (for example, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that does not perform the initial action emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during the big hit (round production) is such that the fanfare production ends. In the round game when the Pachinko game machine 1 is not started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before, the movable body LED of the movable body which does not perform the initial operation corresponds to the music during the jackpot (round performance). The part that may be lower in luminance than the emission luminance when emitting light in),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing power consumption and lightening the load when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 5-7 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movement control and the operation mode of the movable body by the effect movement control are common,
The light emission control means is
performing the specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed;
The light-emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light-emitting pattern during a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, the light-emitting mode is different from that of the first light-emitting pattern. It is possible to perform the special light emission control that emits light in a different second special light emission pattern (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by performance operation control (for example, from the origin position The movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e on the board movable body, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the chance button 631B complete the initial action in the operation confirmation control. It emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until it is done, and in the effect operation control (for example, win/fail button effect), it emits light in the rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance operation period), and in the second period ( For example, during the retraction period), the part that emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the effect movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

[Mode 6]
The game machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
light emitting means;
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect movement control (for example, the movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is performed to move the movable body by the action for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance when the confirmation movable control is performed by the movable body control means;
controlling the light emitting means so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness when the effect movement control is performed by the movable body control means;
The first luminance is lower in luminance than the second luminance (for example, the movable body that performs the initial motion LED 9d on the board, the underboard movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the initial emphasized mode (white). Lighting), but the part that emits light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the production operation control (see FIG. 56 (B)),
The game control means can set the variable means (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (e.g., open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means is adapted to terminate the confirmation movement control before the easy-entry state ends when power is cut off at the same time as the easy-entry state is entered and the power is turned on thereafter. To control the movable body (for example, the operation check control when the power is turned off and the power is turned on immediately after the opening control of the large winning opening in the first round game is started, in the first round game A portion that can be terminated before the opening control of the big winning opening is terminated (see FIG. 85),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the load on the game machine by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, so that the motion of the movable body is dazzling. In addition, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on at the same time that the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state, the confirmation movable control is terminated before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows an attacker to win a prize even after the initial action.

The game machine of form 6-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means is powered on after a power failure occurs during variable display, and when power is switched off at the same time when the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state, and then power is turned on. When it is done, it is possible to display a display during restoration (for example, display during restoration 132SG510) on the display means,
The light emission control means is powered on after a power failure occurs during variable display, or when power failure occurs at the same time when the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state, and power is turned on thereafter. In the case where it is performed, it is possible to perform light emission control during restoration to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
The movable body control means is powered on after a power failure occurs during variable display, and when the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state and power is switched on. It is possible to perform the confirmation movement control (for example, when power is cut off during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when the big prize opening is controlled to be open). At the same time, a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on, and it is possible to perform operation check control),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the complexity of the processing when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 6-3 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means can display a recovery-in-progress display (for example, recovery-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the easy-to-enter state of the variable means and then the power is turned on. is possible and
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When power is cut off at the same time that the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on, until the variable means is controlled from the easy-to-enter state to the non-enterable state in which the game medium cannot enter. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration over a period of
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during restoration. See FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of drawing attention to the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The game machine of form 6-4 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means can display a recovery-in-progress display (for example, recovery-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the easy-to-enter state of the variable means and then the power is turned on. is possible and
The light emission control means is
In one round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state over a specified period, it is possible to perform light emission control during the round, in which the light emission means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
When a power failure occurs at the same time as the one round game is started, and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means corresponds to the restoration display for a period until the one round game is finished. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration that emits light in the light emission pattern
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a luminance lower than that of the light emission control during the round (for example, during restoration from a power outage, the light emission luminance of the movable body LED in the effect movable control (movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is lower than the luminance The part that can be made to emit light with
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying that the system is being restored while reducing the load on the gaming machine by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 6-5 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means displays a recovery-in-progress display (for example, recovery-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during control of the variable device to the easy-to-enter state and the power is turned on. it is possible to
The light emission control means is
In one round game in which the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state over a specified period, it is possible to perform round-time light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
When a power failure occurs at the same time as the one round game is started, and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means corresponds to the restoration display for a period until the one round game is finished. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration that emits light in the light emission pattern
The light-emitting mode used in the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the display during restoration is not used in the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during restoration is a round production (big hit song) A portion that is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of informing that the game is being restored when the power is turned on, even if the round game is being played before the power is cut off.

[Mode 7]
The game machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
light emitting means;
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect movement control (for example, the movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is performed to move the movable body by the action for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance when the confirmation movable control is performed by the movable body control means;
controlling the light emitting means so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness when the effect movement control is performed by the movable body control means;
The first luminance is lower in luminance than the second luminance (for example, the movable body that performs the initial motion LED 9d on the board, the underboard movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the initial emphasized mode (white). Lighting), but the part that emits light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the production operation control (see FIG. 56 (B)),
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The movable body control means, when a power failure occurs immediately before the easy-entry state ends in one round game and the power is turned on after that, before the easy-entry state ends in the next round game The movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control ends before the first round game (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the first round game , the opening control period and the initial operation of the large winning opening so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the large winning opening in the second round game is completed (see FIG. 52 (F10)) The part where the period is set (see FIG. 86),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the load on the game machine by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, so that the motion of the movable body is dazzling. is difficult to confirm, and furthermore, the confirmation movable control when the power is turned off and the power is turned on immediately before the end of one round game is finished before the next round game is finished, and the confirmation is performed. To provide a game machine in which a player can face a round game even after the movement control is finished.

The game machine of form 7-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means controls a specific display area (for example, right game area, second path, ) indicates the shooting direction of the game medium (for example, a right-handed promotion display 132SG430), and a round game-related display related to the round game in the special display area (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball number display 132SG452, number of pitches displayed 132SG453, number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.) can be displayed,
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display region with respect to the specific display region (see FIGS. 83 and 84).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that can be moved by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 7-3 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means, in the next round game that is started after the end of the one round game, a shooting direction instruction display (for example, right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the shooting direction of the game medium in a specific display area; It is possible to display a given game value display (for example, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, etc.) related to the game value given to the special display area,
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display region with respect to the specific display region (see FIGS. 83 and 84).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 7-4 is
The movable body control means controls the variable means in the one round game when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the easy-to-enter state of the variable means in the one round game, and then the power is turned on. Move the movable body by the confirmation movable control after the control to make it impossible to enter (see FIG. 86),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 7-5 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movement control and the operation mode of the movable body by the effect movement control are common,
The light emission control means is
performing the specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed;
The light-emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light-emitting pattern during a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, the light-emitting mode is different from that of the first light-emitting pattern. It is possible to perform the special light emission control that emits light in a different second special light emission pattern (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by performance operation control (for example, from the origin position The movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e on the board, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B are common to the action mode of moving to the production position), and the initial action ends in the operation confirmation control. It emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until it is done, and in the effect operation control (for example, win/fail button effect), it emits light in the rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance operation period), and in the second period ( For example, during the retraction operation period), a portion that emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the effect movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

[Mode 8]
The game machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
light emitting means;
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect movement control that moves the movable body by an operation for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state ),
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance when the confirmation movable control is performed by the movable body control means;
controlling the light emitting means so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness when the effect movement control is performed by the movable body control means;
The first luminance is lower in luminance than the second luminance (for example, the movable body that performs the initial motion LED 9d on the board, the underboard movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the initial emphasized mode (white). Lighting), but the part that emits light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the production operation control (see FIG. 56 (B)),
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
When the movable body control means is controlled to the impenetrable state in one round game, power failure occurs at the same time, and then the power is turned on, the movable body can be confirmed before the impenetrable state ends. The movable body is controlled so that the control ends (for example, after the power failure occurs just before the opening control of the big winning hole in the third round game ends, the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start If it is done, the opening control and round of the big winning opening so that the initial movement of the movable body ends within the period until the third special round interval period ends (see (F21) to (F29) in FIG. 53) A portion where an interval period and an initial operation period are set (see FIG. 87),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the load on the game machine by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, so that the motion of the movable body is dazzling. is prevented from becoming difficult to confirm, and furthermore, the next round game ends the confirmation movable control when the power is turned off and the power is turned on at the same time when the variable means becomes an inaccessible state in one round game. It is possible to provide a game machine in which a player can face a round game even after the confirmation movable control is finished.

The game machine of form 8-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means is powered on when power is turned off during variable display, and when power is turned off at the same time when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state, and then power is turned on. In this case, it is possible to display a restoration-in-progress display (for example, restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means,
The light emission control means is powered on after a power failure occurs during variable display, or when power is switched off at the same time when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state, and then powered on. In this case, it is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
In the movable body control means, power is cut off during variable display and then turned on, or at the same time when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state, power is cut off and then turned on. It is possible to perform the confirmation movable control in the case where the power is cut off during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where the big prize opening is controlled to be open. The part where it is possible to perform operation check control when power failure occurs at the same time and then the power is turned on),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the complexity of the processing when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 8-3 is
Effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) is provided,
The effect control means displays during recovery on the display means (e.g., recovery It is possible to display the medium display 132SG510),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
In the one round game, when the variable means is controlled to the entry-impossible state and at the same time power failure occurs, and then the power is turned on, the next round game after the end of the one round game is started. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration over a period of up to
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during restoration (See FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of drawing attention to the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control even during restoration.

The game machine of form 8-4 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The production control means is
In the one round game, when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state and power failure occurs at the same time, and then the power is turned on, a display during recovery (for example, display during recovery 132SG510) is displayed on the display means. it is possible to
An interval effect can be executed when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform an interval light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval effect during an execution period of the interval effect,
In the one round game, when the variable means is controlled to the entry-impossible state and at the same time power failure occurs, and then the power is turned on, the next round game after the end of the one round game is started. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
The light emission control during restoration is performed at a luminance lower than that of the light emission control during the interval (for example, during recovery from a power failure, the light emission luminance of the movable body LED is lower than that of the movable body LED in the production movement control (movable body production in the success/failure button production). The part that can be made to emit light with
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying that the system is being restored while reducing the load on the gaming machine by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 8-5 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The production control means is
In the first round game, when the variable means is controlled to be in an unenterable state, power failure occurs at the same time, power failure occurs, and then the power is turned on. It is possible to display the medium display 132SG510),
An interval effect can be executed when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform an interval light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval effect during an execution period of the interval effect,
In the one round game, when the variable means is controlled to the entry-impossible state and at the same time power failure occurs, and then the power is turned on, the next round game after the end of the one round game is started. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
The light-emitting mode used in the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the display during restoration is not used in the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the interval production (for example, the mode corresponding to the display during restoration (lights out) is an interval production (big hit song) portion not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying that the system is being restored when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 8-6 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect for informing whether or not to be controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The interval production is
the introduction part (see FIGS. 53 (F21) to (F23));
a result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 53) that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the result of the introductory part;
consists of
The confirmation movement control is a control to move the movable body so as to end an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the result notification part is started.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the interval performance is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 8-7 is
sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect for informing whether or not to be controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The interval production is
the introduction part (see FIGS. 53 (F21) to (F23));
a result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 53) that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the result of the introductory part;
consists of
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The production control means is capable of executing a movable body production using the movable body in the result notification part,
When the movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means may perform special effect movement control to move the movable body in a motion mode common to the motion mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control. is possible and
The light emission control means is
performing the specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed;
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the special effect movement control to emit light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control. (For example, in the result notification part, it is possible to execute a movable body effect using the lower board movable body 32B as a promotion effect (see FIG. 53 (F24)), and when the movable body effect is executed, it is operated by operation confirmation control. It is possible to control the performance operation in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B, and the sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates by operation confirmation control, and in the movable body performance A portion where a sound corresponding to the movable body effect is output when the lower board movable body 32B operates),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movement control and the special effect movement control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

The game machine of form 8-8 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect for informing whether or not to be controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The interval production is
the introduction part (see FIGS. 53 (F21) to (F23));
a result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 53) that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the result of the introductory part;
consists of
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The production control means is
A movable body effect using the movable body (see FIG. 53 (F24)) can be executed in the result notification part,
The display means can display an effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body presentation,
The movable body control means is
When the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform a special effect movement control that moves the movable body in a motion mode common to the movement mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
When the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again,
In the one round game in which the interval performance is executed, the power failure occurs immediately before the entry-impossible state is controlled, and then the confirmation movable control that is started when the power is turned on does not end normally. the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the movable body effect,
When the movable body effect is executed during the specific period during which the confirmation movement control is performed, the effect display is displayed while the special effect movement control is restricted (for example, the operation confirmation control is specified When it is not possible to end normally over a period of time, it is determined as an operation error, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control again, and the big winning opening is closed in one round game in which the interval effect is executed. If the power failure occurs immediately before the state is controlled, and the operation confirmation control that starts when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect. However, if the promotion effect is executed during a specific period during which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the effect display may be displayed while the movable body effect is restricted),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating to the player that the movable body production has been executed by displaying effects while the confirmation movement control is not hindered by the special production movement control. can.

The game machine of form 8-9 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movement control and the operation mode of the movable body by the effect movement control are common,
The light emission control means is
The specific light emission control is performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
The light-emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light-emitting pattern during a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, the light-emitting mode is different from that of the first light-emitting pattern. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned special light emission control to emit light in a different second special light emission pattern (for example, the movable body on board LED 9d, under board movable body LED 9e, frame movable body LED 9f, chance button 631B can be operated In the confirmation control, light is emitted in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until the initial action is completed, and in the effect operation control (for example, in the case of promotion success of the promotion effect), in the first period (for example, the advance operation period) emits light in a rainbow flash mode, and in a second period (for example, during the retraction operation period), a portion that emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the effect movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

[Mode 9]
The game machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot B) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The effect control means can execute a notification effect (e.g. promotion effect) for notifying which advantageous state is in a specific round game in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state,
The notification effect is
an introduction part (see, for example, FIGS. 53 (F21) to (F23));
a result notification part (for example, see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 53) that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the result of the introductory part;
consists of
In the case of the first advantageous state, an effect corresponding to the first advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
In the case of the second advantageous state, an effect corresponding to the second advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
The movable body control means, when power failure occurs immediately before the specific round game is started and the power is turned on after that, the confirmation movable control is performed before the result notification part is started. The movable body is controlled so as to end (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 was started with a hot start after a power failure occurred immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the second round game ended. In this case, the opening control of the large winning opening and the round interval period and the initial action period are set so that the initial action of the movable body is finished before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed in the third round game is started. set part (see Fig. 89),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the notification effect is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 9-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
After the fanfare effect is completed, the effect control means controls a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path) in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state for a specified period of time. ) indicates the shooting direction of the game medium (for example, a right-handed promotion display 132SG430), and a round game-related display related to the round game in the special display area (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball number display 132SG452, number of pitches displayed 132SG453, number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.) can be displayed,
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display region with respect to the specific display region (see FIGS. 83 and 84).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 9-3 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
In the specific round game, the effect control means provides a shooting direction instruction display (for example, a right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the shooting direction of the game medium in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen), and a special display area It is possible to display a given game value display related to the given game value (for example, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, etc.),
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display region with respect to the specific display region (see FIGS. 83 and 84).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that can be moved by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 9-4 is
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to perform notification light emission control that causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is not movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is a part that is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part) (See FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating that the movable body is under the confirmation movement control even during the notification effect by the specific light emission control and the notification light emission control.

The game machine of form 9-5 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When a power failure occurs immediately before the specific round game is started and the power is turned on after that, notification light emission control is performed to cause the light emission means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification performance. is possible and
The light emission control means, when power failure occurs immediately before the specific round game is started, when the power is turned on after that, when the movable body is movable by the confirmation movement control, the movable body The light emitting means of is caused to emit light by the specific light emission control (for example, when power failure occurs just before the third round game is started and the power is turned on after that, the movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control. When it is on, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial action are not in the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), but in the initial emphasis mode ( white light) (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 9-6 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
In the specific round game, it is possible to perform notification light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, rainbow light emission mode) corresponding to the notification effect,
When a power failure occurs immediately before the specific round game is started and the power is turned on after that, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light by the notification light emission control,
The power failure occurs immediately before the specific round game is started, and then the power is turned on. (For example, during the second round interval period or the third round game, the operation confirmation control is started and the on-board movable body LED 9d of the movable body that initially operates , Underboard movable body LED 9e, Frame upper movable body LED 9f, and Chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but the part that emits light at a lower luminance than when it emits light in the effect operation control (promotion effect). 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 9-7 is
The effect control means is capable of executing an action promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an action during the execution period of the notification effect (see FIG. 53 (F23)),
The action promotion effect is executed in the introductory part (see (F21) to (F23) in FIG. 53),
The movable body control means terminates the confirmation movable control before the start of the introductory part when the power is turned off immediately before the specific round game is started and the power is turned on. (For example, the operation promotion part of the introduction part of the promotion effect executed in the third round game, that is, the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B is started. the part where the initial movement of the movable body is completed before moving),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the action promotion effect in the introduction part is not hindered by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 9-8 is
light emitting means;
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
further comprising sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The effect control means can execute a movable body effect using the movable body in the result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)),
When the movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means may perform special effect movement control to move the movable body in a motion mode common to the motion mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control. is possible and
The light emission control means is
performing the specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed;
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the special effect movement control to emit light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control. (For example, when the initial operation is performed, the underboard movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode corresponding to the restoration display 132SG510 (for example, the initial emphasis mode; white lighting), but the output of the background sound (BGM) is limited and promoted. When the performance is performed in the production, the lower board movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode (for example, rainbow mode) corresponding to the promotion performance (result reporting part), while the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result reporting part) is emitted. The part where the sound effect is output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movement control and the special effect movement control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

The game machine of form 9-9 is
The production control means is
A movable body effect using the movable body can be executed in the result notification part,
A display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation,
The movable body control means is
When the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform a special effect movement control that moves the movable body in a motion mode common to the movement mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
When the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again,
When the power failure occurs immediately before the specific round game is started, and the confirmation movable control that is started when the power is turned on after that does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined as an operation error is Overlaps with the execution period of the movable body production,
When the movable body effect is executed during the specific period during which the confirmation movement control is performed, the effect display is displayed while the special effect movement control is restricted (for example, the operation confirmation control is specified When it is not possible to end normally over the period, it is determined as an operation error, and it is possible to perform operation confirmation control again, and immediately after the third round performance in which the promotion performance is started is started. When the power is cut off and the operation check control that starts when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect, and the operation check control is stopped. If the promotion effect is executed during the specific period that is being performed, the effect display may be displayed while the movable body effect is restricted),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating to the player that the movable body production has been executed by displaying effects while the confirmation movement control is not hindered by the special production movement control. can.

[Mode 10]
The game machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to perform a round game multiple times in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The production control means can execute an ending production after the final round game is completed (see (F12) to (F14) in FIG. 52),
The ending production
the introduction part (see FIG. 52 (F12) and FIG. 53 (F31));
Special state notification part (for example, time saving state notification part. See FIG. 52 (F13), FIG. 53 (F32), (F34)) that is executed after the introduction part and performs notification regarding the special state controlled after the advantageous state and,
consists of
The movable body control means, when power failure occurs immediately before the easy-to-enter state in the final round game ends and the power is turned on after that, before the special state notification part is started. The movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control ends (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the tenth final round game, In the ending period, so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time saving state notification part (see FIG. 53 (F32), (F34)) in which information about the time saving state is notified is started, the ending period and the initial The part where the operation period is set (see FIG. 90),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the special state notification part in the ending effect is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 10-2 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When power failure occurs immediately before the easy-to-enter state in the final round game ends and the power is turned on after that, the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not movable by the confirmation movement control is set to the ending effect. It is possible to perform ending light emission control that emits light with the corresponding lamp pattern,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is a portion not used in the mode corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part) (See FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating that the movable body is under the confirmation movement control even during the ending effect by the specific light emission control and the ending light emission control.

The game machine of form 10-3 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
Ending light emission control for causing the light emission means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect when power failure occurs immediately before the easy entry state ends in the final round game and the power is turned on thereafter. and
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means, when a power failure occurs immediately before the easy-to-enter state ends in the final round game and the power is turned on after that, the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control. At this time, the light emitting means of the first movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emission control, while the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the ending light emission control (e.g. While the body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating are the ending effect (introduction part), see FIG.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating that the movable body is moving by the confirmation movement control even during the ending effect.

The game machine of form 10-4 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
When the ending effect is executed, it is possible to perform ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect,
When a power failure occurs immediately before the easy-to-enter state ends in the final round game and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means can emit light by the ending light emission control,
In the final round game, the power failure occurs immediately before the easy-to-enter state ends, and the ending light emission control performed when the power is turned on after that does not cause the power failure immediately before the ending effect ends. (For example, when the movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, and the frame upper movable body LED 9d of the movable body that performs the initial operation. The movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g emit light with low luminance in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), not in the mode corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part) (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing power consumption and lightening the load when the power is turned on.

[Mode 11]
The game machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
light emitting means;
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect movement control (for example, the movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is performed to move the movable body by the action for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance when the confirmation movable control is performed by the movable body control means;
controlling the light emitting means so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness when the effect movement control is performed by the movable body control means;
The first luminance is lower in luminance than the second luminance (for example, the movable body that performs the initial motion LED 9d on the board, the underboard movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the initial emphasized mode (white). Lighting), but the part that emits light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the production operation control (see FIG. 56 (B)),
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to perform a round game multiple times in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The effect control means can execute an ending effect after the final round game is completed,
The movable body control means controls the confirmation movement before the end of the execution period of the ending effect when power failure occurs immediately after the ending effect is started by the effect control means and the power is turned on. Control the movable body so that the control ends (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect, during the ending period, The ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time saving state notification part (see FIG. 53 (F32) and (F34)) is started. part, see Fig. 91),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the load on the game machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, the power is cut off at the same time as the execution of the ending effect, and the confirmation movable control when the power is turned on is performed within the execution period of the ending effect. It is possible to provide a game machine in which the game ends with (the player can face the high base state without worrying about the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control).

The game machine of form 11-2 is
The effect control means displays when the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the variable display, and when the power is turned on after the power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending effect. It is possible to display a restoration in progress display (e.g., restoration in progress display 132SG510) on the means,
The light-emission control means is operated in the following cases: a case where the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during variable display; It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
The movable body control means, when the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the variable display, and when the power is turned on after the power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending effect, It is possible to perform the confirmation movable control (for example, when the power is turned off during the variable display and then the power is turned on, or when the power is turned off at the same time as the large winning opening is controlled to be open). , then when the power is turned on, the part where it is possible to perform operation check control),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents complicated processing when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 11-3 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying a restoration-in-progress display (for example, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the ending production and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When a power failure occurs simultaneously with execution of the ending effect by the effect control means and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means is illuminated in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration over the execution period of the ending effect. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light with
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during restoration. See FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of attracting attention to the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control even during restoration.

The game machine of form 11-4 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying a restoration-in-progress display (for example, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the ending production and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect during the execution period of the ending effect,
When a power failure occurs at the same time as the execution of the ending effect and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration over the execution period of the ending effect. It is possible to control light emission,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a luminance lower than that of the ending light emission control (for example, during power failure recovery, the light emission luminance of the movable body LED in the effect movable control (movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is performed at a lower luminance than A portion that may emit light (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing power consumption and lightening the load when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 11-5 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying a restoration-in-progress display (for example, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the ending production and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect during the execution period of the ending effect,
When a power failure occurs at the same time as the execution of the ending effect and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration over the execution period of the ending effect. It is possible to control light emission,
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect (for example, the mode corresponding to the display during restoration (turns off) is used in the ending effect (ending introduction) A portion that is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the corresponding mode (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying that restoration is in progress when the power is turned on, even if the ending effect is being performed before power failure.

[Mode 12]
The game machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
and a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, normal game state) and a special state (for example, time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The specific identification information includes first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and second identification information (e.g., second special symbol),
The normal state is a state in which variable display of the first identification information is likely to be executed,
The special state is a state in which variable display of the second identification information is likely to be executed,
During the special state, information about the advantageous state (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454) can be displayed in the first display area of the display means,
During the special state, in the second display area of the display means, pending information (for example, second pending storage number and second pending display 132SG002) related to variable display of the second identification information can be displayed,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the first display region with respect to the second display region (for example, a power failure occurs during time saving). After that, when the initial operation is performed when the hot start is started and the recovery is performed, the on-board movable body 32A is displayed in the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012). The time during which the player becomes invisible (or impossible) due to duplication is made shorter than the time during which the underboard movable body 32B overlaps with the big win information display (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454). 2, the portion where each movable body is set to perform the initial operation (see FIG. 92),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control, is less hindered than that of the first display area.

The game machine of form 12-2 is
Information about the advantageous state displayed in the first display area does not change during the special state, while pending information displayed in the second display area can change during the special state (e.g., The number of consecutive games / total number of balls displayed 132SG454 does not change during the time saving state, while the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 change the number of winnings even in the time saving state and predictive notice etc. part whose display mode can be changed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that is less disturbed than information regarding an advantageous state in which the visibility of the pending information, which may change with the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control, does not change.

The game machine of form 12-3 is
The range in which the movable body movable by the confirmation movement control overlaps the first display area is larger than the range in which the movable body movable by the confirmation movement control overlaps the second display area (for example, Due to the initial action, the board movable body 32A moves the number of consecutive residences above the range where the board movable body 32A overlaps the second reserved storage number display area 5SL and the second reserved display area 132SG012 of the second reserved display 132SG002. / The portion where the range overlapping the display area of the total number of balls displayed 132SG454 is larger),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control, is less hindered than that of the first display area.

[Mode 13]
The game machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect that prompts the player to move during the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern,
The specific variable display pattern is
The first part (for example, the period of (D1) to (D5) in FIG. 50) until the action promotion effect is executed;
a second part that is executed after the first part and that notifies the result of the action-promoting effect (for example, the result notification part of (D6) and (D7) in FIG. 50);
consists of
The movable body control means is configured to perform the confirmation movable control before the start of the second part when a power failure occurs immediately before the specific variable display is started and the power is turned on thereafter. Control the movable body so as to end (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power failure occurs just before the end of the variation before the button notice is executed, A portion where the movable body is controlled so that the initial action is completed before the button notice (result notification part) is started (see FIG. 94),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second part in the action promoting effect is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 13-2 is
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) is further provided,
Said game control means is capable of transmitting specific information (for example, a prize-winning effect designation command designating button announcement execution, etc.) to said effect control means,
The effect control means can perform the action promotion effect based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means can change the control content of the confirmation movement control based on the specific information when a power failure occurs immediately before the specific fluctuation is started and the power is turned on after that. Possible (for example, if a variation pattern specification command that specifies a specific variation pattern (with button notice) is received within a specified time (eg, 4000 ms) after receiving a power failure recovery specification command, the initial operation being executed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with a shorter operation period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial operation being executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control in consideration of the start of a specific variation.

[Mode 14]
The game machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The production control means is capable of executing a start-time production (for example, start-time notice) when a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern is started,
The production at the start is
Introduction part (see FIGS. 48 (B2) to (B6)),
a result notification part (see FIGS. 48(B3a) to (B6a)) that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the result of the introductory part;
consists of
The movable body control means, when a power failure occurs immediately before the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern is started and the power is turned on after that, before the result notification part is started. The movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control ends (for example, after a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the start notice is executed, the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started. A portion in which the movable body is controlled so that the initial motion is completed before the start time notice (result reporting part) is started (see FIG. 95),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the start stage effect is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 14-2 is
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) is further provided,
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information (for example, a prize-winning effect designation command designating advance notice execution at the start) to the effect control means, and
The effect control means is capable of performing the start time effect based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means can change the control content of the confirmation movement control based on the specific information when power failure occurs immediately before the specific fluctuation is started and the power is turned on thereafter. (For example, based on the specific effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial action so that the initial action ends before the result notification part of the start time notice is started. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control in consideration of the start of a specific variation.

[Mode 15]
The game machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The effect control means can execute variable display of the identification information based on a specific variable display pattern, and once the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the variable display of the identification information is executed again. It is possible to perform a re-variable display notification effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice) to notify
The re-variable display notification effect is
an introductory part (see FIGS. 49(C3) to (C5))) for inciting whether or not re-variable display of identification information is to be executed;
a result notification part (see FIGS. 49(C6), (C10), and (C9)) which is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
consists of
The movable body control means, when a power failure occurs immediately before the variable display of the identification information based on the specific variable display pattern is started and the power is turned on after that, before the result notification part is started. Control the movable body so that the confirmation movable control is completed before (for example, after a power failure occurs just before the end of the variation before the variation in which the pseudo consecutive notice is executed, the pachinko game machine 1 A portion in which the movable body is controlled so that the initial motion is completed before the start of the pseudo continuous notice (result notification part) when activated by hot start (see FIG. 96),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the re-variable display notification effect is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 15-2 is
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) is further provided,
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information (for example, a prize-winning effect designation command that designates pseudo consecutive notice execution) to the effect control means,
The effect control means can perform the re-variable display notification effect (for example, pseudo continuous notice) based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means can change the control content of the confirmation movement control based on the specific information when power failure occurs immediately before the specific fluctuation is started and the power is turned on thereafter. (For example, based on the specific effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial action so that the initial action ends before the result notification part of the pseudo continuous notice is started. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control in consideration of the start of a specific change.

[Mode 16]
The game machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
and a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, normal game state) and a special state (for example, time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The normal state is a state designed to shoot the game medium to the first game area (for example, the left game area) side,
The special state is a state designed to shoot the game medium to the second game area (for example, the right game area) side,
The display means, in the normal state, displays a first game area side launch promotion display (for example, a left-hand hitting promotion display) in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen) to prompt the player to shoot the game medium toward the first game area side. 132SG530) can be displayed, and a display corresponding to the normal state can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the predetermined display region with respect to the specific display region (for example, when power is cut off during variable display in a normal state). After the occurrence, if the initial action is performed when the hot start is activated and the restoration is performed, the time period during which the player's visual recognition is difficult (or impossible) is shortened because the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530. The part that is set so as to be (see FIGS. 97 and 98),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the first game area side promotion notification is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 16-2 is
The display means is capable of displaying a recovery-in-progress display (for example, a recovery-in-progress display 132SG510) until the variable display ends when a power failure occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on,
It is possible to perform the first game area promotion notification (for example, left-handed promotion display 132SG530) when the restoration display is displayed,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably notifying the shooting direction of the game medium even during recovery.

The game machine of form 16-3 is
As the first game area promotion notification, it is possible to display the first game area promotion notification display (for example, left-handed promotion display 132SG530) and output the first game area promotion notification sound,
When the confirmation movable control is performed based on power-on with initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, while the first game area promotion notification sound is output. restricted,
When the confirmation movable control is performed based on power-on without initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, and the first game area promotion notification sound is output. is performed (for example, while the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, the left-hand hitting operation promotion notification sound is limited, and after the power failure occurs, the operation is confirmed based on the hot start. When the control is performed, the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, while the left-hand hitting operation promotion notification sound is output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform a suitable first game area promotion notification in consideration of the situation when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 16-4 is
In the normal state, when a game medium enters a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41) provided on the side of the second game area, the first game area promotion notification (for example, left-handed promotion display 132SG530) is performed. is possible and
It is possible to perform a special first game area promotion notification having a higher priority than the first game area promotion notification based on the fact that a specific number of game media have entered the predetermined area in the normal state,
It is possible to perform the special first game area promotion notification over a period longer than the period in which the movable body is movable by the confirmation movable control (for example, in the normal state, the gate switch 21 has a specific number of game balls ( For example, it is possible to perform a special left-handed operation promotion notification with a higher priority than the left-handed operation promotion notification based on the fact that 5 pieces) has entered, and the period during which the movable body operates by operation confirmation control (for example, 20 seconds), it is possible to perform special left-handed operation promotion notification over a period longer than
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control does not hinder the special first game area promotion notification.

[Mode 17]
The game machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The display means is
During the round game, when a power failure occurs and the power is turned on after that, a restoration-in-progress display (for example, restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
After that, in the predetermined display area, displays corresponding to the round game (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.) are displayed. is possible and
When displaying either the display corresponding to the round game or the display during recovery, a shooting direction instruction display (for example, right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the shooting direction of the game medium is displayed in the specific display area,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, power failure during the round game in the jackpot game state). occurs, when the initial action is performed when it is activated by hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A displays information corresponding to the round game (for example, round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, output Pitch number display 132SG453, number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.) are superimposed on the front side of the predetermined area (see FIG. 83(A)) to promote right-handed hitting displayed in the operation confirmation control. A portion that operates so as not to overlap on the front side of the display 132SG430 (see FIGS. 99 and 100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 17-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The production control means can execute a movable body production using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined action when the movable body effect is executed,
the movable body movable by the predetermined movement control is superimposed on the specific display area;
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined movable control (for example, when power is turned on after a power failure occurs during variable display in a normal state). The initial action is performed in a motion mode including a movable body notice production motion (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support portion 32b overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. After a power failure occurs during the variable display in the time saving state, the initial action when the power is turned on is the production action in the movable body notice that overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating action between the origin position and the intermediate position ), the portion performed in a mode of operation that does not include
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not hindered by the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

[Mode 18]
The game machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
and a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The display means is
When a power failure occurs and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a restoration in progress display (for example, a restoration in progress display 132SG510),
It is possible to display character information indicating that restoration is in progress in a predetermined display area as the display during restoration,
Along with the display during recovery, it is possible to display a shooting direction instruction display (for example, right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the shooting direction of the game medium in a specific display area,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, power failure during the round game in the jackpot game state). After the occurrence of, when the initial action is performed when the hot start is activated and the recovery is performed, the on-board movable body 32A is displayed in the operation confirmation control rather than being superimposed on the front side of the recovery display 132SG510. A portion that operates so as not to overlap on the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (see FIGS. 99 and 100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the shooting direction instruction, which is a movable body operated by the confirmation movement control and has a high degree of influence on the game, is less hindered than the character information indicating that restoration is in progress. .

The game machine of form 18-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The production control means can execute a movable body production using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined effect movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined action when the movable body effect is executed,
The movable body movable by the predetermined effect movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, power is turned on after a power failure occurs during variable display in a normal state. The initial motion at time is performed in a motion mode including a performance motion (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support portion 32b overlaps with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. After a power failure occurs during the variable display in the time saving state, the initial action when the power is turned on is the production action in the movable body notice that overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating between the origin position and the intermediate position a portion performed in an operational manner that does not include an action)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not hindered by the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 18-3 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The production control means can execute a movable body production using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control for moving the movable body by a special action when the movable body effect is executed,
The movable body movable by the special movement control is superimposed on the predetermined display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner including the special action in the special movable control,
Power failure occurs during the advantageous state, and then the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control that is performed when the power is turned on is moved by the special movement control during the period in which the movable body stays in the predetermined display area. The time that the movable body stays in the predetermined display area is longer (for example, the time that the lower board movable body 32B stays in the effect position that overlaps the restoration display 132SG510 is the initial action, the effect action of the movable body effect the part that may be shorter than
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when power is cut off during an advantageous state and then the power is turned on, the movable body is not superimposed on the predetermined display area for a long period of time. It is possible to provide a game machine which does not hinder determination of whether the game is in progress or not.

[Mode 19]
The game machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
and a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, normal game state) and a special state (for example, time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The display means is
When a power failure occurs during the special state and then the power is turned on, a restoration-in-progress display (for example, restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
After that, it is possible to display a display corresponding to the special state in the predetermined display area,
When displaying either the display corresponding to the special state or the restoration-in-progress display, a shooting direction instruction display (for example, right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the shooting direction of the game medium is displayed in the specific display area,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the predetermined display region with respect to the specific display region (for example, power failure during variable display in the time saving state After the occurrence, when the initial operation is performed when it is activated by hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A displays information corresponding to the time saving state (for example, production mode display 132SG221, time saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive houses /Total pitch display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed in front of the predetermined area (see FIGS. 101B and 101C), and the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is displayed. A part that operates so as not to overlap with the front side of the specific area (see FIG. 101 (A)). See FIG. 101),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the shooting direction indication display, which is a movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control and has a high degree of influence on the game, is less hindered than the during-restoration display.

The game machine of form 19-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The production control means can execute a movable body production using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined effect movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined action when the movable body effect is executed,
The movable body movable by the predetermined effect movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined action in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, the initial action is the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 and the support portion 32b overlaps While it is performed in a mode of operation that includes the performance of the movable body notice (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position), the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the variable display during the big hit or the time saving state. The initial motion of time is a portion performed in a motion mode that does not include the effect motion (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the movable body notice that overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not hindered by the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

[Form 20]
The game machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
a movable body;
movable body control means;
a display means;
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The display means is capable of displaying, in the special state, a shooting direction instruction display indicating the shooting direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and displaying information regarding the advantageous state in a predetermined display area,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the predetermined display area with respect to the specific display area.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the shooting direction indication, which is a movable body operated by the confirmation movement control and has a high degree of influence on the game, is less hindered than the information regarding the advantageous state.

The game machine of form 20-2 is
Further comprising production control means,
The production control means can execute a movable body production using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined effect movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined action when the movable body effect is executed,
The movable body movable by the predetermined effect movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined action in the predetermined effect movable control.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not hindered by the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

[Form 21]
The game machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, a performance 31 and 32 by the control CPU 120 to perform the initial movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101) ,
The game control means can perform specific identification information light emission control that indicates the result of variable display of the specific identification information by a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the CPU 103 controls a plurality of special symbols constituting a special symbol when the variable display is stopped). part that can be lit in combination according to the variable display result),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)) when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on,
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed as shown in FIG. 103(A)),
After that, the specific identification information emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are emitted in a manner indicating the deviation),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that the power supply to the game machine has started by the startup preparation display, and the specific identification light emission control that has a high degree of influence on the game can be confirmed. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be confirmed without being leaked.

The game machine of form 21-2 is
When the power is turned on,
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103B, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are emitted in a manner indicating the deviation),
After that, when the variable display is started based on the establishment of the starting condition while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the restoration in progress display is displayed by the display means ( For example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the part where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not start the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control in a state where the display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (obstructing the confirmation work). be able to.

The game machine of form 21-3 is
When a power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed as shown in FIG. 104(A)),
After that, the specific identification information emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are emitted in a manner indicating the deviation),
After that, when the variable display executed before the power failure is not completed while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the restoration in progress display is displayed by the display means. We (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the part where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.
The game machine of form 21-4 is
Hold storage means capable of storing hold information related to variable display (for example, special figure hold storage unit 132SG151 shown in FIG. 9) further comprising,
When a power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104B, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are emitted in a manner indicating the deviation),
After that, while the activation preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the variable display executed before the power failure is completed, and the variable display is changed based on the hold information stored before the power failure. When the display is started, the display during restoration is displayed by the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 104B, the portion where the display during restoration 132SG510 is displayed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not start the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control in a state in which the display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (there is no hindrance to the confirmation work). be able to.

[Form 22]
The game machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, a performance 31 and 32 by the control CPU 120 to perform the initial movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101) ,
The light emission control means can perform initialization corresponding light emission control for causing a plurality of light emitting means to emit light in a mode corresponding to the initialization (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the frame LED 9a , 9b, board-top movable body LED 9d, board-bottom movable body LED 9e, frame-top movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are illuminated in an initialization notification mode),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)) when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on with initialization (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed as shown in FIG. 61),
After that, the light emission control for initialization is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are initialized. Part that emits light in the notification mode),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the portion where the initial motion of the board top movable body 32A, the bottom board face 32B, the frame top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that the power supply to the game machine has started by the startup preparation display, and it is possible to confirm the initialization corresponding light emission control without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the movement control. machine can be provided.

The game machine of form 22-2 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
When a power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed as shown in FIG. 105(A)),
After that, light emission control during restoration is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light according to the pattern during restoration (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion that causes the upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g) to emit light in a manner corresponding to the restoration being performed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a game machine is provided in which the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control is not started in a state where the light emission means is emitting light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the variable display (the confirmation work is not hindered). can provide.

The game machine of form 22-3 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
When a power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105B, the portion where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, light emission control during restoration is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light according to the pattern during restoration (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion that causes the upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g) to emit light in a manner corresponding to the restoration being performed),
After that, when the variable display executed before the power failure is finished while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the light emission control means causes the light emission means to correspond to the background display. 105B, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, A portion that causes the chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the portion where the initial motion of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a game machine is provided in which the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control is not started in a state where the light emission means is emitting light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the variable display (obstructing the confirmation work). can provide.

The game machine of form 22-4 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
When a power outage occurs during one round game out of a plurality of round games, and then the power is turned on (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after the power outage during the round game),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106A, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, light emission control during restoration is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light according to the pattern during restoration (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion that causes the upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the restoration being performed),
After that, when the one round game executed before the power failure is not completed while the activation preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the light emission control during restoration is continued. (For example, as shown in FIG. 106A, when the round game from before the power failure is not completed while the activation preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, A portion where light emission is continued in a mode corresponding to the restoration of the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, (a game machine that does not start the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control in a state where the light emission means is emitting light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game (obstructing the confirmation work) can be provided.

The game machine of form 22-5 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
When a power outage occurs during one round game out of a plurality of round games, and then the power is turned on (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after the power outage during the round game),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106A, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, light emission control during restoration is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light according to the pattern during restoration (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion that causes the upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the restoration being performed),
After that, while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the one round game that was being executed before the power cut is finished, and the next round game of the one round game is started. When it is started, the light emission control during recovery is continuously performed (for example, as shown in FIG. Frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g (portion where light emission is continued in a mode corresponding to restoration),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the portion where the initial motion of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a game machine is provided in which the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control is not started (obstructing the confirmation work) while the light emission means is emitting light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game. can provide.

[Form 23]
The game machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, a performance 31 and 32 by the control CPU 120 to perform the initial movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101) ,
The game control means is
If the result of the variable display of the normal identification information is the predetermined display result, it is possible to control the normal variable means to be in an easy-to-enter state (for example, the variable display result of the normal pattern is a hit (normal pattern hit) If this is the case, the part where the opening control is executed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period),
When a power failure occurs while the normal variable means is in the easy-to-enter state and the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to put the normal variable means in the easy-to-enter state again ( For example, when power failure occurs when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state based on the occurrence of a normal symbol hit, the variable winning ball device is activated based on the hot start of the pachinko game machine 1. The part that controls 6B to open again),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, startup preparation display 132SG500) when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned off when the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state, and then when the power is turned on (for example, after the power is turned off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state) When the pachinko machine 1 is powered off and then restarted by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107A, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the part that changes the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that the power supply to the game machine has started by the startup preparation display, and when the normal variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, the power is cut off, and when the power is turned on (recovery from power failure) To provide a game machine in which a player can quickly confirm that a normal variable means is in the easy-to-enter state same as before power cutoff and can be confirmed without being distracted by a movable body operated by confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 23-2 is
When the power is turned off when the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state, and then when the power is turned on (for example, after the power is turned off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state) When the pachinko machine 1 is powered off and then restarted by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107A, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the part that changes the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state),
After that, when the game medium enters the normal variable means that is in the easy-to-enter state by the special control during the display of the startup preparation display and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means The display during recovery is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the portion where the display during recovery 132SG510 is displayed after the game ball has won the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 23-3 is
When power failure occurs during variable display of normal identification information where the result of variable display is a predetermined display result, and then the power is turned on (for example, variable display of normal symbols has been executed before power failure occurs, When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start s),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed as shown in FIG. 107B),
After that, the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the portion that changes the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

[Form 24]
The game machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, a performance 31 and 32 by the control CPU 120 to perform the initial movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101) ,
The game control means is
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-to-enter state in which game media can easily enter (for example, a portion that controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state),
When power is cut off when the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to put the variable means in the easy-to-enter state again ( For example, when power is cut off while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again based on the hot start of the pachinko game machine 1. part to control),
The display means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)),
When a power failure occurs during the advantageous state and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a display during restoration (for example, as shown in FIG. ),
During the advantageous state, the power is cut off when the variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state, and then when the power is turned on (for example, during a jackpot game, a round game When power failure occurs when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, and the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
After that, the display during restoration is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the display during restoration 132SG510 is displayed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that the power supply to the game machine has started by the startup preparation display, and when the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, the power is cut off, and when the power is turned on (recovery from power failure), the game can be played. To provide a game machine in which a player can quickly confirm that a variable means is in the easy-to-enter state that is the same as before power cutoff and without being distracted by a movable body operated by confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 24-2 is
It is possible to perform a plurality of round games in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8, a portion that can execute 3 to 10 round games as a jackpot game),
In the round game, it is possible to control the variable means to be in the easy-to-enter state and to control the variable means to be in the non-enterable state (for example, as a round game, the special winning ball device 7 is in an open state the part that controls the closed state and the part that controls the closed state),
When the variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state, the power is turned off, and then when the power is turned on (for example, during a jackpot game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is turned on as a round game When power failure occurs in the open state and the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
After that, during the display of the start preparation display, the special control in one round game is completed, and when the control of the variable means in the next round game is performed to make the entry impossible state, the restoration display A display is made (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, when the round game ends and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the fence s state while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed. displayed part),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

[Form 25]
The game machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state) for a player by executing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display. machine 1),
Movable body (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
and a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The display means is
When the power is turned on with initialization (for example, cold start processing), it is possible to display an initialization display (for example, initialization notification display 132SG600) indicating initialization,
When the power is turned on with initialization,
The initialization display is displayed,
After that, the confirmation movable control is performed,
After that, after the confirmation movable control ends, the display of the initialization display ends (see FIGS. 109 and 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm that the game machine has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control, and the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control is visually visible. It is possible to provide a game machine which does not hinder confirmation of whether or not initialization notification has ended.

The game machine of form 25-2 is
The period from power-on with initialization to confirmation movability control is longer than the period from power-on without initialization to confirmation movability control (for example, initialization is performed). The period from power-on with initialization (start-up with cold-start processing) to operation check control is longer than the period from power-on without power-on (start-up with hot-start processing) until operation check control is performed. the part with the longer period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not make it impossible to visually recognize that the initialization display is displayed due to the confirmation movement control being performed immediately when the power is turned on with the initialization.

The game machine of form 25-3 is
The initialization display is displayed for a predetermined execution period and disappears after the predetermined execution period ends,
Even if the starting condition is satisfied while the initialization display is being displayed, the initialization display is not hidden (for example, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds), A portion that is hidden after a predetermined execution period ends, and even if a start winning occurs during the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not started) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 25-4 is
When the execution period of the variable display started based on the establishment of the starting condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the display of the initialization display continues until the end of the execution period of the variable display. (For example, if the execution period of the variable display started based on the occurrence of the start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display is displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display. continues),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably perform the operation confirmation control.

The game machine of form 25-5 is
When the execution period of the variable display started based on the establishment of the starting condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the display of the initialization display continues until the end of the execution period of the variable display. (For example, after turning on the power without initialization (starting with hot start processing), the background display is performed based on the game state background designation command without displaying the initialization notification display 132SG600),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

[Form 26]
The game machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
a first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B);
a second movable body (for example, board movable body 32A);
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the first movable body is positioned at the initial position and the second movable body is positioned at the initial position, the first movable body is positioned at the advanced position and the second movable body is positioned at the advanced position. When positioned, the distance between the first movable body and the second movable body becomes shorter (see FIG. 111),
The movable body control means is
Confirmation movement control for moving the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation for confirming that the first movable body and the second movable body operate normally when the power is turned on. (for example, operation confirmation control) can be performed,
The confirmation movement control moves the first movable body from the initial position to the advanced position and moves the second movable body to the initial position so that the movable periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap. to the advanced position, and thereafter, the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved so that the movable periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap. from the advanced position to the initial position (for example, in the operation confirmation control, the chance button 631B and the chance button 631B and the chance button 631B are controlled so that their initial operation periods overlap in operation confirmation control). The body 32A simultaneously starts moving from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 111(B)), and then the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position so that the respective initial action periods do not overlap. After stopping at the origin position (see FIG. 111(C)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 111(D)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body can normally move to the advanced position and that the second movable body can normally move to the advanced position, thereby simplifying the confirmation work. To provide a game machine capable of simultaneously confirming the movement of a first movable body from the advancing position to the origin position and the movement of the second movable body from the advancing position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm, individually. be able to.

The game machine of form 26-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect executing means can execute a movable body effect using the first movable body and the second movable body,
The movement control means moves the first movable body from the initial position to the advanced position so that the movable periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap when the movable body effect is executed. and move the second movable body from the initial position to the advanced position, and then move the first movable body from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movable periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap. It is possible to perform effect movement control for moving the second movable body to the position and moving the second movable body from the advanced position to the initial position,
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the first movable body and the second movable body in a manner that does not include the operation of the first movable body and the second movable body in the effect movable control (for example, For the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform an effect action in which the first movable body and the second movable body contact (or overlap), in the operation confirmation control, as shown in FIGS. A part that executes an initial action in an action mode that does not include the effect action described above (for example, a mode in which the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B are moved separately),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 26-3 is
It further comprises a detection means (for example, effect position sensor 132SG134) capable of detecting that the second movable body is arranged at the advanced position,
The movement toward the initial position of the first movable body arranged at the advanced position in the confirmation movement control is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the advanced position by the detection means ( For example, the motion toward the origin position of the first movable body (for example, the on-board movable body 32A) placed at the production position in the action confirmation control is produced by the second movable body (for example, the lower-board movable body 32B). A part that is performed on the condition that it is detected by the position sensor 132SG134),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 26-4 is
The movable body control means moves the movable body to the initial position when the movable body including the first movable body and the second movable body is not arranged at the initial position when the power is turned on. It is possible to perform return control (for example, when the movable body including the first movable body and the second movable body is not placed at the origin position before the long initial motion control is started, the movable body Return control for moving the body to the initial position (for example, the part where the board top movable body 32A, the bottom board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the short initial operation control of the frame top movable body 132SG101) is performed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

[Form 27]
The game machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
a first movable body (for example, the underboard movable body 32B);
a second movable body (for example, a frame movable body 132SG101);
and a movable body control means,
The first movable body is provided on a game board (for example, game board 2),
The second movable body is provided in the game frame (for example, the opening and closing door frame 3a),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, confirmation movement control ( For example, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control),
As the confirmation movement control, the first movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position, and the second movable body operates normally while the first movable body is stopped at the advanced position. (For example, in a state where the lower board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see FIG. 57(F)), the upper frame movable body 132SG101 After moving from the origin position to the production position, the part that moves from the production position to the origin position (see FIGS. 57(G) to (I)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during confirmation movement control, the first movable body arranged at the advanced position indicates that the confirmation movement control is not completed, and when the first movable body is arranged at the advanced position, the first movable body is arranged at the advanced position. It is possible to provide a game machine in which confirmation movement control of the second movable body is not overlooked by starting the motion of the second movable body.

The game machine of form 27-2 is
Further comprising a detection means (for example, effect position sensor 132SG104) capable of detecting that the second movable body is arranged at the initial position,
The movement toward the initial position of the first movable body arranged at the advanced position in the confirmation movement control is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the initial position by the detection means ( For example, the motion toward the origin position of the first movable body (for example, the lower board movable body 32B) placed at the performance position in the action confirmation control is performed by the second movable body (for example, the lower board movable body 32B). The part that is performed on the condition that it is detected by the position sensor 132SG104),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the rear (rear, back) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, in the description of each step in the flow chart, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "132SGS1", "normal reach" is "N reach", and "super reach" is "SP reach". It is sometimes abbreviated as

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. The game machine frame 3 is provided with an opening/closing door frame 3a having a glass window so as to be rotatable around the left side thereof, and the opening/closing door frame 3a is configured to open and close the game area. The play area is visible through the glass window when closed.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one. The special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of a plurality of lamps (LEDs). The CPU 103 can turn on these lamps in combination according to the result of the variable display when the variable display is stopped.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an accessory having a movable piece that can move in the front-rear direction, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable piece moves to a retreat position where the movable piece retreats from the game board surface. It becomes difficult for the game ball to flow down the upper surface of the piece, and a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second start prize winning port is entered (also referred to as the second start prize winning port being in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece protrudes forward from the game board surface, so that the game ball can flow down the upper surface of the movable piece. It will be in an open state where the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (it is also said that the second starting winning opening is in an open state). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above accessories as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided on the right side of the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers representing "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at left and right upper positions of the opening/closing door frame 3a. Frame LEDs 9a and 9b are provided on the top and left and right sides of the opening/closing door frame 3a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker LED 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), an upper board movable body 32A and a lower board movable body 32B that operate according to the performance are provided. Movable body LEDs 9d and 9e are provided on the board movable body 32A and the board movable body 32B, a frame movable body LED 9f is provided on the frame movable body 132SG121, and a chance button LED 9g is provided on the chance button 631B. It is The movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the button LED 9g, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, and the attacker LED 9c may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the opening/closing door frame 3a below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. A batted ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

In addition, a chance button 631B that can be pressed by the player and a lever body 631A that can be pushed and pulled forward and backward by the player and can be rotated are provided at the center of the lower portion of the opening/closing door frame 3a. An operating unit 600 is provided. The chance button 631B can move up and down between an origin position and an operation detection position below the origin position, and can move between the origin position and a projecting position projecting upward from the origin position. be. In addition, a cross key constituting a selection button 132SG35 for setting effects such as sound volume is provided on the top plate of the opening/closing door frame 3a.

The operation unit 600 includes a button sensor 635B (see FIG. 2) for detecting the player's operation (movement) on the chance button 631B, and an origin sensor for detecting that the chance button 631B is positioned at the origin position. A position sensor 635C (see FIG. 2), a protrusion position sensor 635D (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the chance button 631B is positioned at the protrusion position, and a vibration motor 635E (see FIG. 2) for vibrating the chance button 631B. 2), an advance/retreat motor 635F (see FIG. 2) for advancing and retreating the chance button 631B between the origin position and the projecting position, and a push sensor and a pull sensor for detecting the forward and backward movement of the lever body 631A. and a protrusion position sensor 625C for detecting that the lever body 631A is positioned at the protrusion position. Further, the selection button 132SG35 is provided with an up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36 (see FIG. 2) consisting of an up sensor, a down sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor for detecting each operation in the up/down/left/right direction of the cross key of the selection button 132SG35. ing.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the lever body 631A and the chance button 631B are provided as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The opening/closing door frame 3a includes a first effect unit 132SG100 attached to the upper center position, a second effect unit 132SG200 attached to the upper left side, and a third effect unit 132SG300 attached to the upper right side. It has three production units. The first effect unit 132SG100 is provided with a frame-top movable body 132SG121 that can move between the origin position and the effect position, as will be described later.

A main board 11 housed in a board case (not shown) is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 . A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, the jackpot probability is set to 1/200 in the characteristic portion 132SG, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set by operating the setting switch 52. As the change state, the big hit probability may be changed by operating the setting key 51 in the setting change state.

A display monitor 29 (see FIG. 2) is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched.
The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed by the opening/closing door frame 3a.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the big win game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times, 3 times, etc.).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these. . As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

The time-saving state continues until one of the termination conditions, such as execution of the special game a predetermined number of times and start of the next jackpot game state, is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number cut (number cut time reduction).

The normal state is a game state other than an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player and a special state such as a time saving state. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the figure game is a "jackpot", is in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case where the system is reset). is controlled in the same way as when A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

It should be noted that during the jackpot production, in the first round of the jackpot (first hit) in the normal state, the jackpot opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the production shown in FIG. 52 (F8) is performed. In the first round of the jackpot in the time-saving state, since the jackpot is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (short-term opening and closing are repeated), the performance shown in FIG. 40 (C2) is performed. In addition, in the second round of the jackpot in the time saving state, the jackpot opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the display, various lamps, and sound modes are different in the first and second rounds. will be different.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and a real-time clock 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switches (first count switch 132SG023, second count switch 132SG024). ) from the game ball (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the game ball passes Or an ingress is detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 outputs a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the opening/closing door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a push/pull sensor 625Y, a protrusion position sensor 625C, a button sensor 635B, an origin position sensor 635C, a protrusion position sensor 635D, an up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36, an origin position sensor 132SG103, 132SG113, 132SG123, 132SG133, and an effect position sensor 132SG104. , 132SG114, 132SG124, and 132SG134 (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and that appropriately indicates the content of the operation). be.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . In addition, the display control unit 123 outputs signals for operating the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the on-board movable body 132SG121, and the chance button 631B to each movable body or vibration motor 635E of each movable body, forward/retreat motor 635F, It is supplied to a drive circuit that drives the drive motors 132SG102, 132SG112, 132SG122, and 132SG132.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

In addition, sound output, control of turning on/off the lamp (supply of sound designation signal, lamp signal, etc.), control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG121, the chance button 631B (each movable (supply of a signal to move the body, etc.) may be executed by the effect control CPU 120 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 12 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board by executing the command control process (see FIG. 12) of step S27 after the special symbol process process is finished, for example. 12.

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characterizing section 132SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 3 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3, the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern designation command that designates a variation pattern (variable display time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4A, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the variable display stop (confirmation) of decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 .

The command 9000H indicates that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold-started (that the power has been turned on while the clear switch 92 is being pressed down (that the recovery condition has not been established in step S3 of the game control main processing in FIG. 12). This is a power-on designation command that designates that step S6 has been executed by )).

The command 9200H indicates that the pachinko gaming machine has been hot-started (that the power has been turned on while the clear switch 92 has not been pressed (step S4 because the recovery condition has been established in step S3 of the game control main processing in FIG. 12). is executed) is a power failure recovery designation command.

The command 95XXH is a game state background designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game state background designation command is also a command for designating updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the game state. In the game state background designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 4B, as a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed. Command 9501H is the second game state background designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state A) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure once after the end of the jackpot A jackpot game. be. Command 9502H is the third game state background designation corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state C1) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot B jackpot game. is a command. Command 9503H is the fourth game state background designation corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state B) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to seven times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C is a command. Command 9504H is the fifth game state background designation corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state B) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to seven times after the end of the jackpot D jackpot game is a command. It is a sixth game state background designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state C2) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot E jackpot game.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "10"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the number of special figure pending storage in the pending storage display area 132SG005D or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the number of special figure pending storage in the pending storage display area 132SG005D or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command designating the winning determination result at the start winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command for designating the variable category of the winning determination result at the start winning.

The command D100H is a V prize notification specifying command for notifying that the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on by passing the game ball through the second count switch 132SG024. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special figure time saving frequency notification command for notifying the remaining time saving control frequency of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The command D3XX is a number-of-prize-balls notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (given) when a game ball enters the winning hole. The command E100H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating execution of a customer waiting demonstration (demonstration effect).

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this characteristic portion 132SG, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , the random number MR4 for judging the results of the display of the general pattern, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

FIG. 6 shows a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 132SG. In this characteristic portion 132SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases such as when the display result is a "big win" and when the variable display result is a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

Of these variation patterns, the variation pattern of the big hit is a special figure of 15 seconds uniformly for executing a blessing performance for congratulating that the variable display result is a big hit after the same special figure variable display time as the losing variation pattern. Display time is additionally provided.

Here, for the jackpot variation pattern and the loss variation pattern in this characteristic portion 132SG, the period until the variable display result is notified is configured in common, and the length of the period until the variable display result is notified This prevents the player from recognizing in advance whether the variable display result is a big win or a loss.

In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern in this characteristic part 132SG, a form in which a special figure variable display time of 15 seconds for executing the blessing effect after the same special figure variable display time as the losing variation pattern is additionally provided is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure variable display time for executing the blessing effect provided in the big hit variation pattern is not limited to 15 seconds and varies depending on the game state. good too.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, in the present characterizing portion 132SG, a plurality of different variation patterns are provided in advance according to the special symbols for performing variable display.

As shown in FIG. 6(A), as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed, a super reach α, a super reach β, and so on. There are a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance is executed, and a non-reach variation pattern in which no reach performance is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 132SG, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns may be provided.

In addition, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern, super reach α fluctuation pattern, and super reach β fluctuation pattern in the first special pattern, a pseudo-continuous effect that temporarily stops and re-variably displays the decorative pattern during variable display is performed 1 to 3 times. It also contains the variation pattern to execute. In this characterizing portion 132SG, which of the ready-to-win effects of normal ready-to-win, super ready-to-win ? and super ready-to-win ? For example, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, then the normal reach ready effect is executed, and if the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, then the super reach α ready reach effect is executed. is executed, and when the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the ready-to-win effect of super reach β is executed after that.

In addition, in the ready-to-reach production that can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the ready-to-win production of super reach β is set to have the highest expectation for a big hit, and the ready-to-reach production of super reach α is higher than the ready-to-reach production of super reach β. Jackpot expectations are set low. Then, the reach performance of normal reach is set to have a lower expected degree of jackpot than the reach performance of super reach α (expectation of hit performance of reach performance: super reach β>super reach α>normal reach). That is, in the present characteristic portion 132SG, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation for the big hit of the variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(B), the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the characteristic portion 132SG includes the big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol as the losing variation pattern. A non-reach variation pattern and a reach variation pattern (a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach γ movement pattern in which a super reach γ reach effect is executed) having different special figure variable display times are provided. ing. As the variation patterns of these second special symbols, the variation pattern of super reach γ is set with the highest expectation of big hit, and the variation pattern of non-reach is set with the lowest expectation of big hit (second special symbol Big hit expectation in: super reach γ> normal reach> non-reach).

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 132SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 14 to 19) that stores a plurality of fluctuation patterns to become is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 7A, a display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. For special symbols), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 7 (D) (for the second special symbol), the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 14, see FIG. 19), various second special figure fluctuation pattern determination tables (see FIGS. 20 to 19), general figure fluctuation pattern determination tables (not shown), etc. are included.

7A and 7B are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table 1 and the display result determination table 2. FIG. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the display result determination table 1, the variable display special figure designation buffer (value set by the CPU 103 when executing special symbol normal processing as a value for specifying a special symbol for executing variable display) is 1 (first). A determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for the case where the first special symbol is the object of variable display. In the display result determination table 2, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (value set by the CPU 103 when executing special symbol normal processing as a value for designating a special symbol for executing variable display) is 2 (second). A determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for the case where the second special symbol is the object of variable display.

As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the small hit is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is the object of variable display, a big win can be won and a small win will not occur. Incidentally, the winning probability of the big hit when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first is about 1/200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, a determination value corresponding to a big hit and a determination value corresponding to a small hit are set. Incidentally, when the variable display special figure designating buffer is the second, the winning probability of the big win is about 1/200, and the winning probability of the small win is about 1/7.

In other words, when the variable display special symbol designating buffer is the first (when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol), the CPU 103 determines which value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIG. 7(A). When the hit judgment value is matched, it is determined that the variable display result is a big win (big win A or big win B). In addition, when the variable display special symbol designating buffer is the second (when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the second special symbol), the CPU 103 determines which one of the values of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIG. 7(B). When it matches with one of the hit determination values, it is determined that the variable display result is a big win (big win B), and when the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small wins shown in FIG. 7(B). , determines that the variable display result is a small hit.

The "probability" shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not.

In addition, in the characteristic part 132SG, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. However, a big-hit determination table and a small-hit determination table are provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is made by the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable display special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used for display, and a small hit may be determined using a separate table according to the variable display special figure designation buffer.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 132SG, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is Although it has been designed not to win, a part of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big win may be set as the judgment value corresponding to the small win so that the small win can be won.

7(C) and 7(D) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. FIG. Among these, FIG. 7(C) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) is a table of In addition, FIG. 7 (D) shows the case of determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) is a table.

The jackpot type determination table is used to determine the type of jackpot to be jackpot A or jackpot B based on a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variable display result should be a jackpot pattern. It is a referenced table. In addition, in this characterizing portion 132SG, as shown in FIGS. 7(C) and (D), two types of big hits, big win A and big win B, are provided in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol). On the other hand, the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) is provided with only one kind of big hit, the big hit B. That is, the big win that occurs when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is one of the two types of big wins, namely, the big win A and the big win B, while when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Only the big win B is generated as the big win.

FIG. 7(E) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small win pattern, the type of the small win is set to a small win A or a small win B based on the random number (MR2) for judging the type of the small win. This table is referenced to determine In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, when the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during the small winning game of the small winning A, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning game of the big winning C is executed. When the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during the small winning game of the small winning B, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning type is the big winning D or the big winning E. The game is executed, and when the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during the small winning game of the small winning B, that is, when the V prize big winning occurs, the big winning type is the big winning E. A game is executed. In other words, these jackpots C to E are not the jackpot types determined by the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination extracted at the time of starting winning, but are game balls during any of the jackpots A and B. is the jackpot type determined by passing through the second count switch 132SG024.

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in the present characteristic part 132SG with reference to FIG. It is

Of these jackpots A to E, jackpot A is a jackpot in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) of changing the jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the interval period of each round in the jackpot A is all set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot game state, the special symbol game is played once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and at most five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Time saving control is performed as time saving state A until it is executed.

The big win B is a big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the big winning hole to the second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the interval period of each round in the jackpot B is all set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot game state, until the special symbol game is executed a maximum of 685 times with the variable display of the second special symbol as the object, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed. The time saving control is executed as the time saving state C1 until a maximum total of 689 special figure games are executed.

The big win C is a big win in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) of changing the big winning hole to the second state advantageous to the player are repeated. As for the interval period of each round in the jackpot C, the interval periods of the first and second rounds are set to 0.5 seconds, and the interval period of the third round is set to 30 seconds. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot game state, until the special symbol game is executed a maximum of seven times with the variable display of the second special symbol as the target, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed. The time saving control is executed as the time saving state B until a maximum total of 11 special game games are executed.

The big win D is a big win in which 9 rounds (so-called 9 rounds) of changing the big winning hole to the second state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. As for the interval period of each round in the jackpot D, the interval period of the 1st round, the 2nd round and the 4th round to the 9th round is set to 0.5 seconds, and the interval period of the 3rd round is set to 30 seconds. set to seconds. Further, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot D, until the special game is executed a maximum of seven times with the variable display of the second special pattern as the object, or until the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern are executed. Time reduction control is executed as the time reduction state B until a total of 11 special game games are executed targeting the variable display of .

The big win E is a big win in which 9 rounds (so-called 9 rounds) of changing the big winning hole to the second state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. As for the interval period of each round in the jackpot E, the interval period of the 1st round, the 2nd round and the 4th round to the 9th round is set to 0.5 seconds, and the interval period of the 3rd round is set to 30 seconds. set to seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot E is finished, the special game is executed a maximum of 685 times with the variable display of the second special pattern, or the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is executed. The time saving control is executed as the time saving state C2 until a total of 689 special game is executed targeting the variable display.

In this way, the interval period of the third round between the jackpot C and the jackpot E is set to 30 seconds, and the present characteristic portion 132SG suggests that the jackpot game continues up to the 9th round over the 30 seconds. As a production, it is possible to execute a promotion production described later.

It should be noted that, in each time-saving state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by increasing the probability of becoming a "per normal game", that is, the second start winning Since it becomes easy to perform the variable display of a 2nd special design when it generate|occur|produces, it becomes easy to generate a small hit rather than a normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the time saving state ends, when a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and when the game ball is playing a small hit Since there is a case where a big hit is generated by winning a V prize at the time, a so-called continuous game state in which a big win game state is likely to occur continuously occurs.

In addition, in the time-saving state A after the jackpot game of the jackpot A, since the number of special figure games in which the time-saving control is executed for the second special symbol is set to one time, the second special Either the variable display of the pattern or the variable display of the second special pattern based on a maximum of four reserved memories occurring during the one-time variable display of the second special pattern results in a big hit or a small hit. (the sum of the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol five times in total and the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit when the game ball wins V) is set to about 54%.

In addition, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D, since the number of special symbols games in which the time saving control is executed for the second special symbols is set to 7 times, the 7 times of the second special symbols or variable display of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories occurring during the seven times of variable display of the second special symbol, the result of the variable display becomes a big hit or a small hit. The ratio (total ratio of occurrence of a big hit or a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol for a total of 11 times and the ratio of a game ball winning a V prize and a big hit) is set to about 83%.

In addition, in the time saving state C2 after the jackpot B or jackpot E jackpot game ends, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control for the second special symbol is executed is set to 685 times, so the 685 times Either the variable display of the second special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol based on a maximum of four reserved memories occurring during the variable display of the second special symbol 685 times, the variable display result is a big hit or The ratio of small hits (the sum of the ratio of occurrence of big hits or small wins in the variable display of the second special symbols for the above total of 685 times and the ratio of occurrence of big wins due to the game ball winning V) is set to approximately 100%. ing.

In this characterizing portion 132SG, four types of jackpot A to jackpot E are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and five or more jackpot types may be provided. Also, three or less types may be provided.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 132SG150 as shown in FIG. there is The game control data holding area 132SG150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a special figure reservation storage unit 132SG151, a normal figure reservation storage unit 132SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 132SG152, a game control timer setting unit 132SG153, and a game control counter setting unit. 132SG154 and a game control buffer setting unit 132SG155.

The special figure reservation storage unit 132SG151 is a special figure game that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. (Special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) Suspended data and the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B Start winning Suspended data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) which has occurred (second start winning) but has not yet started is stored in the order of winning.

As an example, the special figure reservation storage unit 132SG151 is associated with the reservation number in the winning order of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the start opening buffer value, the passage of the game ball Random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition in (approach). is stored as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "8"). The number of pending data stored according to the winning in the first starting winning opening and the number of pending data stored according to winning in the second starting winning opening are four at maximum.

The suspension data stored in the special figure suspension storage unit 132SG151 in this way indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure or the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and these special figures It becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in the game.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in an individual suspension storage unit. Furthermore, in this way, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing through the second starting winning hole ( In the case of storing the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by entering) in association with the hold number in a separate hold storage unit, variable based on the first hold information One of the display and the variable display based on the second reserved storage information may be executed with priority over the variable display based on the other reserved information.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 132SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 132SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it was detected by the gate switch 21, and the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 132SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 132SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 132SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 132SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 132SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the production operation in addition to the production control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns, and the like. there is

As an example, in the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 controls production operations by various production devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the production model, etc.). A performance control pattern table storing a plurality of types of performance control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern corresponds to various performance operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is composed of data indicating the content of the control. The effect control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

The effect control pattern at the time of special figure variable display corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the result of the special figure display. , such as the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, the reach performance, the effect display operation in the re-lottery effect, etc., or the various effect display operations without the variable display of the decorative pattern, etc. It is configured. The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control contents of the effect operation to be the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice patterns for which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations to be executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control contents.

The special figure variable display performance control patterns may include, for example, a plurality of types of ready-to-win performance control patterns in which the performance mode in each ready-to-win performance is different for each variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win performance.

In the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the production operation, for example, a production control data holding area 132SG190 as shown in FIG. 10(A) is provided. The effect control data holding area 132SG190 shown in FIG. 10A includes a effect control flag setting unit 132SG191, a effect control timer setting unit 132SG192, a effect control counter setting unit 132SG193, and a effect control buffer setting unit 132SG194. there is

The effect control flag setting unit 132SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 132SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section 132SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 132SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 132SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 132SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 132SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 132SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 132SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1" to " 8") and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command and number of reserved memories Three commands called notification commands (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the storage area of the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A, these start winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, pending storage number notification command are associated, and the first special figure pending storage and the second special A storage area (entry) is reserved for collectively storing drawing reserve storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted upward one by one as will be described later, when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1") is started. In addition, the memory contents of the buffer number "0" storing the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is satisfied are cleared in the decoration symbol variation stop processing executed when the variable display is ended. ing.

Furthermore, in the startup winning command buffer 132SG194A of the characteristic part 132SG, in the later-described pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 35), a storage for setting a pending display flag value indicating the display mode of the pending display or the active display. A storage area for setting a panel display flag value indicating the pattern (panel pattern) of the panel corresponding to the variable display and the panel corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state A, is secured for each buffer number.

At the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 stores commands from the top (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry of the start winning receive command buffer 132SG194A. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, in the storage area corresponding to the end of the buffer number corresponding to the reserved storage, the starting entrance winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variation category designation command, and the reserved storage number notification command are stored in this order. It will be done.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 132SG194A shown in FIG. 10B is an entry (buffer number " 0") is deleted, and the data stored in the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1") and the starting variable The storage contents of entries after the pending storage of the indication are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), when the variable display of decorative patterns is completed, each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, and each command stored in buffer number "1" is deleted. The commands are shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Commands stored in areas corresponding to "4", "5", . . . are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2", "3", "4", . . Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it is determined whether or not the start winning prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the pending memory number notification command are received. If the command is received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the empty area of the receive command buffer 132SG194A at the time of start winning as a reserved storage of each special figure.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the restoration condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

After executing the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, and It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the special symbol process processing in the characterizing section 132SG. In the special symbol process processing in this characterizing portion 132SG, the special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and whether or not the display result is a "big hit", and the type of the big hit , determines (predetermines) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning hole and the second starting winning hole is stored, and the start condition of the special game is established in the order of winning (also called winning order digestion). say).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, a plurality of variation patterns are set using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether the display result is a "big hit", "small hit", or "losing". It includes processing for determining one of the types. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure variable display time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern. It specifies the contents of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variable display time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "minor hit" or "losing", when the time-saving state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this jackpot opening processing, a processing for measuring the elapsed time from opening the jackpot, and based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing of step 132 SGS118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step 132SGS119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this small winning opening process, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state, processing for determining whether or not the game ball is detected by the second count switch 132SG024, and the like. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

The small hit end processing of step 132 SGS120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit game state ends, if the game ball is detected by the second count switch 132SG024, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" and the small hit process ends. Further, when the small winning game state ends, if the game ball is not detected by the second count switch 132SG024, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (132SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (132SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (132SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 132SG154, it should have specified the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. 132SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (132SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "1" (132SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 132SGS101 (132SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit at 132SGS102 (132SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (132SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (132SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (132SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In 132SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (132SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "2" (132SGS106). .

After executing either of the processes of 132SGS103 and 132SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (132SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (132SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 132SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the hit type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (132SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way and the starting port buffer value are stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit (132SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of hit determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit". is used to determine the big hit type/small hit type when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the processing of 132SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 132SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (132SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After the processing of 132SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing (132SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (132SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 132SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (132SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 132SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 132SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS116), and then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 15(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by the 132SGS 112 of FIG. 14 as the winning random number determination process. In this characterizing part 132SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 13) results in a special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) as a "jackpot". It is determined whether or not to control to the game state or whether to control to the small hit game state as "small hit". Also, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 13), determination of variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of S112. Then, it is determined whether or not it is determined to derive and display a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern as a special figure display result. Thus, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, whether or not a big win or a small win is determined. Before it is determined whether or not, it is determined that the special figure display result will be "big hit" or "small hit", and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc., as will be described later, Pre-reading notices such as panel display effects and pending notice effects are executed.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state (step 132SGS121). Then, it is determined whether or not the set starting port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS122a). If the start buffer value is 1, select the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 7A and proceed to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122b). B) is selected from the display result determination table 2, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122c).

In step 132SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 extracted in step 132SGS109 with the selected display result determination table, and determines whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. If the random number MR1 is outside the big hit determination range, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range (step 132 SGS 123b).

In step 132SGS123b, when the random number value MR1 is out of the small hit determination value range, that is, when the variable display result is a loss, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a symbol designation command according to the loss (step 132SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether or not the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS126b). If the starting port buffer value is 1, if the game state is the normal state, select the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. For example, the first special figure variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 19A is selected, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126c).

Also, if the starting port buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is the time saving state A, the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. Or if it is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time saving state C2, the second special figure variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. selects the second special figure variation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 18(A), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126d).

Further, in step 132SGS123b, when the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 132SGS127). Then, when the game state is the time saving state A, the second special figure variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. In the case of variable display, the second special figure variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. Select the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table I shown and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS128).

Further, in step 132SGS123a, when the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to the jackpot (step 132SGS129). Then, it is determined whether or not the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS130a). If the starting opening buffer value is 1, if the game state is the normal state, the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. , Select the first special figure variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 19B, and proceed to step 132SGS131 (132SGS130b).

Further, if the starting port buffer value is 2, if the game state is the normal state, if the game state is the time saving state A, the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 20 (B), the game If the state is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time saving state B, the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2, the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 21 (B), the game state is the normal state or the time saving In the case of the variable display after the eighth time in state C2, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table J shown in FIG.

At step 132SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number MR3 extracted at step 132SGS109, and determines the variation category from non-reach, super reach, and others (normal reach). Then, transmission setting of the variable category designation command (any one shown in FIG. 15(B)) according to the determination result is performed, and the random value determination process at the time of winning is completed (step 132 SGS132).

In addition, the commands set for transmission in steps 132SGS124, 132SGS126a, 132SGS127, 132SGS129, and 132SGS132 are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing shown in FIG.

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a pending memory in the special symbol pending storage unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS541). When there is no reservation memory in the special figure reservation storage unit 132SGS151, the demonstration display setting such as transmission setting of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and the special design normal processing is ended (step 132SGS572). The customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing command control processing (see FIG. 12).

Also, if there is a pending memory in the special figure pending storage unit 132SGS151, read and specify the starting port buffer value and the random number MR1 to MR3 from the pending number "1" of the special figure pending storage unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS542). In addition, the value of the number of special figure pending storage and the total number of pending storage to be variable display is reduced by -1, and the storage contents of the special figure pending storage unit 132SGS151 are shifted (step 132SGS543).

Also, it is determined whether or not the startup buffer value specified in step 132SGS542 is 1 (step 132SGS554a). If the starting mouth buffer value is 1, set the variable display special figure designation buffer value to 1 (step 132 SGS544b), if the starting mouth buffer value is 2, if the starting mouth buffer value is 2, A variable display special figure designation buffer value is set to 2 (step 132SGS544c).

Then, the display result determination table corresponding to the variable display special figure designation buffer value is set (step 132SGS555). Then, the random number MR1 read out at step 132SGS542 is compared with the display result determination table set at step 132SGS555 to determine whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot range (step 132SGS556). If the value of the random number MR1 is out of the big hit range, it is further determined whether or not the random number MR1 is in the small hit range (step 132 SGS557). If the value of the random number MR1 is within the small hit range, that is, if the variable display result is a small hit, a small hit flag is set (step 132 SGS558). Then, the small hit type determination table (see FIG. 7 (E)) is selected (step 132SGS558a), and the small hit type is determined by comparing the selected small hit type determination table with the random number MR2 read in step 132SGS542. Determine (step 132 SGS 558b). Then, set a small hit type buffer value corresponding to the determined small hit type, and proceed to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS558c). If the value of the random number MR1 is out of the small hit range, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the process proceeds to step 132 SGS570.

If the value of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot range at step 132SGS556, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, a jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS566). Then, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 7 (C) or FIG. 7 (D)) corresponding to the variable display special figure designation buffer is selected (step 132SGS567), and the selected jackpot type determination table and step 132SGS542 are read out. The jackpot type is determined by comparing with the random number MR1 (step 132SGS568). Then, a jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS569).

At step 132 SGS570, the CPU 103 determines a fixed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process, and the special symbol normal process is terminated (step 132SGS571).

FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special figure (step 132 SGS131). Whether or not the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special figure may be determined by whether or not the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, for example. If it is the variable display of the first special figure, select the variation pattern determination table from the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. step 132 (SGS 132).

For example, if the variable display result is off, the game state is the normal state, and the number of the first special figure pending storage is 2 or less, select the first special figure variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 18 (A), When the variable display result is off, the game state is the normal state, and the number of the first special figure pending storage is 3 or more, the first special figure variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 18B is selected and the variable display is performed. When the result is a big hit and the game state is the normal state, the first special figure variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 18(C) is selected.

Also, if the variable display result is off and the game state is either a time saving state, the first special figure variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 19 (A) is selected, the variable display result is a big hit, and the game state If it is one of the time saving states, the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 19(B) is selected.

Also, if the variable display executed in step 132SGS131 is the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display result, game state, the value of the time saving state variable display number counter (variable display number in each time saving state) etc. Select a variation pattern determination table from FIGS. 20 to 23 and proceed to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS134).

For example, if the variable display result is off and the game state is the time saving state A, the second special figure variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. If so, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. Select the variation pattern determination table C for illustration.

Also, if the variable display result is off and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, the time saving state C2 and the 12th to 685th variable display, the second shown in FIG. 21 (A) Select the special figure variation pattern determination table D, the variable display result is a big hit, the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, the time saving state C2 and the 12th to 685th variable display For example, the second special figure variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. If it is display and 12th to 685th variable display, the second special figure variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 21 (A) is selected.

Also, if the variable display result is off and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time saving state C2, the second special figure variation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. If the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time saving state C2, the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table H shown in FIG. If it is the 8th to 10th variable display in the normal state or the time saving state C2, the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 22 (A) is selected.

Also, if the variable display result is off and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state C2, the second special figure variation pattern determination table J shown in FIG. If it is the 11th variable display in the time saving state C2, the second special figure variation pattern determination table K shown in FIG. If there is, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table L shown in FIG. 23(C).

After executing step 132SGS132 or step 132SGS134a, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number MR3 read at step 132SGS542 of the special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern (step 132SGS135). In addition, in the processing of step 132SGS135, the CPU 103 identifies the variation pattern including the random number MR3 read at step 132SGS542 of the special symbol normal processing from among the variation patterns included in the selected variation pattern determination table, The specified variation pattern may be determined as the variation pattern for performing variable display.

Then, along with performing the variable display start setting of the special pattern (step 132 SGS136), perform the transmission setting of various commands for starting the variable display such as the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result designation command according to the determined variation pattern ( Step 132SGS137), a variable display time timer is set according to the variation pattern (step 132SGS138). Finally, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process, and the variation pattern setting process is terminated (step 132SGS139). In addition, various commands set for transmission in step 132SGS137 are transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG.

In addition, regarding the deviation fluctuation pattern in the variable display in the normal control state of the first special symbol, the allocation of the random number MR3 is set as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, so the non-reach fluctuation pattern is the most determined It is difficult to determine in the order of the fluctuation patterns of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β. On the other hand, regarding the jackpot variation pattern in the variable display in the normal state of the first special symbol, the allocation of the random number MR3 is set as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, so the super reach β variation pattern is the most It is easy to determine, and it becomes difficult to determine in the order of super reach α and normal reach fluctuation pattern. For this reason, in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, when the variable display is executed in the non-reach variation pattern, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, normal reach, It is set so that the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit increases in the order of the variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. In other words, the shorter the special figure fluctuation time, the lower the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit, and the longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit.

Further, among the plurality of variation patterns, the variation patterns for executing the common ready-to-win effect are set so that the variation pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect has a higher degree of expectation for big win. For example, as for the variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win effect of super reach β, there are provided a variation pattern for executing pseudo-continuous effect and a variation pattern for not executing pseudo-continuous effect, but super reach β for executing pseudo-continuous effect is set to have a higher expectation for big hit than the variation pattern of super reach β which does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect. Similarly, for the variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win effect of super reach α, there are provided a variation pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect and a variation pattern for not executing a pseudo-continuous effect. The variation pattern of α is set to have a higher expectation for big hit than the variation pattern of super reach α which does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect. Furthermore, as for the variation patterns for executing the ready-to-win effect of normal reach, there are provided a variation pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect and a variation pattern for not executing a pseudo-continuous effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is set higher in the case of , than in the variation pattern of the normal reach in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed.

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a symbol fixing period timer, which will be described later, is in operation (step 132 SGS201). When the symbol confirmation period is not in operation, the stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B (step 132 SGS202), and the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation command is performed ( step 132 SGS 203). Incidentally, the symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process shown in FIG.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS204). When the jackpot flag is set, if any of the time saving flags is set, the time saving flag and other game state flags are cleared (step 132 SGS205), and the value of the time saving state variable display frequency counter is cleared. (Step 132 SGS 206). Furthermore, according to the jackpot type, the transmission setting of the winning start 1 designation command or the winning start 2 designation command and the transmission setting of the game state background designation command indicating that the game state is normal state are performed, and the process proceeds to step 132 SGS 242 (step 132SGS207, step 132SGS208). Incidentally, the hit start designation command and the game state background designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing shown in FIG. 12 by the CPU 103 .

Further, when the pattern fixing period timer is in operation in step 132SGS201, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the pattern fixing period timer by -1 (step 132SGS209), and determines whether the pattern fixing period timer has timed out ( step 132 SGS 210). When the pattern fixing period timer has not timed out, the special pattern stopping process is ended, and when the pattern fixing period timer has timed out, it is further determined whether or not the stopped pattern being derived and displayed is a lost pattern. (Step 132 SGS211). When the stop symbol that is derived and displayed is a missing symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS212), and the derived symbol is displayed. If the displayed stopped symbol is not a lost symbol, it is determined whether or not the displayed stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (step 132 SGS213). When the derivation-displayed stop symbol is a jackpot symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS214), and the derivation-display is performed. If the stopped symbol is not a big hit symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small winning opening pre-processing, and the special symbol stopping process is terminated (step 132 SGS215).

In addition, when the jackpot flag is not set in step 132SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the total time saving number counter is 1 or more (step 132SGS216). In addition, the total time saving number counter is the total value of the maximum time saving control number of the first special symbol and the maximum time saving control number of the second special symbol in the time saving state (either "5", "11", "689" ) is set.

When the value of the total time saving number counter is 1 or more, the value of the total time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 132SGS217). Further, it is determined whether or not the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, that is, whether or not the finished variable display is the first special figure variable display (step 132 SGS218). If the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, proceed to step 132 SGS224, if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 2 (when the finished variable display is the second special figure variable display), the second 2 The value of the special figure time saving counter is -1 and the process proceeds to step 132SGS224 (step 132SGS219). In addition, the second special figure time saving number counter is a counter in which the maximum number of times of time saving control of the second special symbol (one of "1", "7", "685") is set in the time saving state.

In step 132 SGS224, the CPU 103 determines whether any of the time saving flags is set (whether or not it is controlled to any of the time saving states). If none of the time saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 132 SGS240, and if any of the time saving flags are set, whether the value of the total time saving number counter has become 0, that is, is controlled It is determined whether or not the variable display of the maximum number of times of time saving control has ended in the time saving state (step 132SGS225). If the value of the total time saving number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 132 SGS240, and if the value of the total time saving number counter is 0, the set time saving flag is cleared (step 132 SGS226), and the value of the total time saving number counter and proceed to step 132SGS240 (step 132SGS227).

In step 132 SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set. When the small hit flag is set, the transmission setting of the hit start 3 designation command or the hit 4 start designation command is performed according to the small hit type, and the process proceeds to step 132 SGS242. In addition, the hit start 3 designation command and the hit 4 start designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing shown in FIG. 12 by the CP 103 . In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, it progresses to step 132SGS242.

Then, in step 132SGS242, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the pattern fixing period timer to the pattern fixing period timer (a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the case of the characteristic portion 132SG), and the pattern fixing corresponding to the set value. Set the transmission settings for the period specification command. Furthermore, the transmission setting of the game state background designation command according to the game state is performed, and the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 132 SGS243).

Incidentally, the symbol determination period designation command and the game state background designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing shown in FIG.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of FIG. 13 as the small hit open process. In the small hit open process, the CPU 103 first -1 the value of the open time timer (132SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the open time timer has timed out (132SGS282).

If the opening time timer has timed out, the process shifts to 132SGS293, and if the opening time timer has not timed out, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the big winning opening (132SGS283). When it is time to open the large winning opening, the CPU 103 controls the opening of the large winning opening by driving the solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS284). Then, the transmission setting of the designated command during the opening of the big winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (132SGS285), and the process proceeds to 132SGS286. It should be noted that the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening set for transmission in 132SGS285 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control processing. If it is not the time to open the big winning hole, the process proceeds to 132SGS286 without going through 132SGS284 and 132SGS285.

At 132SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is time to close the big winning opening (132SGS286). When it is time to close the big winning opening, the CPU 103 controls the closing state of the big winning opening by driving the solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS287). Then, the transmission setting of the designated command after the opening of the big winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (132SGS288), and the process proceeds to 132SGS289. It should be noted that the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening, which is set for transmission in 132SGS288, is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control processing. If it is not the closing timing of the big winning opening, the process proceeds to 132SGS289 without going through 132SGS287 and 132SGS288.

At 132SGS289, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on (132SGS289). When the second count switch 132SG024 is not turned on, the processing during the opening of the small hit is terminated, and when the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on, the second count switch 132SG024 is already turned on, That is, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed the second count switch 132SG024 is set (132SGS290). When the V winning flag is set, the small winning opening process is terminated, and when the V winning flag is not set, the V winning flag is set (132SGS291).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (132SGS292). Incidentally, the V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process.

Then, at 132SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10" (132SGS293), which is a value corresponding to the small-hit end processing (S120), and ends the small-hit open processing.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in the 132SGS 120 of FIG. 13 as the small-hit end processing. (132SGS301). When the small hit end display timer is not in operation (132SGS301; N), the small win flag is cleared (132SGS302), and transmission setting of a hit end designation command corresponding to the small win is set for the performance control board 12 (132SGS303). ). Incidentally, the hit end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process. Then, a value corresponding to the small-hit end display time is set in the small-hit end display timer (132SGS304), and the small-hit end processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the small hit end display timer is in operation, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by -1 (132SGS305). Then, it is determined whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display timer has timed out (132SGS306). When the small hit end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on (132SGS307). If the second count switch 132SG024 is not turned on, the small winning end processing is terminated, and if the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on, the second count switch 132SG024 is already turned on, that is, It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed the second count switch 132SG024 is set (132SGS308). If the V winning flag is set, the minor winning end process is terminated, and if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning flag is set (132SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (132SGS310), and ends the small winning end processing. Incidentally, the V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process.

Further, when the small hit end display time has passed in 132SGS306, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (132SGS311). When the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the big hit flag (132SGS312, 132SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the big win type from "big win C" to "big win E" based on the small win type in which the V winning occurred (132SGS314). In addition, as shown in FIG. 7(E), the type of big win is determined to be "big win C" if the type of small win in which the V winning is generated is "small win A", and the V winning is determined. If the type of small hit that occurred is "small hit B", the type of big hit is determined to be "jack D", and if the type of small hit that generated the V prize is "small hit C", the type of big hit is determined as "jackpot E". Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 (132SGS315), the determined jackpot type Remember.

In addition, the time saving flag and the time saving state variable display count counter are cleared (step 132 SGS316, step 132 SGS317), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (S114) ( 132SGS318), ending the small hit ending process.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 132SG, the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 not only during the small winning game but also during the period until the small winning end display time after the small winning game ends. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the big winning hole just before the end of the small winning game, the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024, so that the big winning game is executed after the end of the small winning end processing. It's like

In addition, when the V winning flag is not set in 132SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (132SGS319), End the termination process.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 103 SGS321). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation, the jackpot flag is cleared (step 132SGS322a), and transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is performed (step 132SGS322b). Incidentally, the jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process. Also, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the big win end display is performed on the image display device 5 is set in the big win end display timer, and the big win end processing is ended (step 132 SGS322c). .

Further, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation at step 132SGS321, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS323), and it is determined whether or not the jackpot end display timer has timed out (step 132SGS324). ). When the big win end display timer has not timed out, the big win end processing is ended, and when the big win end display timer has timed out, it is determined whether or not the big win type is the big win A (step 132 SGS325). . When the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A, the second special figure time saving number counter is set to "1" and the total time saving number counter is set to "5" (step 132SGS326, step 132SGS327). Then, the time saving A flag indicating that the time saving state A is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339 (step 132SGS327a).

Also, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot A, it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot E (step 132SGS328). When the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot E, "685" is set to the second special time reduction counter and "689" is set to the total time reduction counter (step 132 SGS329, step 132 SGS330). . Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot B (step 132SGS328). When the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the time saving C1 flag indicating that the time saving state C1 is controlled is set and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330a), and when the jackpot type is the jackpot E, the time saving state C2. A time saving C2 flag indicating that it is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330b).

In addition, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot B or jackpot E, the jackpot type is set to jackpot D, and the second special time reduction counter is set to "7", and the total time reduction counter is set to "11". ' is set (step 132SGS335, step 132SGS336). Then, the time saving B flag indicating that the time saving state B is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS336a).

At step 132 SGS339b, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the game state background designation command according to the executed jackpot type (step 132 SGS339b). Incidentally, the game state background designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process. Also, the game state background designation command set for transmission is stored (step 132 SGS340), and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28 is executed. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 28 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a startup preparation display process (step 132 SGS70) for displaying a startup preparation display on the image display device 5, and a predetermined initialization process. Then (step S71), the clearing of the RAM 122, the setting of various initial values, and the register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 12 are performed. Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control processing, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

In this embodiment, for example, the "startup preparation display" described in the embodiment may be described as a "startup preparation image" in the drawings. Since "display" and "image" are the same thing, "display" may be described as "image", and "image" may be described as "display".

Further, the initialization process of step S71 does not initialize the startup preparation display displayed by the startup preparation display display process of step 132 SGS70. In addition, by displaying the startup preparation display, it is possible to quickly know that power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, and it is possible to confirm that the image display device 5 can normally display the display. .

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state is used, the interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, a power failure recovery display process (step 132 SGS75b) for displaying a power failure recovery display on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103; An initial motion control process (step 132SGS75c) for executing the initial motion of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started is executed.

It should be noted that the startup preparation display processing in this characterizing portion 132SG is the processing of setting a cold start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start at the timing when it is determined that the power-on designation command has been received. Including, the power failure recovery display display processing in this characteristic part 132SG is the timing of determining that the power failure recovery designation command has been received, and the hot start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by hot start. contains.

Also, after the initial operation control process, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random value update process (step S77), a demonstration effect control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration effect in the pachinko game machine 1, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and each Volume/light amount adjustment processing (step 132 SGS79) for adjusting the light amount of the LED, and based on the reception of the background image designation command from the CPU 103, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed to the received background. A background image update process (step 132 SGS80) for updating the background image according to the image designation command is executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

In the demonstration effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, such as a timer for waiting for the start of the customer waiting demo effect, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the time-out of the timer without starting the variable display. In addition, when the variable display is started while the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration effect is interrupted, The display of the image display device 5 may be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 29, the initial motion control process is roughly divided into movable bodies provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, upper frame movable body 132SG101). to each origin position (step 132SGS100), and to confirm the operation of these movable bodies (on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and on-frame movable body 132SG101) and the operation confirmation control process (step 132 SGS200).

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in the origin placement control processing in FIG. In the origin placement control process shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the origin operation period timer is counting (step 132 SGS401). If the origin operation period timer is not operating, it is further determined whether or not the start-time origin placement control completed flag is set (step 132 SGS402). If the start-time origin placement control completion flag is not set, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the demonstration effect (step 132 SGS403). Whether or not it is time to start the demonstration effect is determined, for example, by whether or not the process timer for the demonstration effect is in operation, or the value of the process timer for the demonstration effect is a value corresponding to the start timing of the demonstration effect. It is sufficient to determine whether or not there is.

If it is not the start timing of the demonstration effect, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the variable display (132SGS404). Whether or not it is time to start variable display is determined, for example, by whether or not a process timer for variable display of decorative patterns is in operation, or whether the value of the process timer for variable display of decorative patterns is the start of variable display. It is sufficient to determine whether or not the value corresponds to the timing. If it is not the time to start variable display, the origin placement control process is terminated.

Then, in step 132 SGS402, if the start-time origin placement controlled flag is not set, in step 132 SGS403, if it is not the start timing of the demonstration effect, and in step 132 SGS404, if it is not the start timing of the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 controls Identify the detection status of the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of the target movable body (step 132SGS410), and determine whether or not there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor. (Step 132SGS411). If there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor, the movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable body) is specified (step 132SG412), and the non-detected movable body is identified. By means such as driving a corresponding motor, movement control of the undetected movable body toward the origin is started (step 132SGS413), and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414. In step 132SGS411, if there is no movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor, that is, if all movable bodies are placed at their respective origin positions, step 132SGS412 and step 132SGS413 are not executed, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414. .

At step 132 SGS414, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the detected movable body (the movable body arranged at the origin position). Then, the operation process data at the time of detection of the detected movable body is set (step 132 SGS415), the timer count of the operation process timer at the time of detection is started, and the operation control of the movable body (detected movable body) and the display control of the image display device 5 are performed. Then, sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8Rk and light emission control of each LED are started (step 132SGS416). Furthermore, the timer count of the origin operation period timer is started, and the origin placement control processing is ended (step 132 SGS417).

Also, when the origin operation period timer is counting in step 132SGS401, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts -1 (subtracts) the values of both the detection time operation process timer and the origin operation period timer (step 132SGS420). Then, it is determined whether or not the origin operation period timer after the subtraction has timed up (timed out) (step 132SGS421). If the decremented origin operation period timer has not timed up, the operation is controlled based on the process data corresponding to the decremented value of the operation process timer at detection, and the origin placement control process ends (step 132 SGS422).

If the origin movement period timer is up in step 132SGS421, the movement of each movable body is stopped (step 132SGS423) and the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103) of each movable body to be controlled are detected. , 635C) (step 132SGS 424). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (step 132SGS425).

If there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor, the movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detection movable body) is specified (step 132SG426), and the origin placement control at startup is completed. If the flag is not set, the flag is set and then the origin placement control process is terminated (step 132SGS427). If there is no movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor, the process of step 132 SGS427 is executed and the origin placement control process ends.

31 and 32 are flowcharts showing an example of processing executed in the operation confirmation control processing in FIG. 29. FIG. In addition, as described above, the cold start in this characteristic portion 132SG means that the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the clear switch 92 is pressed down, that is, the game control at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 It means that the initialization process (step S6) is executed in the main process, and the hot start in this characteristic part 132SG means that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on while the clear switch 92 is not pressed down, That is, it indicates that the recovery process (step S4) was executed in the game control main process when the pachinko game machine 1 was started.

In the operation confirmation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set (step 132 SGS501). If the post-confirmation operation execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the operation confirmation execution flag is set (step 132 SGS502). If the operation check execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the operation check completed flag is set (step 132 SGS503).

If the operation confirmed flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the operation confirmed flag is not set, it is further determined whether or not the start-time origin placement control completed flag is set ( step 132 SGS 504). If the start-time origin placement control completed flag is not set, the operation check control process is terminated, and if the start-up origin placement control complete flag is set, the operation check execution flag is set (step 132 SGS505), It is determined whether or not there is a memory of a non-detectable movable body (step 132SGS506). If there is no memory of the non-detected movable body, the process proceeds to step 132SGS508, and if there is memory of the non-detected movable body, the motion of the non-detected movable body is restricted and then the process proceeds to step 132SGS508 (step 132SGS507).

At step 132 SGS508, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the activation type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was activated by cold start or hot start), and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper) according to the activation type. . In step 132 SGS508, it is determined which of the cold start flag and the hot start flag is set, and if the cold start flag is set, the start type is specified as cold start, and the cold start is responded to. Set the operation confirmation process data (upper), specify the startup type as hot start if the hot start flag is set, and set the operation confirmation process data (upper) according to the hot start. good.

Then, the timer count of the operation confirmation process timer (higher order) is started to control the operation of the movable body, display control of the image display device 5, sound output control from the speakers 8L and 8R, and light emission control of each LED, The operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS509).

If the flag during operation confirmation execution is set in step 132SGS502, the effect control CPU120, the value of the operation confirmation process timer (upper) -1 (subtraction) (step 132SGS510), for operation confirmation after the subtraction Identify the process data corresponding to the value of the process timer (step 132SGS511). Then, it is determined whether or not the identified process data is completion data (step 132SGS512). If the specified process data is not the completion data, it is further determined whether or not the specified process data is data corresponding to the effect position (step 132 SGS513). If the specified process data is not the data corresponding to the effect position, the process proceeds to step 132 SGS515, and if the specified process data is the data corresponding to the effect position, the effect result of the effect position sensor of the corresponding movable body is stored and then stepped. 132SGS515 (step 132SGS514).

At step 132 SGS515, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process switching flag is set. If the process-switching flag is set, the action confirmation control process is terminated, and if the process-switching flag is not set, whether or not it is time to start variable object display in which the movable body effect is further executed. is determined (step 132SGS516). If it is not the start timing of the target variable display at which the movable body effect is executed, the operation of the movable body, the display image on the image display device 5, and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are based on the process data specified in step 132SGS511. , the light emission of each LED is controlled, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS517).

In addition, when it is the start timing of the target variable display at which the movable body effect is executed, the start type (whether the pachinko game machine 1 was started with a cold start or a hot start) is specified, and the specified start type is specified. Accordingly, the subordinate switching control type associated with the switching control table shown in FIG. 33 is specified (step 132SGS518).

For example, as shown in FIG. 33, when the specified activation type is cold start, image display control and LED light emission control in the image display device 5 are specified as the lower switching control type, and the specified activation type is In the case of hot start, image display control on the image display device 5 and sound output control from the speakers 8L and 8R are specified as lower-order switching control types.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes control to switch the control process data corresponding to the lower switching control type to the lower process data among the process data specified in step 132 SGS 518 (step 132 SGS 219), and sets the process switching flag ( step 132 SGS 520). Further, the control based on the non-switching process data among the process data identified in step 132SGS218 is executed, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS521).

Also, in step 132SGS512, if the process data identified in step 132SGS511 is not the completion data, the effect control CPU 120 detects the detection position of each movable body origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C). While storing (step 132SGS530), the malfunctioning movable body is identified from the detection results of the performance position sensors (performance position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) and origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C). and store it as an operation restricted movable body (step 132SGS531). Further, the operation check executing flag is cleared (step 132SGS532), and it is determined whether or not the process switching flag is set (step 132SGS533).

When the process switching flag is not set, the operation confirmation flag is set (step 132 SGS534), and the operation confirmation control process is executed by executing the control to switch all the control process data to the performance control process data (lower order). When it ends (step 132SGS535) and the process switching flag is set, the process switching flag is cleared (step 132SGS536), and if the same type is cold start, the control process data for sound output control is produced. Control to switch to the control process data (lower order) is executed (step 132SGS536a). In addition, the chance button and the movable body on the board are specified as the movable bodies to be operated, and the process data for the post-confirmation action (upper) are set (step 132 SGS537), and the timer count of the process timer for the post-confirmation action (upper) is performed. to start the operation control of the chance button and the board movable body and the LED light emission control (step 132SGS538). Also, the post-confirmation operation executing flag is set, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS539).

In addition, when the flag during execution of the operation after confirmation is set in step 132SGS501, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts -1 (subtracts) the value of the process timer for operation after confirmation (higher) (step 132SGS540), and after the subtraction The process data corresponding to the post-confirmation operation process timer value is specified (step 132SGS541). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified process data is completion data (step 132SGS542).

If the specified process data is not the completion data, it is further determined whether or not the specified process data is data corresponding to the rendering position (step 132SGS543). If the specified process data is not the corresponding data of the effect position, the operation confirmation control process is ended, and if the specified process data is the corresponding data of the effect position, the chance button 631B and the effect position sensor of the on-board movable body 32A. The detection results of (projection position sensor 635D and effect position sensor 132SG124) are stored, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS544).

Further, when the specified process data is completion data, the effect control CPU 120 stores the detection results of the chance button 631B and the origin position sensors of the on-board movable body 32A (origin position sensor 635C and origin position sensor 132SG123) ( Step 132SGS545), it is determined whether or not the chance button 631B is located at the origin position (step 132SGS546). If the chance button 631B is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS548; 132 SGS547).

At step 132SGS548, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the on-board movable body 32A is arranged at the origin position. If the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, the process advances to step 132SGS550, and if the on-board movable body 32A is not located at the origin position, the on-board movable body 32A is stored as an operation limiting movable body. Proceed to step 132SGS550 (step 132SGS549).

At step 132 SGS550, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to switch the process data of the movable body control and the LED light emission control to the effect control process data (lower order). Then, the operation check executing flag is cleared to end the operation check control process (step 132SGS551).

By executing the origin placement control process and the operation confirmation control process as described above, as shown in FIG. Control, sound output control, and LED light emission control are executed based on the process data for operation confirmation (upper order), and display control is executed based on the process data for effect control (lower order).

Further, as shown in FIG. 34(B), in the execution period of the switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start, the movable body control and the LED light emission control are based on the operation confirmation process data (upper). Display control and sound output control are executed based on the effect control process data (lower order).

Further, as shown in FIG. 34C, during the execution period of the post-confirmation operation control, the chance button 631B and the operation control of the movable body on the board (movable body control) and the LED light emission control are the process data for the post-confirmation operation. (upper rank), display control and sound output control are executed based on the process data for effect control (lower rank).

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 28 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. As a notice, a reservation display notice effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the reservation display, and a variable display of the second special pattern once in the time saving state A and four times of the second special pattern immediately after that. A panel image is displayed on the image display device 5 for the variable display of , and a panel effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit can be executed at different ratios according to the display mode of these panel images. there is In addition, when it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect, the value corresponding to the display mode of the determined pending display is set as the pending display flag value corresponding to the pending storage of the object of effect in the start winning reception command buffer 132SGS194A. , when it is decided to execute the panel display effect, a value corresponding to the display mode of the determined panel display is set as a panel display flag value corresponding to the pending memory of the effect target in the start winning reception command buffer 132SGS194A. , the display of these pending display and panel display may be started (see FIG. 10B).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes result effect execution processing (step 132SGS162). In the result production execution process, for example, the number of jackpot games that have occurred since the first hit occurred and the number of prize balls that have been paid out are counted, and the final variable display in the time saving state (time saving state A is immediately after the time saving state ends) 4 times of variable display) is completed and control is performed to the normal state (during the pattern fixing period), the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls that have been paid out are displayed on the image display device 5. A process for executing the result effect is performed. It should be noted that, in this characteristic portion 132SG, when it is controlled to the time saving state C2, there is a case where the result production is executed exceptionally from the symbol determination period of the 7th variable display of the 2nd special figure to the 11th variable display. be.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes rush effect execution processing (step 132SGS163). In rush performance execution processing, for example, a rush performance is executed to notify that the time-saving state is controlled from during the ending performance of the big win game to during the first variable display after the big win game.

After executing the process of step 132SGS163, the effect control CPU 120 performs any of the following steps S170 to S175, step 132SGS176, and step 132SGS177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example. Select and execute.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 provides a command (first symbol confirmation command, second symbol confirmation command, third symbol confirmation command) specifying to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol received in the variable display effect process. Based on the receipt of the confirmation command or the fourth symbol confirmation command, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped over the symbol confirmation period indicated by the symbol confirmation command.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state is received from the main board 11 at the end of the symbol fixing period. Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "4". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "6", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the small hit of step 132 SGS176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "7", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step 132 SGS177 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "7". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

36 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 35. FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether or not the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command is received. Determine (step 132SGS601). When the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A are stored in the buffer. It is shifted upward by one number (step 132SGS602). The content of the buffer number "0" is erased because it cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift. If the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process is terminated. After executing step 132SGS602, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 132SGS605), and the stop design of the decorative design according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. is determined (step 132SGS606).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a time saving remaining number display process (step 132 SGS608) for displaying the remaining time saving control number (time saving remaining number) in the time saving state on the image display device 5, and the remaining time saving control number is a predetermined number in the time saving state. Time saving end countdown display processing (step 132 SGS609) for displaying the countdown of the remaining number of times until the time saving control ends (also called countdown effect, time saving end countdown) on the image display device 5 (step 132 SGS609), during variable display A variable display notice effect determination process (step 132 SGS610) for executing a variable display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit is executed.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern, game state, and variable display result (step 132SGS611), and starts the process timer (step 132SGS612).

Each process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the lever body 631A and the chance button 631B, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

In addition, as will be described later, the feature part 132SG exemplifies a mode in which the remaining number of times of time saving is displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B, time saving state C2, time saving state B, time saving state C2 When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to a power failure or the like during the variable display, power Even if is restored, the display of the remaining number of time saving is not resumed during the variable display, and the display of the remaining number of time saving is resumed at the start of the next variable display (timing when the value of the time saving number counter is updated) good. In addition, power supply is not performed in a state (during the customer waiting state) where the variable display is not executed because there is no pending memory although it is controlled to one of the time saving state B, the time saving state C2, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2. Even if it is stopped, the display of the remaining number of time saving will not be resumed even if the power is restored, and the remaining number of time saving will be displayed from the start of the next variable display or the variable display after the value of the time saving number counter is updated. should be restarted.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (chance button 631B, etc.) are controlled (132SGS613). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (132SGS614). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (132SGS615). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (132SGS616).

Incidentally, in the effect processing during variable display, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each decremented by one. Then, the effect device is controlled according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and the decorative pattern is realized according to the value of the variable display time timer. Stop the variable display and set the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (S173).

(Flow of production)
Next, the flow of presentation in the variable display in the characteristic portion 132SG will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, when the game state is the normal state, the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win effect is started by the progress of the variable display of the first special figure, and a predetermined period elapses, a part of the ready-to-win effect. As an image display device 5, an operation prompting image prompting the user to operate the chance button 631B is displayed on the image display device 5 (X1 to X5). At this time, if the variable display result is a big hit, the player operates the chance button 631B or when the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, the lower board movable body 32B operates as part of the ready-to-win performance. is executed, the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit (X6 to X10). After that, after the image display device 5 displays a notification image for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit, the game ball is hit toward the right game area in the big win game state for the player. A right-handed notification for notifying that these game balls are to be won in the big winning opening and a round effect during the round game are displayed (X11 to X13).

When the jackpot game is the jackpot A jackpot game, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, when the jackpot game ends, a rush performance A is executed to indicate that control has been made to the time-saving state A through the jackpot ending performance. be. During execution of the rush performance A, if there is a reserved memory of the first special figure, the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first special figure is executed in an extremely short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds). be done. In addition to being controlled to the time-saving state A, as the rush effect A, the time-saving state A hits the game ball toward the right game area for the player, so that the game ball goes to the second start winning opening. is executed to notify that it is in the state of executing the variable display of the second special figure by winning (A1 to A4).

When the player hits the game ball toward the right game area according to the rush performance A, the variable display of the second special figure is started when the game ball wins the second starting winning hole. At this time, a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure is displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Then, when the player hits the game ball toward the right game area and the game ball wins the second start winning slot, the image display device 5 displays a panel corresponding to each reserved memory of the second special figure as a panel effect. Additional images are displayed. These panel images are displayed at maximum five (A5 to A7) based on the variable display of the second special figure being executed and the maximum number of pending memories ("4") of the second special figure.

When one variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A ends, the game state is controlled from the time saving state A to the normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first pending memory of the second special figure is displayed. be started. In the variable display, when the decorative symbols stop at the ready-to-win combination, an operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the chance button 631B (A8 to A10).

At this time, if the variable display result is a small hit, the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect in which the lower board movable body 32B operates is executed. After that, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a small hit. After that, an image (“Aim for V!”) is displayed on the image display device 5 to instruct the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area and cause the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball. image) is displayed (B1 to B3).

When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SG024 by the player hitting the game ball toward the right game area during the small winning game according to the image, the second count switch in the image display device 5 is detected. 130SG024 detects a game ball during a small winning game, that is, after displaying an image notifying that a V prize has occurred, an image showing that the game is controlled to a big winning game is displayed (B4-B5 ).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a loss, the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop with a combination indicating a loss, and the variable display result is a loss. is reported. After that, in the variable display corresponding to the second to fourth pending storage of the second special figure, after the number of times of variable display of the remaining second special figure is notified in the image display device 5, the second special figure An image similar to that of the first reserved memory is displayed (B6-B8).

Then, when all the variable displays corresponding to the pending storage of the second special symbol are lost, the second special symbol is suspended on the image display device 5 during the design determination period of the variable display of the last second special symbol. An image (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END...") indicating that all variable displays corresponding to the memory have been completed is displayed. After that, while the dedicated stage image is being displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special figure is executed ten times. In addition, while the dedicated stage image is being displayed, an image is also displayed for instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the left game area for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). (B9-B12).

In one of the time-saving states, the player hits the game ball into the right game area so that the game ball wins the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the second special figure is mainly executed. After the end of the big hit game via the small hit of these second special symbols, it will be controlled to the time saving state B or the time saving state C2.
As will be described later, when the power is cut off and then restored during the periods of (A1) to (A4) in FIG. is performed. 38 (A4) immediately before the end (within 5 seconds until the end) and the power is restored, and the display period of the startup preparation display overlaps the period of FIG. 38 (A5), the image display device 5 From FIG. 38(A6) onwards, the display during restoration is displayed (the timing at which the display during restoration is not displayed is shown in FIGS. 39(B3) and (B7)), and the movable body performs an initial action for 26 seconds. 38(A5), when the power is cut off and then restored, the restoration-in-progress display is displayed until the image display device 5 starts the variable display corresponding to the second panel, and the initials are displayed for 26 seconds by the movable body. An operation (the fluctuation time of the first time reduction is longer than 26 seconds) is performed. 38 (A10) (five seconds or more until the end of the fluctuation), and when the power is restored (disconnected pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration in progress display until FIG. , the initial motion in the normal mode is performed until FIG. 39(B6), and the initial motion in the shortened mode (in consideration of the button effect) is performed from FIG. 38 (A10) and the power is restored (hit pattern), the image display device 5 displays the image during restoration up to FIG. 39 (B3), the initial operation of the mode (considering "Aim for V") is performed.In addition, when the under-board movable body 32B operates, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in the following manner. The initial operation differs from FIG. 39(B1).

39(B2) (within 5 seconds until the end of the variable display) and the power is restored, and the display period of the startup preparation display overlaps with the period of FIG. 39(B5), the image display device 5 starts After the display period of the preparation display has elapsed, "Aim for V" can be visually recognized, and the main command (small hit start designation command or small hit open designation command) received by the movable body in FIG. The initial action after display/hide is changed to a shortened mode. Also, the opening of the big winning opening is started during the display period of the activation preparation display. 39 (B3) (at the start (2 seconds remaining until the next round)), if the power is cut off and restored, the image display device 5 will issue an open designation command (second round) after V winning (round 1) ) until reception, a special mode (reporting that a small hit has been made) display during recovery is displayed, the movable body performs an initial action in a normal mode (completed by the start of the next round), and the big prize opening is activated Opening is started during the display period of the preparation display.

When it is controlled to the time saving state B after the end of the big hit game, that is, when the variable display result is a small hit and the small hit type is a small hit A or a small hit B, first, as shown in FIG. As a variable display of the figure, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a small hit. After that, an image ("Aim for V!") is displayed on the image display device 5 to instruct the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area and cause the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball. image) is displayed. When the player hits a game ball toward the right game area during a small winning game according to the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the second count switch in the image display device 5 is detected. 130SG024 detects a game ball during a small winning game, that is, after displaying an image notifying that a V prize has occurred, an image ("FEVER" image) indicating that the game is controlled to a big winning game is displayed. are displayed (C1 to C4).

Next, when the big-hit game via the small-hit game ends, an image corresponding to the number of prize balls won in the big-hit game is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ending effect. Then, after executing the rush effect B in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is different according to the number of times that the time saving state has already been controlled, the first variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state B is performed. be started. In the time-saving state B, the variable display of decorative patterns is executed in a state where the background image of the city at night (second background display) is displayed on the image display device 5 (C5 to C8).

It should be noted that, in the time-saving state B, if the variable display result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, and the 7th variable display (the 7th variable display of the second special figure) is completed, the 7th variable The result production is started during the display pattern confirmation period. As the result performance, a value corresponding to the number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after being controlled to the first hit or any of the time-saving states and the total number of won prize balls is displayed. In addition, if there is a pending memory of the second special symbol at the start of the result production, variable display of the second special symbol a maximum of four times according to the pending memory of the remaining second special symbols (remaining pending memory). Is executed in a very short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) (C9-C11).

When neither the big hit nor the small hit is achieved in any of the variable displays according to the remaining reserved storage, the stage background image is started to be displayed on the image display device 5, and the game is played for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). An image instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the left game area is also displayed. After that, the stage background image is displayed on the image display device 5 until the ten times of variable display are completed (C12 to C14).

In addition, when it is controlled to the time saving state C2 after finishing the big hit game via the small hit, that is, when it is controlled to the time saving state C2 after finishing the big hit game of the big hit E, first, it is the same as the case of being controlled to the time saving state B. 2, a stop display with a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win, a display of an image displaying "Aim for V!" , display of an image ("FEVER" image) indicating that the game is controlled to a jackpot game, display of an image according to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game, display of an image according to the number of times the game has already been controlled to the time-saving state. In a state where the rush effect B in which a part of the image displayed on the device 5 is different and the second background display are displayed, the decoration pattern variable display is executed seven times (C1 to C9 in FIG. 40).

Here, as shown in FIG. 41, when the variable display result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, and the seventh variable display of the decoration pattern (the seven variable display of the second special figure) ends, the 7 The result effect is started in the pattern fixing period of the variable display for the first time. As the result performance, a value corresponding to the number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after being controlled to the first hit or any of the time-saving states and the total number of won prize balls is displayed. In addition, during the execution period of the result production, the variable display of the decoration pattern (variable display of the second special figure) is executed in a very short special figure variation time (0.5 seconds) three times. If the result of the variable display is neither a big hit nor a small hit even in the three times of variable display of decorative patterns (8th to 10th variable display), further variable display of decorative patterns (11th variable display) ) is executed (D1-D3).

Then, when the variable display result in the eleventh variable display is neither a big win nor a small win, the image display device 5 emits light according to the operation of the board movable body 32A along with the movement of the board movable body 32A. An effect image is displayed. After the on-board movable body 32A falls, when the on-board movable body 32A returns to the standby position (upper position of the image display device 5) before the fall, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in a dark display (black color). Is displayed. After the dark display ends, an image indicating that the time saving state has not ended is displayed on the image display device 5 (D4 to D6).

Further, on the image display device 5, an operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the chance button 631B. At this time, the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, the time saving control number in the time saving state in the image display device 5 is 685 times, that is, substantially During the time saving state, a V-stock effect is executed to notify that the variable display result will be a big win or a small win. After that, when the V-stock effect ends with the end of the 11th variable display, the 12th and subsequent variable displays are started while the second background display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (D7-D9). In particular, as shown in FIGS. 41 (D2) to 41 (D8), in the V stock production from the result production in the time saving state C2, unlike the result production corresponding to the time saving state B, the result production is finished. In order to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the time saving control will continue to be executed, the right hitting notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden. It should be noted that the right hitting notification image in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 is restarted from the start timing of the twelfth variable display.

[Display screen of image display device 5]
As shown in FIGS. 37 to 41, when the game state is the normal game state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower center of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the left side corresponds to the first reserved memory. A first pending display area 132SG011 is provided. For example, the active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013 in response to the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the value of the first reserved memory number is 4. Four first suspension displays 132SG001 are displayed side by side in the one suspension display area 132SG011.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided at the lower left side of the display screen of the image display device 5, and above it, a second reservation display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second reservation storage is provided. (See FIG. 92). For example, in response to the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013 provided at the left end of the display area, and the value of the second reserved memory number is 4. Correspondingly, four second suspension displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second suspension display area 132SG012.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to complete the winning order, when the second reservation memory is stored in the normal game state, the second reservation display 132SG002 is not displayed in the first reservation display area 132SG011, and the time saving state , the first pending display 132SG001 is not displayed in the second pending display area 132SG012 when the second pending storage is stored. 2 pending display 132SG002 may be displayed.

In addition, on the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), a second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a small number corresponding to the decoration pattern A display area 5SL for displaying patterns (for example, arrows "↓↓↓") is provided, and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative patterns.

In addition, the number of the first reserved memory, the number of the second reserved memory, the reserved display, the small pattern, the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, the time saving remaining display 132SG201, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 For such, by displaying it on the front side (upper layer) than the effect image such as the character, the effect image overlaps and the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small patterns and error display On the other hand, by displaying the decoration pattern on the back side (lower layer) than the production image, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the production image from being reduced due to overlapping of the decoration patterns. You may do so.

Incidentally, the small pattern is also referred to as a fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are displayed variably, for example, in a display device such as the image display device 5. The display changes depending on the movement. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as the effect of shielding all or part of the screen, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is currently in the state of variable display. The effect control CPU performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variable display start command. In addition, the effect control CPU performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variable display start command.

In addition, a fourth pattern display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 which is a predetermined location on the game board 2) such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED The pattern displayed on the device is also called a fourth pattern.

[Various movable bodies]
Next, each movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. FIG. FIG. 42A is a diagram showing a state in which the on-board movable body is positioned at the origin position, and FIG. 42B is a diagram showing a state in which it is positioned at the performance position. FIG. 43A is a diagram showing a state where the underboard movable body is located at the origin position, and FIG. 43B is a diagram showing a state where it is located at the performance position. FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a state in which the frame movable body and the chance button are located at the origin position, and FIG. 44B is a diagram showing a state in which they are located at the performance position.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, on the front side of the game board 2, an upper board movable body 32A and a lower board movable body 32B are provided. Since these on-board movable bodies 32A and lower-board movable bodies 32B are provided on the game board 2, they are also called "board-side movable bodies". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44, the opening/closing door frame 3a is provided with a frame movable body 132SG101 and a chance button 631B. These frame upper movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are also called "frame side movable body" because they are provided in the opening/closing door frame 3a. The board-side movable body is a movable body that is inaccessible to the player when the opening/closing door frame 3a is closed, and the frame-side movable body is accessible to the player when the opening/closing door frame 3a is closed. It is a movable body.

As shown in FIG. 42, the on-board movable body 32A is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front. and a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG122 and a power transmission member for transmitting the power of the drive motor 132SG122 to the on-board movable body 32A so as to be vertically movable. More specifically, the on-board movable body 32A is positioned at the origin position in front of the upper part of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. It can be moved between an effect position in front of the display screen and substantially in the center, and a part (lower part) overlaps the display area at the origin position, and the entire area overlaps the display area at the effect position.

Also, the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123 at the origin position, and is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG124 at the effect position. Further, a plurality of on-board movable body LEDs 9d are provided inside, and the front face can be illuminated by these on-board movable body LEDs 9d.

As shown in FIG. 43, the under-board movable body 32B has a shape that resembles a "fist" when viewed from the front. , and is vertically movable by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG132 and a power transmission member for transmitting the power of the drive motor 132SG132 to the under-board movable body 32B. Specifically, the under-board movable body 32B is positioned at the origin position at the front lower portion of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. It can be moved between an effect position in front of the display screen and substantially in the center, and a part (upper part) overlaps with the display area at the origin position, and the entire area overlaps with the display area at the effect position.

Further, the under-board movable body 32B is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG133 at the origin position, and is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG134 at the effect position. Further, a plurality of under-board movable body LEDs 9e are provided inside, and the front face can be illuminated by these under-board movable body LEDs 9e.

As shown in FIG. 44, the first effect unit 132SG100 includes a plate-like base member 132SG105 that protrudes forward and upward from the upper side of the opening/closing door frame 3a, and a plate-like base member 132SG105 that is provided on the front side of the base member 132SG105 in the vertical direction. and a frame movable body 132SG101 which is movably provided in the frame. The frame movable body 132SG101 has a shape imitating a character (not shown) displayed in various effects of the pachinko game machine 1, and a frame top decoration part 132SG111L having a shape imitating the wings of the character is provided on the back side. , 132SG111R are operatively provided.

The first effect unit 132SG100 includes a drive motor 132SG102 and a drive mechanism (not shown) including a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG102 to the frame movable body 132SG101, and the frame movable body 132SG101 is positioned at the origin position. an origin position sensor 132SG103 for detecting that the upper frame movable body 132SG101 is positioned at the production position; A driving mechanism (not shown) including a power transmission member for transmitting power to the decorative portions 132SG111L and 132SG111R; An effect position sensor 132SG134 for detecting that the decorative portions 132SG111L and 132SG111R are positioned at the effect position, and a frame movable body LED 9f for causing the front surface of the frame movable body 132SG101 and the frame decorative portions 132SG111L and 132SG111R to emit light. and have

In this way, the frame movable body 132SG101 moves vertically between the origin position shown in FIG. 44(A) and the production position shown in FIG. You can move in any direction. In addition, the frame decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are changed into a non-expanded state in which they are housed at the original positions on the left and right sides of the back surface of the frame movable body 132SG101, and an unfolded state in which they protrude so as to expand to the production positions on the left and right sides of the back surface. The non-deployment mode changes to the deployment mode according to the upward movement of the frame movable body 132SG101, and the deployment mode changes to the non-deployment mode according to the downward movement of the frame movable body 132SG101. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the chance button 631B is formed of a cylindrical member having an operation surface formed on its upper portion, and is provided so as to be vertically movable with respect to the base portion 600A formed on the upper portion of the operation unit 600. ing. Specifically, the chance button 631B is positioned between an origin position (see FIG. 44A) where the operation surface projects slightly upward from the base portion 600A and an operation detection position where the operation surface is below the origin position. It is movable in the vertical direction, and is urged upward so that it is always held at the origin position. is detected by

In addition, the chance button 631B is operated by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a forward/backward motor 635F and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the forward/backward motor 635F to the chance button 631B. is movable in the vertical direction between a performance position above the origin position. That is, the chance button 631B can be changed between a first operable state located at the origin position and a second operable state located at the production position by the advance/retreat motor 635F. In any of the states, the pressing operation is possible up to the operation detection position.

The chance button 631B is detected by the origin position sensor 635C at the origin position, detected by the button sensor 635B at the operation detection position, and detected by the projecting position sensor 635D at the presentation position. Also, a plurality of chance button LEDs 9g are provided inside, and the operation surface can emit light by these chance button LEDs 9g.

In the present embodiment, board-side movable bodies 32A and lower-board movable bodies 32A and 32B are exemplified as the board-side movable bodies provided on the game board 2, and a chance button is used as the frame-side movable body provided in the opening/closing door frame 3a. 631B and frame-top movable body 132SG101 are applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the board-side movable body and frame-side movable body are not limited to those described above. , forms, and operation modes can be changed in various ways.

[Various productions]
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. FIG. 46, (A) is a diagram showing effects that can be executed in the variable display period of SP reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed in the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of effects. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "prediction of the movable body" that suggests the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before the variable display (also called target variation) targeted for the prefetching notice is started. is.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 provides “starting notice”, “pseudo continuous notice”, “movable object notice”, and “reach notice” as notice effects suggesting that the variable display will be controlled for a big win. and "button notice" can be executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has a "win/fail button effect" as a decision effect for notifying whether or not the variable display based on the super reach big hit variation pattern (for example, SP reach A to E) is controlled to the big hit game state. is executable.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "fanfare effect", "round effect", "promoting effect", and "ending effect" as the jackpot effects that can be executed in the jackpot game state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute "time-saving medium performance" and "result performance" as time-saving performances that can be executed in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C as special states.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "customer waiting demonstration effect" as a standby effect that can be executed in a standby state in which no game is played.

As shown in FIG. 46(A), "notice at start", "notice of movable body/notice of pseudo continuation", and "notice of reach/notice of button", for example, the variable display mode becomes the N reach mode and the N reach effect is performed. is executed, or before the SP ready-to-win effect is executed in the SP ready-to-win mode. Also, the "win/fail button effect" is an effect that can be executed in the second half of the SP ready-to-win effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the "fanfare effect" is executed in a fanfare period of waiting from the start of control of the jackpot game state to the start of the round game in which the big winning opening is open. , the "round effect" is executed during a period in which the opening control of the big winning hole is executed in a round game in which the big winning hole is repeatedly opened and closed, and the "interval effect" is the big winning in the round game. The "ending effect" is executed during the period during which the mouth closing control is executed, and the "ending effect" is executed during the ending period from the end of the round game to the end of the jackpot game state. The fanfare period, the round game period, and the ending period are managed by the CPU 103 . In the first rounds of big wins C, D, and E, the big win openings are opened in a small win opening pattern (opening and closing are repeated for a short period of time).

In addition, the "promoting effect" is executed during a special round interval period from the end of the opening period of the third round of the big winning openings in jackpots C, D, and E to the start of the opening period of the fourth round. .

(Forecast movable body notice)
As shown in FIG. 45, "Preview movable body notice" is the target of the prefetch notice effect that is executed before the variable display of the reserved memory that is the target of the prefetch notice effect (hereinafter referred to as target variation) is executed. This is an effect in which the on-board movable body 32A operates in a plurality of variable displays corresponding to the pending memories that did not occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (A1), when the variable display is executed in the state where the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is "2", the starting winning prize occurs, and the starting winning prize occurs. If the execution of the forward-looking movable body notice is determined based on the fact that the variable display based on the pending memory before is non-reach out (that is, the special figure fluctuation time is 12 seconds or less), the variable display is stopped After that (see FIG. 47 (A2)), when the reserved memory is digested and the variable display is started, the board movable body 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the board An effect display 132SG401 emphasizing the upper movable body 32A is displayed and a sound effect is output (see FIG. 47 (A3)), and thereafter the original position is returned to until the variable display is stopped (see FIG. 47 (A4 )reference). This operation is executed before the start of the variable display (target variation) based on the reserved memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. This is executed when the variable display (target variation) based on the reserved storage that has been set is started (see FIGS. 47A5 to 47A7).

In the present embodiment, the pre-reading movable body notice is illustrated as an effect pattern that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays until the target change starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to execute a low-expectation effect pattern in which the advance notice of the movable body ends before the target change starts. Further, it may be possible to execute a plurality of performance patterns with different degrees of expectation for big hits depending on the moving speed when the on-board movable body 32A descends to the intermediate position and the display color of the effect display 132SG401.

(notice at the time of start)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "notice at start" is an effect suggesting whether or not the display color of the active display 132SG003 will change when the variable display is started. The display color of the active display 132SG003 is white as the standard color, and can be changed to blue, green, and red, and the display color at the end of the advance notice at the start suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. . In this embodiment, a production pattern ending in white, a production pattern ending in blue, a production pattern ending in green, and a production pattern ending in red can be executed, and a big hit is expected in the order of white, blue, green, and red. It is considered to be a high degree production pattern.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B1), when execution of the advance notice at the time of start is determined with the start of the variable display, the entire display area is extinguished or becomes low-luminance and becomes dark, A character display 132SG402 of "!!" is displayed at approximately the middle position of the display area (see FIG. 48(B2)). Then, the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white and become brighter (see FIG. 48(B3)).

In the case of the effect pattern ending in white, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings does not change or is enlarged, and after the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white in FIG. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a character display 132SG403 of "?" is displayed above the active display 132SG003 to notify that the final display color is white (see FIG. 48(B3a)).

In the case of the effect pattern ending in blue, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes from white to blue and is enlarged and displayed (see FIG. 48(B4)), and in FIG. When a predetermined time has passed since the periphery was displayed in white, the active display 132SG003 is broken and the character display 132SG404 of "!?" is displayed to notify that the final display color is blue (Fig. 48 ( See B4a)).

In the case of the production pattern that ends in green, the display colors of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings gradually change to white, blue, and green in order and are enlarged (see FIGS. 48(B4) and (B5)). At 48 (B3), when a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white, the active display 132SG003 is broken and the character display 132SG405 of "heat" is displayed, and the final display color is green. Something is reported (see FIG. 48 (B5a)).

In the case of the production pattern ending in red, the display colors of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings change step by step in the order of white, blue, green, and red, and after being enlarged and displayed (see FIGS. 48(B4) to (B6). ), when a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 was displayed in white in FIG. (See FIG. 48(B6a)).

In this way, the "notice at the start" is an introductory part as a period to instigate whether the pending display will change (see FIG. 48 (B2) to (B6)), and a period to notify the change result of the pending display. and a result notification part (see FIGS. 48(B3a), (B4a), (B5a), and (B6a)).

In addition, in the present embodiment, by changing the display mode such as the display color and size of the active display 132SG003, the degree of expectation for a big hit is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be suggested by changing the display mode other than the display color and size. Further, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be suggested by changing the display modes of not only the active display 132SG003 but also the first suspension display 132SG001 and the second suspension display 132SG002. Moreover, the change pattern of display color and size is not limited to the above, and other change patterns may be executed.

(Movable body notice)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "movable body advance notice" means that the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down a plurality of times between the origin position and the intermediate position before the pseudo-continuous effect, which will be described later, is executed in the variable display. At the same time, the chance button 631B vibrates. The production pattern of the movable body notice is a "vibration (small) pattern" with a small vertical vibration width, and a "vibration (large) pattern" with a large vertical vibration width and a high probability of hitting the jackpot. Yes, and one of non-execution, "vibration (small) pattern", and "vibration (large) pattern" is determined according to the variable display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (C1), when it is decided to execute the movable body announcement along with the start of the variable display, at a predetermined timing before the start of the pseudo continuous effect, The body 32A vibrates vertically a plurality of times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates (see FIG. 49(C2)). Further, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays an effect display 132SG407 emphasizing the on-board movable body 32A, and the speakers 8L and 8R output sound effects.

In the present embodiment, a form in which the movable body notice is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable The movable body announcement may also be executed in the display (for example, the non-reach fluctuation pattern).

Further, it is possible to operate the vibration motor 635E (pattern A) before starting the operation of the chance button 631B in the initial operation described later or along with the advance operation. In addition, the vibration motor 635E is operated (pattern B) to suggest the degree of expectation as an effect during fluctuation, and the vibration motor 635E is operated (pattern C) as a decoration (enjoyment) at the time of a big hit or when the movable body is operated (pattern C). Is possible. Each of pattern A, pattern B, and pattern C has a different vibration mode (strength of movement, rhythm of movement, movement time) and a lamp mode (pattern A: initial emphasis, pattern B: high-speed white flashing, high-speed red flashing, pattern C: rainbow color, lighting in the color corresponding to the effect displayed when the movable body moves) and sound output mode (pattern A: initialization notification or silence, pattern B: changing BGM, pattern C: blessing sound at the time of a big hit , moving body production sound) are different.

As will be described later, the initial emphasis mode is a light emission pattern (luminance, light emission time, etc.) dedicated to the initial operation, and is therefore a light emission pattern that is not used in all effect operation control (FIG. 56B). reference).

(Pseudo consecutive notice)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "pseudo consecutive notice" indicates whether or not the variable display resumes after temporarily stopping the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols. It is a production that encourages whether or not to make it look like multiple variable displays. The pseudo-continuous effect includes a double pattern in which the variable display is restarted twice and a triple pattern in which the variable display is restarted three times and the expectation of a big hit is higher than the double pattern, and the variable display results. Either a double pattern or a triple pattern is determined according to .

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (C1), when the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed is started, and when the execution of the movable body notice is determined, the movable body notice is executed. (See FIG. 49 (C2)). After that, the decorative design that has been variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 49 (C3)), and the number is one larger than the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L. After the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 49 (C4)), the decorative design with the same number as the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R is displayed in the middle decoration. Deceleration display is performed before the stop display position in the symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 49 (C5)).

After that, in the case of the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive notice is executed, the decoration symbol having the same number as the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C. After that (see FIG. 49 (C6)), the variable display of decorative symbols is restarted in the left decorative design display area 5L, middle decorative design display area 5C, and right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 49 (C7)). On the other hand, in the case of the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive notice is not executed, a decoration symbol with a number one larger than the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C. 49, and a variable display result of failure is displayed (see FIG. 49 (C10)).

In addition, in FIG. 49 (C7), after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of the pseudo consecutive notice of the double pattern, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the left decorative design display area 5L is variably displayed. (See FIG. 49 (C8)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. It becomes a ready-to-win state (see FIG. 49 (C9)), and develops into an SP ready-to-win effect. In addition, in FIG. 49 (C7), after the variable display of the decoration pattern is resumed, in the case of the pseudo consecutive notice of the triple pattern, after the flow of FIGS. At 49 (C8) and (C9), it becomes a reach mode and develops into SP reach production.

In this way, the "pseudo continuous notice" is an introductory part as a period for prompting whether or not the variable display will be resumed (see FIGS. 49 (C3) to (B5)), and the result of whether or not the variable display is resumed. and a result reporting part (see FIGS. 49(C6), (C10), and (C9)) as a period for reporting.

(Reach notice)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "ready-to-reach notice" starts the variable display of decorative patterns, and after the decorative patterns that have been variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L are stopped and displayed, the left decorative patterns are displayed. This is an effect to arouse whether or not the decorative pattern of the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the area 5L is stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, that is, whether or not the ready-to-win mode is achieved.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (D1), after the variable display is started, after the decorative design that has been variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is stopped and displayed (FIG. 50 ( (See D2)) Before the stop display position in the variablely displayed right decorative design display area 5R, the deceleration display of the decorative design with the same number as the decorative design stop-displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is started. (See FIG. 50 (D3)). Then, when an operation by the player is detected within a predetermined operation effective period after the deceleration display is started, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has passed, if the ready-to-win mode is not established, the left decoration is performed. A decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the pattern display area 5L passes through the stop display position, and the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 50 (D4), (D5), and (D7)), In the ready-to-win mode, the decorative symbols with the same numbers as the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L are stopped and displayed at the stop display positions (see (D4), (D5), and (D6) in FIG. 50). ).

In addition, the reach mode is a combination of a plurality of decorative patterns (for example, "333" etc.) that constitutes the big hit display result from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed. ), except for one decoration pattern (for example, middle pattern, etc.) (for example, left pattern and right pattern, etc.) are displayed in a stopped state, and the one decoration pattern (for example, middle pattern, etc.) is variably displayed. It is a mode (also referred to as reach effect) to perform.

(button notice)
As shown in FIG. 45, "button notice" is a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L in the right decorative design display area 5R when the ready-to-win notice is executed. This is an effect that is executed during a period from when the deceleration display is started until a predetermined operation effective period elapses, and promotes the button operation that determines whether or not the ready-to-win mode is set.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50(D4) to (D5), the operation of the chance button 631B is urged from the start of the deceleration display of the decoration pattern until the predetermined operation effective period elapses. This is an operation prompt effect, which is started by displaying an operation prompt display and a button image simulating the chance button 631B. First, when the operation effective period elapses, the operation prompting display and the button image are hidden and the process ends.

The effect pattern (operation promotion mode) of the button notice includes a "long press pattern" that encourages a long press operation of the chance button 631B for a predetermined operation period, and a "long press pattern" that prompts the chance button 631B to be repeatedly pressed for a predetermined operation period. and a "single-hit pattern" that prompts the chance button 631B to be pressed once. Depending on the result of the variable display, non-execution, "long-press pattern", "continuous-hit pattern", and "single-hit pattern" are available. one is determined. Incidentally, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set. The operation-promoting display is "long press!" for the "long press pattern", "successive hits!" for the "continuous hit pattern", and "press!" for the "single hit pattern".

In this way, the "button notice" has an operation promotion part as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 50 (D5)), and a period for notifying the result of whether or not the reach mode has been entered by the operation. and a result reporting part (see (D6) and (D7) in FIG. 50).

(Accept/fail button effect)
As shown in FIG. 45, "win/fail button effect" promotes button operation to decide whether or not the variable display result will be a big hit at the end of the SP reach effect in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, It is an effect that notifies the result of whether or not it becomes.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (E1), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, the reach title, which is the type of SP reach production, is notified, and the SP reach production (for example, a friend character and an enemy character 51 (E2), (E3)), the operation of the chance button 631B is urged "Press !!” and a button display 132SG412 imitating the chance button 631B are displayed (see FIG. 51 (E4)).

Then, when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation effective period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has passed, the operation prompting display 132SG411 and the button display 132SG412 are hidden and the process ends. . Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the underboard movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position while the movable body LED 9e is illuminated in a predetermined luminescent color, and effect display 132SG413 that emphasizes the underboard movable body 32B. is displayed, a predetermined effect sound is output, and it is notified that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state (see FIG. 51 (E5)). After that, after an image (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, the combination of symbols for confirming the big win is stopped to notify that the big win has been achieved (see FIG. 51 ( E6) to (E9)).

On the other hand, if the result of the variable display is a failure, the lower board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position, and after the display 132SG414 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. , it is notified that the variable display result is a miss (see (E10) to (E12) in FIG. 51).

The production patterns are one in which the chance button 631B is positioned at the origin position and the operation promotion display is displayed, and the other in which the chance button 631B is moved from the origin position to the production position and the operation promotion display is displayed, and the operation promotion display is displayed. A performance pattern in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that in the case is executable. Also, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

In this way, the "win/fail button presentation" includes an operation promotion part (see FIG. 51 (E4)) as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B, and whether or not the result of the variable display by the underboard movable body 32B is a big hit. and a result notification part (see FIGS. 51(E5) and (E10)) as a period for notifying the result of .

(Fanfare production)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "fanfare effect" is a effect for announcing information about the controlled big win after the game is controlled to the big win game state and before the round game is started. In addition, the information about the jackpot is, for example, information about the jackpot type, the number of rounds, the number of balls put out, the game state after the jackpot (time saving state A, B, C1, C2), etc., and other information is included. may be

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (F1), when the jackpot game state is started after the combination of the jackpot confirmed symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot is started. A display 132SG420 is displayed to indicate that (see FIG. 52 (F2)). In addition, when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIGS. 54 (A1) and (A2), the frame movable body 132SG101 rises from the origin position to the performance position, and after the jackpot game state ends. , It is maintained at the production position until the time saving state ends.

Next, information indicating the jackpot types (jackpots A to E) is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 10-round jackpot, the jackpot type display 132SG421 constituting "BIG BONUS!!" It is moved and displayed to the center of the screen (see (F3) to (F6) in FIG. 52). Further, in the case of a 3-round big hit, the character image forming "SMALL BONUS!!" It will be displayed (not shown).

Next, the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after displaying the right-handed promotion display 132SG431 for promoting the player to hit the game ball into the right game area (see FIG. 52 (F7) ), the on-board movable body 32A returns to the origin position, and displays a right-handed promotion display 132SG432 indicating that the player is aiming for the big winning hole (see FIG. 52 (F8)).

In this way, the "fanfare effect" includes an introductory part as a period for informing information about the big win (see (F2) to (F6) in FIG. 52), and the operating direction of the hitting operation handle, that is, right-handed operation. and an operation direction notification part to be notified (see (F7) and (F8) in FIG. 52).

(Round production)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "round effect" is a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state after the fanfare period is over and the big win game state is controlled. This is an effect in which winning information and the like are announced.

Specifically, for example, as shown in (F9) to (F11) in FIG. a winning ball number display 132SG452, a ball number display 132SG453 that has been paid out from the start of the big win game state to the present time, and the number of consecutive big wins and the total number of balls played during the consecutive game. A display 132SG454 and a right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 for promoting a right-hand hitting operation are displayed.

Incidentally, when a big hit is made in the time-saving state, an effect of "Aim for the V!" Also during the round effect period of FIG. 52 (F9), the effect of "Aim for V!!" is continuously performed.

In addition, the images displayed in the round effects may be moving images, and the character explanation effects, "FINAL BATTLE" explanation effects, and story effects may be performed in the form of a picture-story show for each round. For example, when the explanation effect of character A is performed in the first round, the explanation effect of character B is performed in the second round. The display during recovery is displayed until the round ends, and after that, when the second round starts, the explanation performance of the character A performed in the first round is performed again. When the power is cut off, the effect control CPU 120 does not remember what was displayed before the power cut off. be considerate of others.

Also, in the round effect, a PV effect corresponding to the selected music may be performed. For example, in the first round, if the PV effect (until the chorus) is performed according to the selected song A, in the second round, if there is no change in the song, the PV effect (the chorus part) will continue in accordance with the selected song A. However, after the power is cut off in the middle of the 1st round, when the power is restored, the restoration in progress display (& no sound) is displayed until the 1st round ends, and then when the 2nd round starts , the PV production (A melody) corresponding to the selected music piece A is performed again. Further, when the selected song A is changed to the selected song B in the first round, the PV production corresponding to the selected song B is performed in the first round, and thereafter, the PV corresponding to the selected song B is continued in the second round. A performance will be performed, but after the power is cut off in the middle of the 1st round, when the power is restored, the restoration in progress display (& no sound) will be displayed until the 1st round ends, and then the 2nd round will start. At that time, a PV production corresponding to the selected music piece A is performed. In the event of a power failure, the effect control CPU 120 does not remember what was displayed before the power failure. When the ball display "150" is displayed during one round game and the power is restored after the power is cut off, the ball display displayed during the next round game becomes "0").

(promotion performance)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "promoting effect" is a big hit in which the variable display result of the second special symbol is a big hit display result, that is, in the round interval of the third round game in the big hits C to E, the round game is performed. It is a round promotion performance in which whether or not to continue (round promotion) (whether or not the relevant big win is promoted to big wins D and E (10 rounds) having a larger number of rounds than big win C (3 rounds)) is notified.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (F21), the background image is switched and displayed to the fourth background display 132SG350, and the character display 132SG352 and the scheduled output representing the scheduled number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed. The number-of-balls counter display 132SG351 is displayed, and promotion effect is started.

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional number-of-balls display 132SG353 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack. It is added to the counter value displayed in the number counter display 132SG351 (see FIG. 53 (F22)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the scheduled number-of-balls counter display 132SG351 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "300"), a button display 132SG354 imitating the chance button 631B and, for example, "Press!!" An operation prompting display 132SG355 and a gauge display 132SG356 indicating the remaining operation effective period are displayed, and an operation prompting effect for prompting the single-press operation of the chance button 631B is executed (see FIG. 53 (F23)).

Next, when the jackpot type is the jackpot D or the jackpot E, the timing at which the pressing operation of the chance button 631B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or the operation valid period elapses without the pressing operation being detected. At the same timing, the lower board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 53 (F24)), the teammate character attacks, and the counter value of the expected ball number counter display 132SG351 is variably displayed (see FIG. 53 (F24)). 53 (F24)), the enemy character is faded out (see FIG. 59 (F25)). Then, the expected number of put-out balls counter display 132SG351 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500", which is the expected number of put-out balls that can be obtained in the case of a "10R jackpot") is stopped and displayed. , the promotion to the 10-round jackpot is reported (see FIG. 53 (F26)).

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, at the timing when the pressing operation of the chance button 631B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or at the timing when the operation valid period passes without the pressing operation being detected. , an image (not shown) in which the lower board movable body 32B did not rise from the origin position to the performance position and the enemy character could not be defeated was displayed, indicating that the 10-round jackpot was not achieved, that is, the 10-round jackpot was not reached. It is notified that promotion has failed (see FIG. 53 (F27)).

In this way, the "promotion effect" consists of an introductory part as a period for arousing the promotion or not (see Fig. 53 (F21) to (F23)), and a result reporting part (Fig. 53 (F24) to (F27)).

(ending production)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "ending effect" is a effect in which the end of the big win and the information about the game state to be controlled after the end of the big win are reported.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 52 (F12) to (F14), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot C, when the third round game ends, after the jackpot ends, " FINAL BATTLE effect" is started (controlled to the time saving state A), and the right hitting promotion indicating that the game ball is launched to the right game area and aimed at the variable winning ball device 6B. Display 132SG430 is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B, when the third round game is finished, it is notified that the "BATTLE RUSH presentation" is started after the jackpot is finished (controlled to the time-saving state C1). (Refer to FIG. 52 (F32) and (F34)). In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, when the promotion performance (promotion failure) is completed, it is notified that the "BATTLE RUSH performance" is started (controlled to the time-saving state B) after the completion of the jackpot. (See (F32) and (F34) in FIG. 53). In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when the 9th round game is finished, the "BATTLE RUSH effect" is started after the jackpot is finished (controlled to time saving state B or time saving state C1). (see (F32) and (F34) in FIG. 53).

In this way, the "ending effect" is an introduction part as an introduction period (see FIG. 52 (F12), FIG. 53 (F31)), and a time saving state notification part (FIG. 52 (F13), in which information about the time saving state is notified. 53 (F32) and (F34)), and an operation direction notification part (see FIG. 52 (F14)) for notifying the operation direction of the hitting operation handle, that is, performing a right-handed operation.

(short time production)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "time-saving medium effect" is an effect that notifies that the "FINAL BATTLE effect" or "BATTLE RUSH effect" is being executed, that is, is controlled to the time-saving state ( 38 and 40).

(result production)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "result effect" is an effect for notifying that the "FINAL BATTLE effect" or "BATTLE RUSH effect" ends, that is, the control of the time saving state ends (FIGS. See Figure 40). Further, when the game state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state, as shown in FIGS. 54 (B1) and (B2), the frame movable body 132SG101 descends from the production position to the origin position and is maintained at the origin position. be done.

(Customer waiting demo)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "customer waiting demonstration effect" is an effect in which a customer waiting (game standby) state is notified. , and a variable display start designation command, which is started when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without receiving a control command.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (G1), after the initial operation is started in the initial operation control process accompanying power-on, when the initial operation ends (FIG. 55 (G2 )), and the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 55 (G3)). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without the variable display being performed since the power was turned on in FIG. A customer waiting demonstration effect is started (see FIG. 55 (G4)).

In the customer waiting demo effect, after a moving image introducing a plurality of allied characters A to D (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various effects and the details of the contents in order is displayed (Fig. 55 ( (G4) to (G7)), while the image of allied characters A to D is displayed (see FIG. 55 (G8)), the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the production position, and a predetermined time elapses. After a lapse of time, it rises to the origin position (see FIGS. 55(G9) to (G10)), and the first background display 132SG310 representing the daytime city corresponding to the normal state is displayed as a background image, and the process ends (FIG. 55 ( G11)). When the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 55 (G12)).

When a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without the variable display being performed after the customer waiting demonstration effect is finished, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started again. Even after that, as long as the waiting state continues, the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed periodically. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the standby state, or may not be executed after being executed a predetermined number of times.

Also, in the present embodiment, the form in which various effects shown in FIG. 45 can be executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and effects other than the above may be executed. Moreover, the effect mode in each effect can be changed variously, and the effect may be executed in a mode other than the above.

[Initial operation control]
Next, the operation of the movable body, the lamp, and the mode of sound will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56A is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable body, and FIG. 56B is a diagram showing the mode of lamps and sounds according to the operation of the movable body.

As shown in FIG. 56(A), when the power is turned on (during cold start processing or hot start processing), the effect control CPU 120 has movable bodies (upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, Initial operation control for initial movement of the upper frame movable body 132SG101), and production of movable bodies (upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, upper frame movable body 132SG101) in various effects Effect operation control to operate in a corresponding mode can be executed.

"Initial motion control" includes non-detection time motion control that returns the movable body to the origin position when it is positioned other than the origin position, and once leaves the origin position when the movable body is positioned at the origin position, "Origin placement control (short initial operation control)" including non-detection operation control for returning to the origin position from a position away from the origin position, and confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. and "action check control (long initial action control)" for moving the movable body from the origin position to the performance position and then moving it from the performance position to the origin position.

Specifically, if the movable body is not detected by the origin position sensor when the initial operation process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the movable body has moved from the origin position for some reason (for example, during transportation or installation on the game island). If the return to the origin could not be performed during the previous operation (for example, during the execution of the performance, the return to the origin of the movable body could not be confirmed or could not be performed due to the motor going out of step, malfunctioning, or being caught). (e.g., when an operation error (abnormal operation) occurs), or when it moves from the origin position due to vibration of the game machine, etc.). If there is, non-detection operation control is executed to return to the origin. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable body is at a position away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable body in the direction of the origin position.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the motion control at the time of detection when the movable body is detected by the origin position sensor when the initial motion processing is executed. For example, in order to ensure that the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor, it is possible to perform a predetermined movement from when the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor to when the movement of the movable body in the direction of the origin position is restricted. When a range (for example, play) is set, the robot may return to the origin and stop at a position further shifted to the rear side than the position detected by the origin position sensor. Therefore, even if the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor, detection-time operation control is performed to return the movable body to a more accurate origin position.

In this detection operation control, it is necessary to move the movable body to a position away from the origin position and then return it to the origin position in order to temporarily cancel the detection state by the origin position sensor, but it is not necessary to move it to the effect position. Therefore, the movable body is moved from the origin position to the detection operation position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating motion is performed in a shorter distance than the long initial motion.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation check control process after executing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the initial operation process. Since the operation confirmation control process is an operation control for confirming that the movable body operates normally, after moving each movable body from its origin position to the most distant effect position from the origin position, the origin Operation control is performed to return to the position. In other words, the movement to the production position is the maximum advancing motion. In addition, the operation confirmation control processing for the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B is the same as the performance operation controls 3 and 4 described later, but the operation confirmation control processing for each movable body is not always performed. It does not have to be the same operation as the effect operation control of .

The "effect motion control" is motion control of a movable body in various effects, and includes a plurality of types of motion control with different types and motion modes of target movable bodies. For details, see 1. "Prefetching" is operation control for vertically vibrating the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position before target fluctuation such as advance notice of the movable body is started. 2. "Relevant" is operation control in which the on-board movable body 32A is vertically vibrated between the origin position and the intermediate position and the chance button 631B is vibrated by the vibration motor 635E in the relevant fluctuation such as the movable body advance notice. 3. "Big win notification, round promotion, V promotion" is operation control for moving the underboard movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position and then returning to the origin position in the big win notification, round promotion, V promotion, and the like. 4. "Fanfare right-handed, customer-waiting demonstration effect" is operation control for moving the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position and then returning it to the origin position in fanfare right-handed, customer-waiting demonstration performances, and the like. 5. "Jump game state shift" is operation control for moving the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the jackpot game state. 6. "Normal game state transition" is operation control for moving the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal game state. 7. "Promote operation" is operation control for moving the chance button 631B from the origin position to the presentation position in the win/fail button presentation.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU120, when performing the non-detection time operation control and the detection time operation control as the short initial operation control, the minimum control speed (low speed) that is set in the operation confirmation control Control is performed so that the movable body always operates at a single (constant) operating speed based on. These minimum velocities are the minimum velocities in the operation confirmation control corresponding to the movable bodies, and are not common operation velocities when there are a plurality of movable bodies.

Specifically, since the first movable body and the other second movable body are different in size, weight, motion mode, motion distance, and drive mechanism including a drive motor, even if the same control speed is set, The actual movement speed of the moveable body will vary. Moreover, even when different control speeds are set for the respective movable bodies, the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies differ. In this way, the minimum speed is the operation speed based on the control speed set according to each movable body. It is possible to reliably detect the origin position.

In addition, the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the operation confirmation control is the movable body that operates the movable body in various effects such as the effect operation control (for example, the anticipation effect shown in FIG. 45, the notice effect, the decision effect, and the big hit effect Since it is the same speed as the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the motion control when performing the body effect), the maximum speed in the motion confirmation control is the same speed as the maximum speed in the effect motion control, As long as it can be confirmed whether or not to confirm that the movable body operates normally, the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control and the maximum speed in the effect operation control may not necessarily be the same speed.

(Operation check control (Long initial operation control))
Next, an operation example of operation confirmation control executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 57A to 57J are diagrams showing an operation example of operation confirmation control during cold start processing.

As shown in FIG. 57(A), when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when the power is turned on), the initialization processing (cold start processing) of step S6 by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing is executed, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a predetermined activation preparation display 132SG500 on the display screen of the image display device 5 .

When a power-on designation command is received from the main board 11 after a predetermined time (for example, 3000 ms) has passed since the power was turned on, an initialization notification indicating that the cold start process has been executed starts. At the same time, when a predetermined time (for example, 3000 ms) has passed since the start of the initialization notification, the movable bodies (upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, upper frame movable body 132SG101) is started (see FIG. 57(B)). In the initialization notification, which will be described later, each lamp (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a predetermined initialization notification mode. At the same time, output of a predetermined initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started (see FIG. 61).

In the initial operation control, first, short initial operation control of each movable body (upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, upper frame movable body 132SG101) is performed, and then operation confirmation control is performed. will be Hereinafter, illustration of the operation mode by the short initial operation control will be omitted, and only the operation mode by the operation confirmation control will be described.

In the operation confirmation control, first, after the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the effect position and stops (see FIG. 57(B)), the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the effect position. to stop (see FIG. 57(C)). Next, after the chance button 631B moves downward from the effect position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(D)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the effect position and stops at the origin position. (See FIG. 57(E)). Next, after the lower board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops (see FIG. 57(F)), the frame top movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops. (See FIG. 57(G)). Next, after the upper frame movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the production position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(H)), the lower board movable body 32B moves downward from the production position and returns to the origin position. It stops, and the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 57(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) has passed, the initialization notification ends, and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends.

Thus, in the operation confirmation control, the initial motion of each movable body is started in the order of the chance button 631B, the board top movable body 32A, the bottom board movable body 32B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101. , the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A overlaps part of the initial operation period of the lower-board movable body 32B, and the initial operation control of the upper-frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps part of the initial operation period of the lower-board movable body 32B. It is possible to shorten the body movement confirmation control period.

Also, when the motion control of another movable body is performed during the initial motion control of one movable body, while the one movable body (for example, the chance button 631B, the lower board movable body 32B) is stopped at the production position In addition, other movable bodies (for example, the board movable body 32A, the frame movable body 132SG101) are designed to move to the performance position or the origin position, so the initial motion control of two or more movable bodies is executed in parallel. Even if it does, it is possible to check each movement of the movable body.

In the above, an operation example of operation confirmation control during cold start processing has been described based on FIG. For , the same operation check control as during the cold start process is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the movable body LED of the stopped movable body that is not operating in the operation confirmation control blinks in "red" during the cold start process (during initialization notification), During the hot start process (during restoration), it is "turned off", and during the hot start process (while the variable display is stopped), it is turned on "in a manner corresponding to the background image". On the other hand, the movable body LED of the stopped movable body that is not operating in the effect operation control lights up in a "mode according to the background image". As for the background image (background display), for example, there are background images A and B, and when background image A is displayed and power is cut off and restored, background image A is always displayed, and background image A is always displayed. Lamp emission is performed in a mode corresponding to the image A.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED during the advance operation of moving from the origin position to the production position and the retraction operation of moving from the production position to the origin position is hot during cold start processing (during initialization notification). Lights up in "white" both during the start process (during restoration) and during the hot start process (while the variable display is stopped). On the other hand, the movable body LED of the movable body moving from the origin position to the production position in the production operation control (for example, the operation control of the lower board movable body 32B in the win/fail button production) is in the first light emission mode (for example, seven colors Various colors corresponding to (rainbow color) light up in sequence at predetermined intervals while turning off (rainbow flash mode)), while the movable body moves from the production position to the origin position during the retraction operation. The LEDs are lit in a second light emission mode (for example, a smooth rainbow mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) sequentially emit light at predetermined intervals).

In other words, while the action mode of each movable body is common to both the action confirmation control and the performance action control, the movable body LED of each movable body has the same mode (white lighting ), (the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode are the same), and in the effect operation control, the light is emitted in different modes (rainbow flash and smooth rainbow) in the advancing action and the retreating action (the first light emission mode and the second light emitting mode), it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 1 that can easily determine which of the operation confirmation control and the performance operation control is being performed. In particular, in the operation confirmation control, unlike the rainbow flash and the smooth rainbow, the emission color and lighting mode do not always change, so the operation of the movable body can be easily confirmed.

In FIG. 56B, rainbow flash and smooth rainbow are described as examples of the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode of the movable body LED in the effect operation control, but these light emission modes depend on the effect type. A different light emission mode may be used.

In addition, since the light emission brightness in the operation confirmation control is lower than the light emission brightness in the effect operation control, the power consumption at the time of turning on the power is suppressed, the load on the pachinko game machine 1 is reduced, and the brightness of the movable body LED is reduced. is set to a low luminance, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable body from becoming difficult to check due to glare.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56B, during cold start processing (during initialization notification) in operation check control, predetermined initialization notification sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R over an initialization notification period. The predetermined initialization notification sound is a sound indicating that the initialization notification is being executed, and is different from the effect sound outputted in other control of the effect operation. Also, during the hot start process (during restoration or during suspension of variable display), no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (no sound).

Further, the menu/sound volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 (see FIG. 55 (G3)) is displayed during the operation valid period in which the menu display and the sound volume/light intensity adjustment operation are effectively accepted, and the menu/sound volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed. By operating the selection button 132SG35 when the display 132SG480 is displayed, a predetermined menu screen (not shown) can be displayed, the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light intensity (brightness) of various lamps 9a to 9g can be displayed. ) can be adjusted.

In the present embodiment, during the execution period of operation check control (during cold start processing or hot start processing), control is not performed during the effective period of operation for menu display and volume/light intensity adjustment. Even if the adjustment operation is performed, the light amount of the various lamps 9a to 9g does not change, and the light emission at the luminance being executed is continued. More specifically, in operation confirmation control, it is not possible to adjust the brightness of the movable body that is operating while emitting light in "low brightness" and "white" (initial emphasis mode).

In addition, during the hot start process, it may be possible to adjust the sound volume and the amount of light during the execution period of the operation confirmation control. become.

In addition, in the present embodiment, menu display and volume/light intensity adjustment cannot be performed during the execution period of operation confirmation control, but menu/sound volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed after the end of operation confirmation control. Thus, when the selection button 132SG35 is operated in the operation confirmation control, it is possible to confirm whether or not the brightness adjustment has been performed by the operation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, when a jackpot start designation command, a big winning opening start designation command, or the like is received, a display layer lower than the restoration display 132SG510 , the display of the fanfare effect and the round effect is started, and when the startup preparation display 132SG500 is hidden, the display of the fanfare effect and the round effect may be visible from the middle in the lower layer. .

In addition, when the jackpot start designation command or the big winning opening designation command is received during the display period of the startup preparation display 132SG500, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed until the next command (command related to the start of the round game) is received. You may make it

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 58 to 60, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a game standby state with the variable display stopped, when the variable display is being executed, and when a jackpot game is being executed. Power outages may occur at certain times. Although not shown in particular detail, the pachinko machine 1 may be started by cold start processing or hot start processing at any timing when power failure occurs, but each movable The mode of motion of the body, the mode of light emission of each movable body LED, the mode of background sound, and the like may differ.

[Initial operation control at cold start and hot start]
Next, a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start and a case where it is activated by hot start will be described. Note that the hot start will be described assuming that the game state is the normal state.

Mode 1 (initial operation control at cold start)
As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 is started on the image display device 5 from the timing of the startup. When 3 seconds (3000ms) elapses from the start of the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start lighting, and the effect control CPU 120 Based on the reception of the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer-waiting demonstration designation command from the CPU 103, the reception timing of these power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer-waiting demonstration designation command. Empty frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, chance button LED 9g, and on-frame movable body LED 9f start to emit light in an initialization notification mode, respectively, and initialization is performed from speakers 8L and 8R. The output of the notification sound is started.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in the characteristic part 132SG are turned on by the effect control CPU 120 as light emission in the initialization notification. After the light is turned off for one second from the timing of receiving the designation command, the background image designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command, red lighting (light emission) and turning off are repeatedly executed.

Two seconds (2000 ms) after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the image display device 5 displays the activation preparation display 132SG500. is completed, and the display of the background image during variable display stop according to the normal state is started in place of the activation preparation display 132SG500. After that, as the initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 is started.

First, 4 seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed (6 seconds (6000 ms) after the timing of receiving the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command), a chance is generated. When the movement of the button 631B from the origin position to the effect position is started, the chance button LED 9g starts to emit light (white lighting) in the initial emphasized mode from the start timing of the movement of the button 631B. When the movement of the chance button 631B to the performance position is completed, the chance button 631 remains at the performance position for a predetermined period. Then, after the stop for the predetermined period, a withdrawal operation from the effect position of the chance button 631B to the origin position is executed. The light emission of the chance button LED 9g in the initial emphasis mode ends at the end timing of the retraction operation of the chance button 631, and returns to the light emission in the initialization notification mode (see FIGS. 63A to 63C).

At the end timing of the advancing motion of the chance button 631B, the advancing motion from the origin position of the on-board movable body 32A to the effect position is started. When the movement of the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position is started, the on-board movable body LED 9d starts emitting light (white lighting) in the initial emphasized mode from the start timing of the advancing movement. After stopping for the predetermined period of time, a retraction operation of the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position is executed. It should be noted that the light emission of the on-board movable body LED 9d in the initial emphasizing mode ends at the end timing of the withdrawal operation of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to the light emission in the initialization notification mode.

At the end timing of the withdrawal operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the movement of the lower-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position is started. When the movement of the under-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position is started, the under-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light (white lighting) in an initial emphasized mode from the start timing of the advancing movement. Then, after the stop for the predetermined period, the retraction operation of the under-board movable body 32B from the performance position to the origin position is executed. The light emission of the under-board movable body LED 9e in the initial emphasizing mode ends at the end timing of the retraction operation of the under-board movable body 32B, and returns to the light emission in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, during the stop period at the production position of the board lower movable body 32B, along with the movement of the frame movable body 132SG101 from the origin position to the production position and the withdrawal movement from the production position to the origin position, the frame movable body LED 9f Light emission (white lighting) in the initial emphasis mode is executed. The light emission of the frame movable body LED 9f in the initial emphasizing mode ends at the end timing of the retraction operation of the frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to the light emission in the initialization notification mode.

It should be noted that the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 at the time of cold start in the characteristic portion 132SG is 20 minutes from the start of the advance operation of the chance button 631B. It ends when seconds (20000ms) have passed. Furthermore, after completion of the operation (confirmation operation) of these board top movable body 32A, bottom board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, frame top movable body 132SG101, the top board movable body 32A, bottom board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, when 4 seconds (4000 ms) have passed since the completion timing of the operation (confirmation operation) of the upper frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, When the chance button LED 9g emits light in the initialization notification mode and the output of initialization notification sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R ends, all initial operation control ends. In other words, the initial operation control at the cold start in this characteristic portion 132SG is control that is executed over 30 seconds (30000 ms).

Here, a case will be described in which a starting prize is generated after the initial operation control, and a variable display is started in which the advance notice of the movable body is executed based on the starting prize. First, as shown in FIG. 61, after the initial operation control of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, and the lower board movable body 9d. The movable body LED 9e and the frame upper movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (for example, white light). there is Also, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state of stopping sound output.

In the above state, when the starting prize is generated and the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the background image in the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the speakers 8L, 8R Output of BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is started.

During the execution period of the movable body announcement, the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable body effect) corresponding to the movable body announcement. Further, the reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position of the on-board movable body 32A is executed a plurality of times, and the chance button 631B is continuously vibrated. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in accordance with the advance notice of the movable body, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the advance notice of the movable body. A sound (movable object warning sound) is output.

In the example shown in FIG. 61, as the advance notice of the movable body, an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the advance notice of the movable body is displayed on the image display device 5. , vibration of the chance button 631B, output of sound corresponding to the notice of the movable body from the speakers 8L and 8R (prediction sound of the movable body), frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, frame Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the upper movable body LED 9f emits light in accordance with the movable body notice, the present invention is not limited to this. Only the display of the effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the position and the reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position of the on-board movable body 32A may be executed. In addition to the display of an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the advance notice of the movable body on the image display device 5 and the reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position of the on-board movable body 32A as the advance notice of the movable body, , vibration of chance button 631B, output of sound corresponding to movable body notice (movable body notice sound) from speakers 8L and 8R, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body One or more may be executed from light emission in a mode according to the advance notice of the movable body of the LED 9f.

Next, a description will be given of a case where a starting prize is generated during initial motion control, and a variable display is started in which the advance notice of the movable body is executed based on the starting prize. First, as shown in FIG. 62, when a start winning occurs during the initial motion control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains at the performance position), the start winning occurs. Variable display of the special design and decoration design is started from the timing. At this time, the background image in the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and BGM output corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is started from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After the start of the variable display, the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A is continuously executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101 are controlled. Initial motion control is executed.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body notice is reached during the initial operation control period of the board top movable body 32A and the board bottom movable body 32B, the movable body effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body notice. While the image is displayed, the initial motion control of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 is continuously executed (see FIGS. 63(D) to (E)).

In addition, during the operation period of each movable body, the light emitting modes of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are displayed on the image display device 5. According to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) or the initial emphasis mode of each movable body, light is not emitted in the light emission mode according to the advance notice of the movable body.

Then, when the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body in the variable display ends and the movement of all the movable bodies ends, it should be executed during the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body from the timing when the movement ends. The vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position and the vibration of the chance button 631B are executed (FIGS. 63(F)-(J) and FIGS. 64(K)-( L)). During the vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are activated in accordance with the advance notice of the movable body. Light emission is executed, but BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a sound corresponding to the movable object notification (movable object notification sound) is output. There is no

(Initial operation control at hot start)
As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start, the image display device 5 starts displaying the activation preparation display 132SG500 from the activation timing. When 3 seconds (3000 ms) have passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 receives a power failure recovery designation command, a first game state background designation command, and a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103. Frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, chance button LED 9g, and on-frame movable body LED 9f are activated from the reception timing of these power failure recovery designation command, first game state background designation command, and customer waiting demonstration designation command. In each case, light emission is started in a manner corresponding to the background image in the normal state. No sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing of receiving the power failure restoration designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command (silence).

It should be noted that the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in the characteristic portion 132SG are light emission corresponding to the background image in the normal state, and the effect control CPU 120 After receiving the power failure restoration designation command, the background image designation command, and the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the light is extinguished for one second, and then the light is emitted in a light emission color (for example, white) corresponding to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is hot start in the time saving state (low probability high base state) and probability variation state (high probability high base state), light emission according to the background image of these time saving state and probability variation state , the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g may emit light in different colors and patterns than in the normal state. .

Then, two seconds (2000 ms) after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 is completed, and the display of the background image during variable display stop according to the normal state is started in place of the activation preparation display 132SG500. After that, as the initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 is started.

First, 4 seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed (6 seconds (6000 ms) after the timing of receiving the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command), a chance is generated. When the movement of the button 631B from the origin position to the effect position is started, the chance button LED 9g starts to emit light (white lighting) in the initial emphasized mode from the start timing of the movement of the button 631B. When the movement of the chance button 631B to the performance position is completed, the chance button 631 remains at the performance position for a predetermined period. Then, after the stop for the predetermined period, a withdrawal operation from the effect position of the chance button 631B to the origin position is executed. The light emission of the chance button LED 9g in the initial emphasized mode ends at the end timing of the retreat operation of the chance button 631, and the chance button LED 9g changes to light emission in the default mode (for example, white light emission).

At the end timing of the advancing motion of the chance button 631B, the advancing motion from the origin position of the on-board movable body 32A to the effect position is started. When the movement of the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position is started, the on-board movable body LED 9d starts emitting light (white lighting) in the initial emphasized mode from the start timing of the advancing movement. After stopping for the predetermined period of time, a retraction operation of the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position is executed. The light emission of the on-board movable body LED 9d in the initial emphasizing mode ends at the end timing of the withdrawal operation of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to light emission in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

At the end timing of the withdrawal operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the movement of the lower-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position is started. When the movement of the under-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position is started, the under-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light (white lighting) in an initial emphasized mode from the start timing of the advancing movement. Then, after the stop for the predetermined period, the retraction operation of the under-board movable body 32B from the performance position to the origin position is executed. The emission of the under-board movable body LED 9e in the initial emphasizing mode ends at the end timing of the retraction operation of the under-board movable body 32B, and returns to the light emission in the mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, during the stop period at the production position of the board lower movable body 32B, along with the movement of the frame movable body 132SG101 from the origin position to the production position and the withdrawal movement from the production position to the origin position, the frame movable body LED 9f Light emission (white lighting) in the initial emphasis mode is executed. The light emission of the frame movable body LED 9f in the initial emphasized mode ends at the end timing of the retraction operation of the frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to light emission in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

It should be noted that the operation (confirmation operation) of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 at the time of hot start in this characteristic portion 132SG is 20 seconds from the start of the advancing motion of the chance button 631B. It ends when (20000ms) has passed. When the pachinko machine 1 is activated by hot start, unlike the case of activation by cold start, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are displayed. Light emission in the form of initialization notification by , and output of initialization notification sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the initial motion control at the hot start in the characteristic portion 132SG is performed over 26 seconds by the upper-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631, the upper-frame The control is such that the operation (confirmation operation) of the movable body 132SG101 is executed.

Here, a case will be described in which a starting prize is generated after the initial operation control, and a variable display is started in which the advance notice of the movable body is executed based on the starting prize. First, as shown in FIG. 65, after the initial operation control of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, and the lower board movable body 9d. The movable body LED 9e and the frame upper movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (for example, white light). there is In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state where sound output is stopped (no sound).

In the above state, when the starting prize is generated and the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the background image in the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the speakers 8L, 8R Output of BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is started.

During the execution period of the movable body announcement, the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable body effect) corresponding to the movable body announcement. Further, the reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position of the on-board movable body 32A is executed a plurality of times, and the chance button 631B is continuously vibrated. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in accordance with the advance notice of the movable body, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the advance notice of the movable body. A sound (movable object warning sound) is output.

Next, a description will be given of a case where a starting prize is generated during initial motion control, and a variable display is started in which the advance notice of the movable body is executed based on the starting prize. First, as shown in FIG. 66, when a starting prize occurs during the initial motion control of the board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the board movable body 32A remains at the performance position), the starting prize occurs. Variable display of the special design and decoration design is started from the timing. At this time, the background image in the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and BGM output corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is started from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After the start of the variable display, the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A is continuously executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101 are controlled. Initial motion control is executed.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body notice is reached during the initial operation control period of the board top movable body 32A and the board bottom movable body 32B, the movable body effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body notice. While the image is displayed, the initial operation control of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 is continuously executed.

In addition, during the operation period of each movable body, the light emitting modes of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are displayed on the image display device 5. According to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) or the initial emphasis mode of each movable body, light is not emitted in the light emission mode according to the advance notice of the movable body.

Then, when the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body in the variable display ends and the motion of all the movable bodies ends (the initial motion control ends), the notice of the movable body is normally started from the timing when the motion ends. The vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which should have been executed during the execution period, are executed. During the vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are activated in accordance with the advance notice of the movable body. Light emission is executed, but BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a sound corresponding to the movable object notification (movable object notification sound) is output. There is no

As described above, in this characteristic portion 132SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start, the board top movable body 32A (and the board bottom movable body 32B, the frame top movable body 132SG101) , chance button 631B) are operated as initial operation control. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a starting prize is generated during the confirmation operation of each movable body during initial operation control, and a variable display for executing a movable body notice based on the starting prize starts. In this case, if the execution period of the movable body notice and the period of the confirmation action overlap, the movement of the on-board movable body 32A and the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed as the effect action of the movable body notice. Regulates the sound output. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a hot start, a start prize is generated during the confirmation operation, and a variable display for executing a movable body notice is started based on the start win, the movable body notice is produced. As for the operation, only the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is restricted.

By doing so, when the movable body notice is executed by the variable display that is started during the confirmation operation of each movable body under initial motion control, the on-board movable body 32A is displayed as the effect action of the movable body notice. While the initial motion control is not hindered by the motion, the player is notified that the movable body notice has been executed by displaying the movable body effect on the image display device 5, each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body The LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the upper-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g) can be lit up in accordance with the movable body notice.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 66, in this characterizing section 132SG, the pachinko game machine 1 in which an electrical stage occurs during the execution of the variable display including the execution of the advance notice of the movable body is started by hot start, and after the hot start, In the case where the period for executing the advance notice of the movable body comes during the initial movement of each movable body, the action of the on-board movable body 32A as the advance notice of the movable body is not executed during the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 in which the electric stage occurred during the execution of the variable display including the winning effect (that is, the variable display of the big win) is started by hot start, and the hot start is performed. When the execution period of the determined effect is reached during the initial motion of each movable body after the start, the operation of the lower board movable body 32B and the determined effect of the lower board movable body LED 9e are performed as the determined effect during the execution period of the determined effect. You may restrict|limit light emission (rainbow flash) in the aspect according to. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether the under-board movable body 32B is operating as an initial motion or is operating as a final effect, depending on the light emission mode of the under-board movable body LED 9e.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 132SG, as shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 executes the origin placement control process at the start timing of the variable display, thereby exemplifying the mode in which each movable body is placed at the respective origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a starting prize is generated during the initial motion of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and a variable display based on the starting prize is started, The initial motion of each movable body may be executed with priority over the motion of each movable body to the origin position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the initial motion of each movable body from being interrupted by the motion to the origin position of each movable body.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, the characterizing section 132SG has a form in which each movable body is placed at its respective origin position by the production control CPU 120 executing the origin placement control process at the start timing of the customer waiting demonstration production. Although this is an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and after starting winning occurs during the initial motion of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started and variable display based on the starting winning starts. When the variable display ends during the initial operation period and the customer waiting demonstration effect is started in accordance with the end of the variable display, the customer waiting demonstration effect of each movable body is preferred to the movement to the origin position of each movable body. , may be preferentially executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operation of the customer waiting demonstration effect of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to the origin position.

(Initial motion control modification 1)
In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, as shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, and the variable display for executing the movable object announcement during the operation of the movable object as the initial operation control is started. In this case, if the execution period of the movable body announcement overlaps with the movement period of the movable body, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body announcement, and the initial movement control ends. After that, the operation of the target movable body of the movable body notice (on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B in case of this characteristic part 132SG), frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, frame Although an example has been exemplified in which the upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body notice, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification shown in FIG. Even if the variable display for executing the advance notice of the movable body is started during the movement of the movable body as the initial action control, if the execution period of the notice of the movable body is after the end of the movement of each movable body, the movable body The target movable bodies (on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B) may be operated during the execution period of the notice.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the movable body notice, the control period of the initial operation (operation control of each movable body, light emission of each LED in the initialization notification mode, output of initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R) ends. In this case, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, from the timing when the control of the initial motion ends to the timing when the advance notice of the movable body ends, as shown in FIG. The chance button LED 9g may be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the advance notice of the movable body, and sound may be output in accordance with the advance notice of the movable body from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As described above, during the control period of the initial operation, the motion control of each movable body has been completed, but the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-top movable body LED 9d, the board-bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g. When the movable body announcement is executed while the light emission corresponding to the initialization notification mode and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R continue, the on-board movable body 32A corresponding to the movable body announcement While the operation of the chance button 631B is executed, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light according to the movable body announcement mode, By not outputting the sound corresponding to the advance notice of the movable body from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the advance notice of the movable body from being lowered.

(Initial motion control modification 2)
In addition, in the present characteristic part 132SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, and during the checking operation of each movable body as initial operation control, a movable body announcement is executed to suggest that the variable display result will be a big hit. When the variable display is started, the operation of the movable body (on-board movable body 32A, chance button 631B), display of movable body effect on image display device 5, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, and under-board Light emission from the movable body LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R have been described. , When it is decided to execute the advance notice of the movable body due to the occurrence of multiple variable displays during the confirmation operation of each movable body as the initial action control, the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body If it overlaps with the confirmation operation period or the initial operation control period, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body, and the target movable body (on-board movable body 32A and Chance button 631B) operation, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to advance notice of movable body, speakers 8L, 8R It is only necessary to prevent sound output in a mode corresponding to the advance notice of the movable body from the beginning. Further, when the variable display to be the target of the pre-read movable body notice is executed after the initial action control is completed, the movable body effect image on the image display device 5 is displayed during the execution period of the movable body notice during the variable display. Display, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light according to the notice of the movable body, and from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the notice of the movable body It is only necessary to execute sound output in the same manner.

By doing so, even if the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body comes during the confirming operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B as the advance notice of the movable body is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by excessively operating the on-board movable body 32A or the chance button 631B after the initial motion control is finished.

(Initial motion control modification 3)
In addition, in this characterizing portion 132SG, as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, a mode is exemplified in which the on-board movable body 32A can be moved between the origin position and the intermediate position to execute a movable body announcement. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, after the movable body notice (first movable body notice), the movable body is displayed again. It is possible to execute the notice of the movable body (second notice of the movable body), and the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit differs according to the number of times the notice of the movable body is executed during the variable display (for example, only the notice of the first movable body is executed The ratio of the variable table result to be a big hit is higher when the second movable body notice is executed in addition to the first movable body notice than when the first movable body notice is executed.

In addition, in the case where it is possible to execute a plurality of advance notices of the movable body (the first notice of the movable body and the second notice of the movable body) during the variable display, as shown in FIG. When the starting prize is generated during the period and the variable display for performing the first notice of the movable body and the second notice of the movable body is started based on the winning of the start, the execution period of the first notice of the movable body is the execution period of the initial operation control. , the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first advance notice of the movable body may be executed (re-executed the first advance notice of the movable body) after the end of the initial operation control. However, if the second advance notice of the movable body has already started during the re-execution period of the first notice of the movable body, as shown in FIG. The first movable body advance notice may not be re-executed.

In this way, when the second advance notice of the movable body is already being executed during the re-execution period of the first advance notice of the movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A by the second advance notice of the movable body is prioritized as the first notice of the movable body. Since the movement of the board movable body 32A is not executed again, the movement of the board movable body 32A by the second movable body notice is hindered by the movement of the board movable body 32A by the first movable body notice. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the production effect of.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 69, the form in which the first notice of the movable body and the notice of the second movable body can be executed during the variable display of 1 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The operation modes of the on-board movable body 32A as the first and second movable body notices are the same (for example, the first and second movable body notices both have the on-board movable body 32A at the origin position). and an intermediate position), or the operation mode of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice and the second movable body notice is different (for example, the first While the 1st movable body notice is an effect that the on-board movable body 32A moves multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, the second movable body is an effect that the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the effect position. ) may be used to produce an effect that operates multiple times.

(Initial motion control modification 4)
In addition, as shown in FIG. 69, in the case where it is possible to execute a plurality of times of movable object announcement (first movable object announcement and second movable object announcement) during variable display, as a modification shown in FIG. Secondly, when a start prize is generated during the initial motion control and the variable display for performing the first notice of the movable body and the second notice of the movable body is started based on the prize of the start, the execution period of the first notice of the movable body is set to the initial period. If it overlaps with the execution period of motion control, control is performed so that the motion of the on-board movable body 32A as the first notice of the movable body is not executed, and only the second notice of the movable body after the initial motion control is executed. may be controlled to Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, when a starting prize is generated after the initial motion control and the variable display for performing the first and second movable body advance notices is started based on the start prize, that is, when the variable display is started. When the movement of the board movable body 32A is executed as the first movable body notice and the second movable body notice during the display, the movement of the board movable body 32A occurs due to the occurrence of step-out or the like during the execution period of the first movable body notice. is stopped on the way, control may be performed so that the movement of the on-board movable body 32A is started as the second movable body notice during the execution period of the second movable body notice.

In this way, even if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first advance notice of the movable body does not end normally, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second advance notice of the next movable body. is executed, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A can be retried.

(Initial motion control modification 5)
Further, in FIG. 69, when a starting prize is generated during the initial operation control and the variable display for performing the first movable body notice and the second movable body notice is started based on the start prize, the first movable body notice is started. overlaps with the execution period of the initial motion control, the motion of the on-board movable body 32A as the notice of the first movable body can be executed after the initial motion control ends, while the first movable body In the above example, when the re-execution period of the advance notice of the body is within the execution period of the second advance notice of the movable body, the execution of the second advance notice of the movable body is given priority and the first advance notice of the movable body is not re-executed. As a modification, as shown in FIG. 72, when the execution period of the second advance notice of the movable body comes during the re-execution period of the first notice of the movable body, the second advance notice of the movable body is executed. At the start timing of the execution period, the re-execution of the first advance notice of the movable body may be interrupted, and thereafter the on-board movable body 32A may be operated as the second advance notice of the movable body.

In this way, when the execution period of the second movable body notice comes during the operation of the board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice, the operation of the board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice is interrupted to start the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second advance notice of the movable body. It is possible to prevent the performance effect from being lowered due to the obstruction of the action of 32A.

(Initial motion control modification 6)
In addition, in the characteristic portion 132SG, the board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and the effect position as the initial motion control, while the board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and the intermediate position as the effect motion of the movable body advance notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the on-board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial motion control and the performance motion of the movable body advance notice. You may make it operate|move by.

Further, in the case of moving the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the effect position in both the initial motion control and the effect motion of the movable body advance notice, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial motion, While the initial motion is continuously executed until the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG124 and the origin position sensor 132SG123, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the effect motion of the movable body advance notice, Regardless of whether or not the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be stopped according to process data for advance notice of the movable body. .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 73(A) and 73(B) as a modified example, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial operation control, the effect control CPU 120 controls the position on the board by the origin position sensor. Based on the fact that the movable body 32A is detected, the drive motor 132SG122 is driven forward to rotate the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over the first period (1000 ms). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 stops forward rotation driving of the drive motor 132SG122 on condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG124 (that the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the effect position). Let Then, based on the effect position sensor 132SG124 detecting the on-board movable body 32A, the drive motor 132SG122 is reversely driven to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. Further, the reverse driving of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped under the condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123 (that the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the origin position).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 73(B), for example, during the movement of the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position, step-out or the like occurs, and the on-board movable body 32A shifts between the origin position and the performance position. If the game stops in between, the effect control CPU 120 allows the forward rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 to continue beyond the first period because the effect position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A. At this time, if the effect position sensor 132SG124 has not detected the on-board movable body 32A for a predetermined period (a period longer than the first period after starting the initial action control), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the on-board movable body 32A is not detected. It is determined that there is an operation error in the body 32A, and the drive motor 132SG122 is reversely driven from the timing of the determination of the operation error, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms. When the origin position sensor 132SG123 detects the on-board movable body 32A, the driving of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 74A and 74B, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the movable body advance notice effect operation, the effect control CPU 120 operates based on the movable body advance notice process data. By driving the driving motor 132SG122 in the normal direction, the on-board movable body 32A is moved toward the presentation position over a second period longer than the first period. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the effect position by stopping forward rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body advance notice. At the same time, the effect position sensor 132SG124 detects the on-board movable body 32A. Then, the performance control CPU 120 reversely drives the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the advance notice of the movable body in a state where the board movable body 32A is stopped at the performance position, thereby moving the board movable body 32A to the origin position. move towards. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the origin position by stopping the reverse driving of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body advance notice. At the same time, the origin position sensor 132SG123 detects the on-board movable body 32A.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74(B), for example, during the operation of the board movable body 32A toward the performance position, a step-out or the like occurs, causing the board movable body 32A to move between the origin position and the performance position. If it stops in between, the effect control CPU 120 continues the normal rotation drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body announcement until the timing when the second period elapses. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG124 at the end timing of the second period. stop the rotation drive.

When the effect position sensor 132SG124 has not detected the on-board movable body 32A for a predetermined period of time (a period longer than the second period after starting the initial action control), the effect control CPU 120 detects the on-board movable body. 32A is determined to be an operation error, and the drive motor 132SG122 is reversely driven from the timing of the determination of the operation error, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms. When the origin position sensor 132SG123 detects the on-board movable body 32A, the driving of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

In this way, when the movable body notice is executed during the game after the initial motion control is finished, the initial motion control is performed even if the board movable body 32A corresponding to the movable body notice is not normally performed. Since the motion of the on-board movable body 32A as the (confirmation motion) is not executed, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the rendering effect of the movable body advance notice that has not been performed normally.

(Initial motion control modification 7)
Further, in the above-described modification 6, when the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the on-board movable body 32A by the effect position sensor 132SG124 as the initial operation control, the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error of the on-board movable body 32A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation control, the on-board movable body 32A will be displayed during the movable body notice execution period during variable display. Effect display on image display device 5 without operating 32A, lighting of LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), speaker 8L , 8R may perform only the sound output in response to the notice of the movable body.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75 as a seventh modification, the effect control CPU 120 can move the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the effect position over 1000 ms as the initial operation control. , the on-board movable body 32A can move from the performance position to the origin position over 2000 ms.

Furthermore, when the on-board movable body 32A stops between the performance position and the origin position as the initial motion control, the performance control CPU 120 once determines that there is a motion error, and then executes the initial motion control a plurality of times. Assume that it is executable.

Here, if the effect control CPU 120 performs the initial motion control four times and makes an error determination in all cases, the fourth initial motion control stores the on-board movable body 32A as the motion limited movable body (dead end judgment). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the effect position over 3000 ms as special initial operation control, and then moves the on-board movable body 32A to the origin position over 6000 ms. operate toward

After that, when a starting prize is generated and a variable display for executing a movable body advance notice is started based on the starting prize, the effect control CPU 120 stores the on-board movable body 32A as an operation limited movable body. Based on this, in the movable body notice execution period, without operating the on-board movable body 32A, the display of the effect on the image display device 5, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body Only the lighting of the LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g) and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body notice should be executed.

As described above, while the on-board movable body 32A that has been determined to be dead end is not operated as a movable body advance notice, the display of the effect on the image display device 5, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body By turning on the body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g), and by executing the sound output according to the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the board movable body 32A is operated as the movable body notice. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the rendering effect of the advance notice of the movable body while preventing the malfunction from occurring.

It should be noted that the configurations described in Modifications 1 to 7 may be added to the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment. Alternatively, a part of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment may be changed to at least one of the modifications 1-7. In other words, one of the plurality of modifications 1 to 7, or a combination of a plurality of them, can be added to or changed in the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment.

Mode 2 (Initial motion control modified example 8)
Further, in the characterizing section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 16, when the variable display is not executed, the CPU 103 outputs a customer waiting demonstration designation command to the effect control board 12, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display a customer waiting state. Although the mode in which the demonstration effect is executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 8, as shown in FIGS. When the pachinko game machine 1 is started, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start in a low probability/low base state (normal state), and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a high base state (time saving state), the pachinko game is played. While the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command from the CPU 103 3000 ms after the start of the machine 1, the customer waiting demonstration production itself may be started after the control period of the initial operation ends.

By doing so, the image of the customer waiting demonstration effect (demonstration shown in FIGS. 76, 77, and 78) displayed on the image display device 5 by the movable body (on-board movable body 32A) that operates as the initial operation control. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the image of the customer waiting demonstration effect from being lowered due to obstruction of the movie).

76, 77, and 78 exemplified a mode in which the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each movable body The period from the end of the initial motion to the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect is after 30 seconds, which is the period required for the initial motion of each movable body, has passed, so that the initial motion of each movable body and the customer waiting demo effect are performed. A sufficient period may be provided between and to prevent obstruction of the visibility of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

Furthermore, the period from the end of the initial motion of each movable body to the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect is set to be different between when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start and when it is started by hot start. good too. It should be noted that depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by cold start or by hot start, the period from the completion of the initial motion of each movable body to the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect may be different. However, by executing the customer waiting demonstration effect after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, it is possible to prevent the customer waiting demonstration effect from being hindered by the movable body acting as the initial motion. good.

(Initial motion control modified example 9)
Further, in the modified example described above, as shown in FIG. 75, when the effect control CPU 120 performs the dead end determination of the on-board movable body 32A, the on-board movable body 32A is not operated as a movable body notice, Display of effects on the image display device 5, lighting of LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), notice of movable body from speakers 8L and 8R However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a ninth modification shown in FIG. When the determination is made, when the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed after the special initial motion is finished, the on-board movable body 32A is not operated, while the image display device 5 displays the effect corresponding to the customer waiting demo effect. , the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) may be lit according to the customer waiting demonstration effect.

In this way, in a situation where the on-board movable body 32A does not operate normally, the customer-waiting demonstration can be performed while preventing the on-board movable body 32A from being forced to operate as a customer-waiting demonstration. It is possible to encourage the deterioration of the performance effect of the performance.

Form 3 (power outage just before the end of the big hit fluctuation)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the big hit variation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the big hit variation.

As shown in FIG. 80, after the variable display based on the big hit variation pattern is started, the combination of the big hit fixed symbols is stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and just before the variable display ends (for example, the big hit After the fixed symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display is resumed and the re-lottery effect is executed, or after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the next variable display. Approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period until the start of the pachinko game machine 1, starts up with a hot start after a power failure occurs (when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). ), the variable display of the big win is restarted, but the variable display ends immediately, and the control of the big win game state is started.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after receiving the power failure recovery designation command and the pattern confirmation command transmitted based on the restoration of the CPU 103, the jackpot start designation command is issued. A fanfare effect is started based on the reception by the effect control CPU 120 .

Specifically, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable LED 9d, on-board movable LED 9e, on-frame movable Light emission from the body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g and the output of the background sound (BGM) are restricted. That is, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are turned off, and the background sound (BGM) is not output.

After that, when a jackpot start designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g correspond to the fanfare production (introduction part). Along with the light emission, output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the fanfare effect (introductory part) is started. In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000ms) has passed since the jackpot start designation command is received, the display of the activation preparation display 132SG500 is ended, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) is started. . Note that the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introductory part) is displayed on a black screen until a predetermined time (for example, 1500 ms) elapses from the start.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has passed since the power failure restoration designation command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial motion of each movable body is finished, the fanfare effect (introduction part) is ended, and the fanfare effect (right-hand hitting notification part) is started.

In the right hitting notification part in the fanfare effect, as shown in FIGS. 52(F7) and (F8), right hitting promotion displays 132SG431 and 132SG432 are displayed to prompt the player to hit the game ball into the right game area. Since the hitting operation promotion effect is performed, if the initial motion of the movable body is executed when the right-hand hitting notification part is started, the movable body that moves according to the initial motion will be displayed in the fanfare effect such as the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG431. The visibility of the right-handed informing part is obstructed, and there is a risk that the player will suffer a disadvantage without performing the right-handed operation.

In addition, in the right-handed notification part in the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 52 (F7), when the right-handed promotion display 132SG431 is displayed, the movable body production that the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the production position. is executed, if the initial motion of the movable body is being executed when the right-hand hitting notification part is started, it is difficult to determine whether the movable body is moving with the initial motion or the right-hand hitting operation promotion effect. Become.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect, a fanfare effect (right-handed notification) accompanied by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is performed. Since the movable body is controlled so that the initial movement ends before the start of the part), the visibility of the right-handed notification part in the fanfare production is hindered by the movable body that performs the initial movement, and the initial movement and It is possible to prevent difficulty in determining in which of the right-handed operation promotion performances the player is operating.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when power failure occurs immediately before execution of the fanfare effect, the period from the start of the fanfare effect to the start of the right-handed promotion effect (FIG. 52 (F1) to (F6 ))), the introduction part period of the fanfare effect and the initial movement period are set so that the initial movement of the movable body is completed within the period.

In addition, in the introductory part of the fanfare production, when notifying which one of a plurality of types of jackpots A to E is a jackpot, the jackpot type display 132SG421 corresponding to the jackpot type to be controlled and the jackpot type display 132SG421 are displayed. It is possible to display the introduction display 132SG422 before the display of the big hit type before it is displayed, and in the operation check control, the initial operation is performed before the display of the big hit type display 132SG421 is performed in FIG. 52 (F6). By the end of, even if the operation confirmation control is performed during the fanfare production, it is possible to grasp which type of jackpot will be controlled.

Further, when the fanfare effect is executed, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are in the initial operation, emit light in an initial emphasizing mode (white lighting). On-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, frame-on movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of movable bodies that are not operating in operation confirmation control emit light corresponding to fanfare production (introduction part) (for example, 3R big hit is blue-based color, 10R big hit is red-based color, etc.), but the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare production (introduction part). Therefore, even during the fanfare effect, it is possible to indicate that the movable body is under operation confirmation control.

Further, when the first movable body is moved by the initial action, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial emphasizing mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits a fanfare effect. By emitting light in a light emission mode corresponding to (introductory part), it is possible to indicate that the movable body is in the initial motion even during the fanfare production.

Further, when the fanfare effect is executed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light with the first luminance in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare effect, while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, The lower board movable body LED 9e and the upper frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second luminance (low luminance) lower than the first luminance (high luminance), thereby suppressing power consumption and lightening the load when the power is turned on. is possible.

From the time the power is turned on until the initial operation of all the movable bodies is completed (until the last movable body to be initialized is placed at the origin position), the duty ratio of all the movable body LEDs is reduced or set to a predetermined value. The duty ratio may be reduced until the time expires.

Further, when the first movable body is operated by the initial motion, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial emphasizing mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial emphasizing mode. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the moving movable body by the action confirmation control.

In addition, the movable body LED of the movable body during the initial movement has a common initial emphasis mode (white lighting ), the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the performance operation control emits light differently when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when the movable body retreats from the performance position to the origin position. It is possible to emit light in various ways. Specifically, during the advance operation, the movable body LED is in the first mode (for example, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the attacker LED 9c, the movable body LEDs 9d, 9e, etc.), and at a predetermined cycle from one side to the other side. The movable body LED may emit light in a second mode (for example, a flash mode in which it blinks at a fast cycle (30 ms, etc.)) when retreating. By doing so, it is possible to easily determine which of the operation confirmation control and the effect operation control is being performed by the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) and the mode corresponding to the effect.

In addition, in the movable body effect executed in the right-handed notification part in the fanfare effect, the on-board movable body 32A operates in the same motion mode as the initial motion (down from the origin position to the effect position), and in the initial motion, the movable body 32A The body LED emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and in the movable body production, it emits light in a mode different from the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) and in a mode corresponding to the right-handed notification part, and can be moved by the initial action. The sound output is limited when the body moves, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting notification part is output in the movable body presentation executed in the right-handed hitting reporting part. By doing so, it is possible to easily determine which of the operation confirmation control and the performance operation control is being performed by the initial emphasis mode and the mode corresponding to the right-handed informing part.

In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the motion mode of the board movable body 32A in the movable body presentation executed in the right-handed informing part and the motion mode of the board movable body 32A in the initial motion are common. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the mode of operation of the board movable body 32A in the movable body presentation and the mode of operation of the board movable body 32A in the initial action are common. or all of the operation modes may be common. Furthermore, both operation modes may be different modes.

In addition, when executing the movable body effect in the right-handed notification part of the fanfare effect, the movable body is operated by a special action, and an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect can be displayed. It is possible to determine that it is an operation error and perform motion confirmation control again if the operation cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time. When executed, the effect display should be displayed while the special action is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to show the effect display to the player that the movable body presentation has been executed while preventing the initial action from being hindered by the special action.

Mode 4 (Electricity cut immediately after the start of the fanfare production)
Next, the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the variable display based on the jackpot variation pattern, the combination of the jackpot fixed symbols is stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and after the variable display ends, the pattern fixed display period ends. A big hit fanfare effect is started based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the big win start designation command. Immediately after the fanfare effect is started, the power is cut off, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (hot start processing is executed at the time of power failure recovery (when the power is turned on)), and the jackpot game state is entered. Control is resumed.

Immediately after the fanfare effect is started is, more specifically, immediately after the CPU 103 starts control of the big win, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the big win start designation command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103 and starts the fanfare effect. Although it is the timing immediately after starting (introduction part), since only the power failure restoration designation command is transmitted with the restoration of the CPU 103 after starting with the hot start, the effect control CPU 120 receives the designation command during the opening of the big winning opening. It is not possible to specify what kind of state the game state is (whether it is a fanfare period or not, etc.) until it is done. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off), and the background sound (BGM) is being restored. corresponding to (for example, silence). In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. is displayed (see FIG. 97), and it is notified that the power failure is being restored until the next command is received, that is, during the remaining period of the fanfare.

In addition, the operation confirmation control is started during the remaining period of the fanfare informing that the power failure is being restored, and the operation confirmation control is finished before the fanfare period ends and the round game starts. It's becoming In the operation confirmation control, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) during the initial operation, but the effect operation control is performed. It emits light at a lower luminance than when it emits light at .

After that, when receiving a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the first time has started, so that the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, The upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, and the upper frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a mode corresponding to the music during the jackpot output during the jackpot, and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the tune during the jackpot is output. be started. Incidentally, the chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that one of a plurality of pieces of music can be selected during the big hit.

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately after the fanfare performance is started, the initial operation is performed in the operation confirmation control started during the remaining period of the fanfare. On-board movable LED 9d, under-board movable LED 9e, on-frame movable LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production) Since the light is emitted at a lower luminance than when the light is emitted in the state, the power consumption at the time of turning on the power is suppressed to reduce the load on the pachinko game machine 1, and the movable body LED provided on the movable body is controlled to perform the performance operation. By setting the brightness to be lower than usual, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to check due to glare.

In addition, based on the reception of the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening, which indicates that the big winning opening is open, the production corresponding to the round game (light emission and sound output corresponding to the music during the big winning) is started. Specifically, during the round game period, the big winning opening is open for a long period of time and a large amount of game balls can be won. A more lively round effect is provided, but by ending the operation confirmation control before the round effect corresponding to this round game is started, the round effect can be enjoyed without worrying about the movable body that initially operates. be able to

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately after the fanfare effect is started, the period until the fanfare effect ends (Fig. 52 The fanfare effect period and the initial action period are set so that the initial action of the movable body is completed within (F2) to (F6)).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can be used when power is turned on after a power failure occurs during variable display, and when power is turned on after a power failure occurs at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed. While displaying the display 132SG510 during restoration on the image display device 5, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, and the frame movable body LED 9f are displayed in a mode corresponding to the restoration display 132SG510 (for example, the initial emphasis mode It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light with white light), and when power failure occurs during variable display, power failure occurs at the same time when the power is turned on and at the same time as the fanfare effect is performed. After that, when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform operation check control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g exclude the movable bodies that are in the initial operation during the recovery from the power failure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and light is emitted at a lower luminance than the emission luminance of the movable body LED in the production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production). good too.

In addition, in the case where the power is turned on after a power interruption occurs during variable display, and when the power is turned on after the power interruption occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect, the image display device 5 Although it is displayed in the common restoration display 132SG510, for example, when power failure occurs during variable display in the low base state and the power is turned on after that, while the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed Although the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 is not displayed, if the power failure occurs at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed and the power is turned on after that, the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 will be displayed while the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is displayed. Although there are differences such as display, as long as at least the display mode of the in-restoration display 132SG510 is common, the display modes of the other displays may not be common.

In addition, when a power failure occurs during the variable display in the high base state or during the big hit, and then the power is turned on, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is displayed at the same timing as the recovery display 132SG510. However, for example, regardless of the game state, it is determined whether or not to display only the restoration display 132SG510 when the power is turned on after the occurrence of power failure, and to display the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 according to the game state. It doesn't have to be. In addition, when the restoration display 132SG510 is in the state of variable display in the low base state, the power is cut off, and then the power is turned on, or the power is cut off during the variable display in the high base state or during the big hit, After that, the display mode of the restoration in progress display 132SG510 may differ between when the power is turned on and when the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable that the display mode promotes the right-handed operation when power failure occurs during the variable display in the high base state or during the big win, and then the power is turned on.

In addition, when power failure occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is turned on after that, the performance control CPU 120 displays a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and also displays the board of the movable body in initial operation. The upper movable body LED 9d, the board lower movable body LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B can be illuminated in an initial emphasized mode (white lighting), and the power failure occurs at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed, and then , when the power is turned on, over the execution period of the fanfare effect, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies that are not in initial operation are being restored. It is possible to emit light (turn off in this embodiment) in a manner corresponding to the indication, and the initial highlighting manner (white lighting) is not used in the manner (turning off) corresponding to the display during restoration. By doing so, even during recovery, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that operates by the operation confirmation control.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 causes the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the frame-on movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B to emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting). , During fanfare performance (performance operation control), the board-top movable body LED 9d, the board-bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies are controlled to emit light at a luminance lower than that corresponding to the music during the big hit. (see FIG. 56B), it is possible to suppress the power consumption at power-on and reduce the load.

In addition, since the mode corresponding to the display during recovery (turning off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the fanfare production (music during the big hit), even if the fanfare production is being performed before the power failure, the power supply It is possible to notify that restoration is in progress at the time of power-on.

In addition, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by production operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the production position) are common, and the on-board movable body of the movable body The LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) until the initial action is completed in the operation confirmation control, and the effect operation control (for example, the success button In the production), light is emitted in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (e.g., advance operation period), and light is emitted in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (e.g., retreat operation period). . By doing so, it is possible to easily determine which of the action confirmation control and the performance action control is being performed.

Form 5 (Electricity cut just before the end of the fanfare production)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an operation example when operation confirmation control is executed for fanfare effect. 84, (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 82, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start after the power failure occurs just before the fanfare effect of the big win started based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command is finished. When the hot start process is executed (when the power is turned on), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

The timing just before the fanfare effect ends is, more specifically, the timing just before the fanfare effect (right-handed notification part) started by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command, that is, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot. The timing immediately before the end of the fanfare period waiting from the start of control to the start of control of the round game (for example, timing about 5000 ms before the end of the fanfare period).

In this case, after being activated by hot start, based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the power failure restoration designation command transmitted with the restoration of the CPU 103 and the large winning opening open designation command corresponding to the first time, Over the round game period, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f emit light in a mode corresponding to the song during the big hit, and the attacker LED 9c in a mode corresponding to the opening. Light is emitted, and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a music selection suggestion mode, and a background sound (BGM) is output in a mode corresponding to the music during the big hit.

If there is a remaining time (for example, about 1000 ms) in the fanfare period when the hot start is started, the remaining time of 1000 ms is reached after the power failure recovery designation command is received based on the recovery of the CPU 103. After the elapse of the first time, the command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening is received. The upper movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are turned off, and the background sound (BGM) is not output. Note that the movable body LED may emit light in a mode corresponding to the restoration.

Further, after the operation confirmation control of each movable body is started with the start of the first game, the operation confirmation is performed before the opening control of the big winning opening in the first game is finished and the next round game is started. Control ends. In the operation confirmation control, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) during the initial operation. It is designed to emit light with a lower luminance than when it emits light in the production operation control.

After that, after receiving a designation command after the opening of the big winning opening in the first round, a designation command during the opening of the big winning opening is received in the second round for effect control. When received by the CPU 120, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, and the frame movable body LED 9f emit light in an open emphasizing manner for the first predetermined time, and then the middle jackpot music output during the jackpot. , and output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the middle hit song is started. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that one of a plurality of pieces of music can be selected during the big hit, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the opening.

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, the board of the movable body that performs the initial operation in the operation confirmation control started during the round game period. The upper movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting). The movable body is dazzling by reducing the load on the pachinko game machine 1 by suppressing the power consumption at the time of turning on the movable body and setting the movable body LED provided on the movable body to have lower luminance than when performance operation control is executed. It is possible to prevent the operation from becoming difficult to confirm.

In addition, it is possible to end the operation confirmation control when the power is turned off and turned on immediately before the fanfare effect ends before the opening control of the big winning hole in the first round game ends. Even after the initial motion is finished, the player can aim to win a prize at the big prize opening without being disturbed by the movable body.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, the opening control of the big winning hole in the first game ends. The opening control period and the initial operation period of the big winning opening are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period (see (F8) to (F9) in FIG. 52).

Further, as shown in FIG. 83(A), in a round game in which the big winning opening is controlled to be open for a specified period of time after the end of the fanfare effect, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays a round game. An image for effect is displayed, a right hitting promotion display 132SG430 indicating the launching direction of the game ball is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the number of rounds as a round game related display related to the round game is displayed on the upper side of the display screen. A display 132SG451, a display of the number of winning balls 132SG452, a display of the number of balls played 132SG453, and a display of the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454 are displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the effect position, the effect part 32a can move vertically in a hatched area E1 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. , and the support portion 32b can move vertically in a hatched area E2 surrounded by a chain double-dashed line. Further, when the under-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the effect position, the effect part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the oblique line area E3 surrounded by the two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is displayed at a position where only the supporting portion 32b can be overlapped, and the number of rounds display 132SG451 and the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 are partially overlapped with the directing portion 32a and the supporting portion 32b. The number of winning balls display 132SG452 and the number of put out balls display 132SG453 are displayed at positions where the effect section 32a can overlap.

Next, the relationship between various displays when the upper board movable body 32A and the lower board movable body 32B perform the initial motion will be described based on FIGS. 84(A) and (B).

As shown in FIG. 84(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is positioned at the origin position, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played display 132SG453, Since it does not overlap with any of the number of games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, the player can visually recognize all of the displays (see FIG. 83(A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position and passes through the intermediate position, the front side of the round number display 132SG451, the winning ball number display 132SG452, the number of balls played display 132SG453, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played display 132SG454. Due to the overlap of the effect section 32a, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize these displays. Also, since the support portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (see FIG. 83(B)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and descends to the production position, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible, but a part of the consecutive game/total number of balls display 132SG454 is produced on the front side. Due to the overlap of the portion 32a, it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played display 132SG454. Since the number-of-balls display 132SG453 does not overlap the effect part 32a and the support part 32b, the player can visually recognize these displays (see FIG. 83(C)).

When returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same. Since the moving speed of the retracting motion in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the performance position to the origin position is slower, the overlapping time is longer during the retracting motion than during the advancing motion, as shown in FIG. 84(A). Since it becomes longer, the time during which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize becomes longer.

As shown in FIG. 84(A), when the initial action is performed in the round game, the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B are overlapped with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see. ), the board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (eg, round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive games/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.). Since the time is shorter than the time required to perform the initial action, the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, which has a high degree of influence on the game, is less likely to be hindered by the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial action.

In other words, in a round game in which the large winning opening is open to the advantage for the player, if the right-handed prompting display 132SG430 is covered by the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial operation, the large winning opening is closed. During the open state, the player may miss an opportunity to win the game ball by the right-handed operation, and the player may suffer a disadvantage. Visibility is preferably maintained.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 84(B), when the lower board movable body 32B is positioned at the origin position, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, and the number of balls played display 132SG453. , the number of consecutive games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 83(A)).

Next, while the lower board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position and rises to the production position, and even after reaching the production position, right-handed promotion display 132SG430, round number display 132SG451, winning ball Since it does not overlap with any of the number display 132SG452, the number of played balls display 132SG453, and the number of consecutive games/total number of played balls display 132SG454, the player can visually recognize all of these displays (see FIGS. 83(D) and (E)). . Incidentally, even when returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 84(A), when the initial action is performed in the round game, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize. The time when the board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.) , the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, which has a high degree of influence on the game, is less likely to be hindered by the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial action.

In addition, regarding the under-board movable body 32B, during the initial operation, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 and the big hit information display (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, the consecutive Since it does not overlap with any of the number of shots/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, etc.), it can be visually recognized by the player.

In other words, in a round game in which the large winning opening is open to the advantage for the player, if the right-handed prompting display 132SG430 is covered by the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial operation, the large winning opening is closed. During the open state, the player may miss an opportunity to win a game ball by hitting to the right, and the player may suffer a disadvantage. Compared to the big hit information display, the time during which the visibility is difficult due to the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B that perform the initial operation is short, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body that is in the initial motion emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in the initial motion is in the middle of the jackpot (round production). Light is emitted in a corresponding mode, but the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in a mode corresponding to the music during the big hit (round production), so that the movable body that performs the initial movement even during the round game is focused. It is possible to

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body that is performing the initial action emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the second movable body that is not performing the initial action emits light during the big hit ( round effect), but when the first movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), By causing the movable body LED of the second movable body to emit light in a manner corresponding to the music during the big win (round effect), it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that performs the initial motion even during the round game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the round game when the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after power failure occurs immediately before the fanfare effect ends, the movable body LED that is not in the initial operation is turned on. The light emission brightness when emitting light in a manner corresponding to the music during the big hit (round effect) is the same as that in the round when the pachinko machine 1 does not start up with a hot start after the power failure occurs just before the fanfare effect ends. In the game, the embodiment has been exemplified in which the emission luminance is the same as that when the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in the initial motion emits light in a mode corresponding to the music during the big hit (round effect), but the present invention is limited to this. In the round game when the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare presentation, the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in the initial operation is a big hit. The light emission brightness when emitting light in a mode corresponding to the music (round effect) is the same as that in the round game when the pachinko game machine 1 does not start with a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the fanfare effect ends. , the light emission brightness may be lower than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in the initial motion emits light in a mode corresponding to the music during the big win (round effect). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the power consumption when the power is turned on and reduce the load.

Mode 6 (power outage immediately after the start of the first round game)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately after the start of one round game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of one round game.

As shown in FIG. 85, after the big win fanfare effect is completed, the round effect is started based on the reception of the special prize opening open designation command indicating that the first round game (first round) has started. When the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after a power failure occurs immediately after (hot-start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

"Immediately after the start of the round effect" means, in more detail, the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the special winning opening open specification command indicating that the first round game has started. Immediately after the timing, that is, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 starts the control of the first round game (for example, the timing immediately after starting the opening control of the large winning opening in the round game (for example, after about 1000 ms)) including.

In this case, since only the power failure recovery designation command is transmitted with the restoration of the CPU 103 after being started by the hot start, the effect control CPU 120 determines how the game state is until the designation command is received after the first opening of the big winning opening. It is not possible to specify whether it is in a state (whether it is a round game period, etc.). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off), and the background sound (BGM) is being restored. corresponding to (for example, silence). In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. A restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97), and the power failure is being restored until the next command, that is, the designated command after the opening of the first big prize mouth is received, that is, until the first round game period ends. is reported.

In addition, the operation confirmation control is started during the first round game period in which it is notified that the power failure is being restored, and the operation confirmation control is finished before the first round game period ends. there is In the operation confirmation control, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) during the initial operation, but the effect operation control is performed. It emits light at a lower luminance than when it emits light at .

After that, after receiving a designation command after the opening of the big winning opening, which designates the period during which the big winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state, it is determined that it is the period during which the big winning opening changes from the closed state to the open state. Since it can be specified that the second round game has started after the first round game has ended when the designated command for the large winning opening opening is received, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, The upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, and the upper frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a mode corresponding to the music during the jackpot output during the jackpot, and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the tune during the jackpot is output. be started. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that one of a plurality of pieces of music can be selected during the big hit, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the opening.

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately after the round performance is started, the initial operation is performed in the operation confirmation control started during the round game period. On-board movable LED 9d, under-board movable LED 9e, on-frame movable LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production) Since the light is emitted at a lower luminance than when the light is emitted in the state, the power consumption at the time of turning on the power is suppressed to reduce the load on the pachinko game machine 1, and the movable body LED provided on the movable body is controlled to perform the performance operation. By setting the brightness to be lower than usual, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to check due to glare.

In addition, the operation confirmation control when the power is turned off and the power is turned on immediately after the opening control of the big winning hole in the first round game is started, and the opening control of the big winning hole in the first round game ends. Since it is possible to finish the game before the initial action is finished, the player can aim to win a prize in the big prize slot without being disturbed by the movable body even after the initial action is finished.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after power failure occurs immediately after opening control of the big winning hole in the first round game is started, Opening control of the large winning opening in one round game so that the initial action of the movable body ends within the period until the opening control of the large winning opening in the first round game ends (see FIG. 52 (F9)) A period and an initial operation period are set.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the power is turned off during the variable display, and when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned off at the same time when the big winning opening is controlled to be open, and then the power is turned on. In this case, the display 132SG510 during restoration is displayed on the image display device 5, and the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f that are in operation correspond to the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510. (For example, initial emphasis mode; white lighting) It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, and when power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and the big prize opening is open. It is possible to perform operation confirmation control when the power is cut off at the same time as the control is performed, and when the power is turned on after that. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g exclude the movable bodies that are in the initial operation during the recovery from the power failure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and light is emitted at a lower luminance than the emission luminance of the movable body LED in the production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production). good too.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the electric power failure occurs at the same time when the big winning hole is controlled to be opened, and then the power is turned on, displays the restoration in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and displays the initials. It is possible to illuminate the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the moving movable body in an initial emphasized mode (white lighting), and the big prize opening is opened. Power failure occurs at the same time as being controlled to the state, and after that, when the power is turned on, the large winning opening is in the open state over the control execution period. The LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B can be caused to emit light (in this embodiment, they are turned off) in a mode corresponding to the display during restoration, and the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is It is not used in the mode (extinguishing) corresponding to the display during restoration. By doing so, even during recovery, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that operates by the operation confirmation control.

In addition, since the mode corresponding to the display during recovery (turning off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the round effect (music during the big hit), even if the round effect is being performed before the power failure, the power It is possible to notify that restoration is in progress at the time of power-on.

In the above-described form 6, when power failure occurs immediately after the second and subsequent round games (2R to 10R) are started, control of the first round game (opening of the big winning opening) is started. Since the operation is the same as that in the case where the power failure occurs immediately after the operation, the detailed explanation will be omitted.

Mode 7 (power outage just before the end of the first round game)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of one round game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of one round game.

As shown in FIG. 86, a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the round effect started based on the reception of the special prize mouth open specified command indicating that the first round game (first round) has started. After that, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot-started (hot-start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

Immediately before the end of the round effect, more specifically, the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the special winning opening open specification command indicating that the first round game has started ends. The timing just before, that is, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends the control of the first round game (for example, the timing just before the opening control of the big winning opening in one round game ends (for example, about 5000 ms before) or , the timing when the number of winning balls becomes one before the upper limit number (for example, 10) which is the closing condition of the big winning hole, the round interval period in the first round game, etc.).

In this case, after being activated by the hot start, by receiving a power failure restoration designation command and a designation command after opening the first big winning opening with the restoration of the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 is the first round interval period Assuming that, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turning off), and the background sound ( BGM) will be in a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. The restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97), and the power failure is being restored until the next command, ie, the second round interval period, is received. is reported.

After that, when the second big prize opening open specification command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f are in the open emphasis mode for the first predetermined time. After the light is emitted, the light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the music during the big win (round performance), and the output of the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music during the big win is started. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that one of a plurality of pieces of music can be selected during the big hit, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the end of the first round game, the operation confirmation control is started during the second round game period, and the second round game is started. The operation check control ends before the round game period ends. Incidentally, the operation check control may be started during the round interval period in the first round game. In the operation confirmation control, the LED 9d of the movable body on the board, the LED 9e of the movable body on the board, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the LED 9g of the chance button emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) during the initial operation. Light is emitted at a lower luminance than when light is emitted during operation control.

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the end of the first round game, the operation is confirmed during the second round game following the round game. Control is started, and the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial action emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but the effect operation control ( The movable body LED provided on the movable body reduces the load on the pachinko game machine 1 by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on because it emits light at a lower luminance than when it emits light in the movable body performance in the win/fail button performance). is set to a lower luminance than when the performance operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the end of the first round game, the large winning opening in the second round game The opening control period and the initial operation period of the big winning opening are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control is completed (see (F10) in FIG. 52).

In the above form 7, if the power failure occurs immediately before the end of the second round game (2R to 10R), immediately after the control of the first round game (opening of the big winning opening) is started. Since the operation is the same as that in the case where the power is cut off in the second case, the detailed explanation is omitted.

Mode 8 (power outage immediately after the start of the special interval)
Next, the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the special interval will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the special interval.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot types are jackpot A and jackpot B, the round interval period after the opening control of the jackpot opening in all round games is completed is 0.5 seconds. In the case of jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E, the special round interval period after the opening control of the jackpot opening in the third round game is completed is set to 30 seconds (see FIG. 8), and in this special round interval period, A promotion effect (see (F21) to (F29) in FIG. 53) is performed as a special interval effect.

As shown in FIG. 87, after a power outage occurs immediately before the third round effect of jackpots C to E ends, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), the hot start occurs). When the start process is executed), the control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

Immediately before the end of the third round effect of the jackpots C to E is, in detail, the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the special prize opening open designation command indicating that the third round game has started. The timing just before the end of the round production started, that is, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends the opening control of the large winning opening in the third round game (for example, the opening control of the big winning opening in the third round game including the timing just before the end (for example, about 5000 ms before) and the timing when the number of winning balls is one before the upper limit number (for example, 10) that is the condition for closing the big winning hole.

In this case, after being activated by the hot start, the power failure recovery designation command and the designation command after the opening of the third big winning opening are received along with the recovery of the CPU 103, so that the effect control CPU 120 performs the third special round interval. During the period, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off), and the background sound (BGM) becomes a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during recovery. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. The restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97), and the power failure is restored until the next command, ie, the third special round interval period ends. You will be notified that you are inside.

After that, when the fourth big prize opening open specified command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, and the frame movable body LED 9f are in the open emphasis mode for the first predetermined time. After the light is emitted, the light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the music during the big win (round performance), and the output of the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music during the big win is started. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that one of a plurality of pieces of music can be selected during the big hit, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the opening.

In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the third round game ends, the operation confirmation control is performed during the third special round interval period. is started, and the operation confirmation control ends before the third special round interval period ends. In the operation confirmation control, the LED 9d of the movable body on the board, the LED 9e of the movable body on the board, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the LED 9g of the chance button emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) during the initial operation. Light is emitted at a lower luminance than when light is emitted during operation control.

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the third round game ends, during the third special round interval period The operation confirmation control is started at 10:00 a.m., and the on-board movable LED 9d, the lower-board movable LED 9e, the on-frame movable LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are initially operated, emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting). Since it emits light at a lower brightness than when it emits light in operation control (movable body presentation in win/fail button presentation), power consumption at the time of power-on is suppressed and the load on the pachinko game machine 1 is reduced. By setting the brightness of the movable body LED to be lower than that when the performance operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the third round game ends, the third time During the period until the special round interval period ends (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F29)), the opening control of the large winning opening and the round interval period and the initial operation period so that the initial action of the movable body ends and are set.

In addition, in the above-described form 8, the form in which the special round interval is set after the end of the opening control of the big winning opening in the third round game has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third round game A special round interval may be set after the opening control of the big winning opening in the round game other than the game ends.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the power is turned off during the variable display, and when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned off at the same time when the big winning opening is controlled to be closed, and then when the power is turned on. In this case, the display 132SG510 during restoration is displayed on the image display device 5, and the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f that are in operation correspond to the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light in (for example, initial emphasis mode; white lighting), and when power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when the big prize opening is closed It is possible to perform operation confirmation control when the power is cut off at the same time as the control is performed, and when the power is turned on after that. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when a power failure occurs at the same time when the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, and then the power is turned on, the image display device 5 displays a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510, and displays the initials. It is possible to illuminate the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the moving movable body in an initial emphasized mode (white lighting), and the big prize opening is closed. Power failure occurs at the same time as being controlled to the state, and when the power is turned on after that, the large winning opening is closed over the control execution period, the movable body on the board that is not in the initial operation. The LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B can be caused to emit light (in this embodiment, they are turned off) in a mode corresponding to the display during restoration, and the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is It is not used in the mode (extinguishing) corresponding to the display during restoration. By doing so, even during recovery, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that operates by the operation confirmation control.

In the present embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g exclude the movable bodies that are in the initial operation during the recovery from the power failure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and light is emitted at a lower luminance than the emission luminance of the movable body LED in the production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production). good too.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the electric power failure occurs at the same time when the big winning opening is controlled to the closed state, and then the power is turned on, the image display device 5 displays a restoration in progress display 132SG510, and temporarily When the big winning opening is controlled to be closed in the round game, an interval production can be executed, and in the interval production, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e below the board, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance The button 631B and the attacker LED 9c can emit light in a mode corresponding to the music during the big hit (interval performance), and the movable body that is in the initial operation is an upper-board movable LED 9d, a lower-board movable LED 9e, and an upper-frame movable LED 9f. , the chance button 631B can be illuminated in an initial emphasized mode (white lighting). Then, in the third round game, when the big winning hole is controlled to be in a closed state (special round interval) and at the same time power failure occurs, and then the power is turned on, the third special round interval control is executed. Over a period of time, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c of the movable bodies that are not in initial operation are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the display during recovery (this In the embodiment, it is possible to turn off the light), and the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the interval production (music during the big hit). By doing so, it is possible to notify that the system is being restored when the power is turned on.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the power failure restoration designation command and the designation command after the third big winning opening are received with the restoration of the CPU 103, the image display device 5 is restored during the third special round interval period. While the middle display 132SG510 is displayed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c correspond to restoration (for example, turning off). , the background sound (BGM) becomes a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, silence), and this restoration mode is exemplified as continuing until the fourth large winning mouth open designation command is received. The invention is not limited to this. For example, the interval rendering is executed after the introductory part (see (F21) to (F23) in FIG. 53) and the introductory part, and the results of the introductory part are reported. If it is composed of parts (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 53), it is preferable that the operation confirmation control be performed before the start of the result notification part. By doing so, it is possible to avoid obstructing the visibility of the result notification part in the interval rendering by the movable body that performs the initial motion.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a movable body effect using the lower board movable body 32B as a promotion effect in the result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)), and when the movable body effect is executed, It is possible to perform effect operation control in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the underboard movable body 32B operated by the operation confirmation control, and the sound output is limited when the underboard movable body 32B operates by the operation confirmation control. , When the under-board movable body 32B moves in the movable body presentation, it is preferable that a sound corresponding to the movable body presentation is output. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily determine which of the operation confirmation control and the performance operation control is being performed.

In addition, in the movable body production in the result notification part, it is possible to display the effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body production, and the operation mode of the lower board movable body 32B by the operation confirmation control The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) is common, and if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, It is possible to determine an operation error and perform operation confirmation control again, and in one round game in which the interval effect is executed, power failure occurs immediately before the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, and then the power supply. When the operation confirmation control that starts when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect, and the promotion effect is during the specific period during which the operation confirmation control is being performed. is executed, the effect display may be displayed while the movable body presentation is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to show the player that the movable body production has been executed by the effect display while preventing the action confirmation control from being hindered by the promotion production.

In addition, the operation mode of the lower board movable body 32B by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of the lower board movable body 32B in the promotion effect (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the movable body On-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B emit light in an initial emphasized mode (white lighting) until the initial action is completed in operation confirmation control, and effect operation control ( For example, in the case of promotion success of the promotion effect), light is emitted in the rainbow flash mode in the first period (eg, advance operation period), and the rainbow flash mode is emitted in the second period (eg, retreat operation period). It emits light in a different smooth rainbow manner. By doing so, it is possible to easily determine which of the action confirmation control and the performance action control is being performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the movable body effect executed during the special round interval period after the end of the opening control of the big winning mouth in the third round game, the lower board movable body 32B rises, Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which a promotion effect is performed to inform the player that the jackpot is a 10-round jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than the 3-round jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body effect is the above-mentioned promotion. Various movable body effects can be applied as well as effects.

For example, in a specific round game during the big hit, based on the detection that the game ball has passed the second count switch 132SG024, the game state after the big win is a probability change state (the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state) In the case of a pachinko game machine that becomes a state), as shown in FIG. 88, as a movable body effect executed during the special round interval period, the bottom movable body 32B rises, so that the jackpot is a non-probable variable jackpot (jackpot A V promotion performance may be performed to inform the player that the probability variable jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot where the game state after the end does not change to the probability variable state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 88, when this V promotion effect is composed of an introductory part and a result reporting part that is executed after the introductory part and reports the result of the introductory part, the big prize opening is closed. When power failure occurs at the same time as the state is controlled, and then the power is turned on, the operation check control is preferably finished before the result notification part of the V promotion effect is started.

Form 9 (Electrical interruption immediately before the start of the round game in which the promotion effect is executed) <Modification>
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately before the start of the round game in which the promotion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 89 . FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, during the special round interval period (30 seconds) after the end of the opening control of the big winning opening in the third round game, promotion effects (see (F21) to (F29) in FIG. 53) are performed as special interval effects. ) is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be executable during the period during which the opening control and closing control of the big winning opening are performed.

In this case, the promotion effect includes an introductory part (see (F21) to (F23) in FIG. 53) and a result reporting part (FIG. 53 (F24) to (F29 )), and when the jackpot type is jackpot A (3R jackpot), the fact that jackpot A is promoted in the result notification part is reported in a promotion failure mode, and the jackpot type is higher than jackpot A (3R jackpot). When the jackpot B (10R jackpot) is advantageous to the player, the jackpot B is reported in the promotion success mode in the result reporting part. In other words, it is preferable that the promotion effect can be executed when the variable display result of the first special symbol results in a big hit (first hit).

Then, as shown in FIG. 89, after a power failure occurs immediately before the start of the third round effect of the jackpots A and B in which the promotion effect is executed, the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (at the time of power failure recovery). When the hot start process is executed (when the power is turned on), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

Immediately before the start of the third round effect in which the promotion effect is executed is, in detail, the effect control based on the reception of the special prize mouth open designation command indicating that the second round game has started. The timing just before the round effect started by the CPU 120 ends, that is, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends the opening control of the large winning opening in the second round game (for example, the opening of the big winning opening in the second round game The timing just before the control ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10) that is the condition for closing the big winning hole, or the second round interval period, etc.).

In this case, after being activated by the hot start, by receiving a power failure restoration designation command and a designation command after opening the second big winning opening with the restoration of the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 is the second round interval period. Assuming that, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turning off), and the background sound ( BGM) will be in a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. Restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97), and until the next command, ie, the second round interval period ends, the power outage is being restored. is reported.

After that, when receiving the third big prize opening open designation command, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f are in the open emphasis mode for the first predetermined time. After the light is emitted, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introductory part), and background sound (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introductory part) is started to be output. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that one of a plurality of background sounds (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introductory part) can be selected, and the attacker LED 9c emits light during opening. It emits light in a corresponding manner.

In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the second round game ends, during the second round interval period (during recovery) or The operation confirmation control is started during the third round game, and the operation confirmation control is finished before the result notification part of the promotion performance executed in the third round game is started. In the operation confirmation control, the LED 9d of the movable body on the board, the LED 9e of the movable body on the board, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the LED 9g of the chance button emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) during the initial operation. It is designed to emit light with a lower luminance than when it emits light in operation control (promotion effect).

In this way, when the pachinko machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the second round game ends, during the second round interval period or Operation confirmation control is started in the third round game, and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e under the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting). Although it emits light, it emits light at a lower luminance than when it emits light in the performance operation control (promotion performance), so that the power consumption when the power is turned on is suppressed and the load on the pachinko game machine 1 is reduced. By setting the brightness of the movable body LED to be lower than that when the performance operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after power failure occurs immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the second round game ends, the third time The opening control of the big winning opening and the round interval period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed in the round game is started. .

In the above-described form 9, the form in which the promotion effect is executed in the third round game is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect is executed in the round game other than the third round game. You may do so.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body that is initializing emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body that is not initializing corresponds to the promotion effect (introduction part). However, the initial emphasizing mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), so that attention is drawn to the movable body that performs the initial motion even during the promotion performance. becomes possible.

In addition, when power failure occurs immediately before the third round game is started and the power is turned on after that, when the movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control, the movable body on the board that performs the initial operation is moved. The body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) instead of the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), so that when the power is turned on It is possible to reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption of

Also, if power failure occurs immediately before the third round game is started, and then the power is turned on, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, the third round game will be executed. Since the initial action of the movable body ends before the operation promoting part of the introduction part of the promotion effect, that is, the operation promoting effect prompting the player to operate the chance button 631B is started, the movable body is operated by the operation confirmation control. , the visibility of the operation promotion effect in the introductory part is not hindered.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has the same operation mode (a mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) when the lower board movable body 32B performs the initial motion and when performing the performance motion in the promotion effect, and performs the initial motion. When the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode corresponding to the restoration indication 132SG510 (for example, the initial emphasis mode; white lighting), but the output of the background sound (BGM) is limited, and the performance is performed in a promotional performance. , the lower board movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode (for example, rainbow mode, etc.) corresponding to the promotion effect (result reporting part), while a sound effect corresponding to the promotion effect (result reporting part) is output. . By doing so, it is possible to easily determine which one of the initial action and the promotion effect is being executed.

In addition, in the movable body production in the result notification part, it is possible to display the effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body production, and the operation mode of the lower board movable body 32B by the operation confirmation control The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) is common, and if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, It is possible to determine an operation error and perform operation confirmation control again, and when a power failure occurs immediately after the start of the third round effect in which the promotion effect is executed, and then the power is turned on. When the operation confirmation control that is started does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect, and if the promotion effect is executed during the specific period during which the operation confirmation control is performed, The effect display may be displayed while the movable body presentation is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to show the player that the movable body production has been executed by the effect display while preventing the action confirmation control from being hindered by the promotion production.

Mode 10 (Electricity cut just before the end of the final round game)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round game.

As shown in FIG. 90, the round production started based on the reception of the special prize opening opening specification command indicating that the tenth round game (final round) in the big hits B, D, and E has started is completed. When the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after the power failure occurs immediately before (hot-start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

Immediately before the end of the round effect means, in detail, the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the special winning opening open specification command indicating that the 10th round game has started. The timing just before, that is, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends the control of the tenth round game (for example, the timing just before the opening control of the big winning opening in the final round game ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), and the winning Including the timing when the number of balls becomes one before the upper limit number (for example, 10) which is the closing condition of the big winning hole, the round interval period in the 10th round game, etc.).

In this case, after being activated by the hot start, by receiving the power failure recovery designation command and the tenth big winning opening opening designation command along with the recovery of the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 is the tenth round interval period. Assuming that, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turning off), and the background sound ( BGM) will be in a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. (See FIG. 97) is displayed during restoration 132SG510 (see FIG. 97), and until the next command, the jackpot end designation command, is received, that is, until the 10th round interval period ends, it is notified that the power failure is being restored. be.

After that, when a jackpot end designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f emit light in a mode corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part). , the output of the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part) is started. Incidentally, the chance button LED 9g and the attacker LED 9c emit light in a mode corresponding to the default (for example, white light or light off).

In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the end of the tenth round game, the operation confirmation control is started during the ending period, and before the end of the ending period Operation confirmation control is terminated. Incidentally, the operation check control may be started during the round interval period in the tenth round game. In the operation confirmation control, the LED 9d of the movable body on the board, the LED 9e of the movable body on the board, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the LED 9g of the chance button emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) during the initial operation. It is designed to emit light with a lower luminance than when it emits light in operation control (movable body presentation in win/fail button presentation).

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the tenth final round game ends, the operation confirmation control is started during the ending period, and the initial operation is performed. On-board movable LED 9d, under-board movable LED 9e, on-frame movable LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production) Since the light is emitted at a lower luminance than when the light is emitted in the state, the power consumption at the time of turning on the power is suppressed to reduce the load on the pachinko game machine 1, and the movable body LED provided on the movable body is controlled to perform the performance operation. By setting the brightness to be lower than usual, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to check due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start after power failure occurs immediately before the end of the tenth final round game, the information about the time saving state is displayed in the ending period. The ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the time saving state notification part (see (F32) and (F34) in FIG. 53) is started.

In the tenth form described above, an example of the operation of the jackpots B, D, and E in which the final rounds are 10 rounds is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the final rounds are the jackpots A, 3, and 3 rounds. In the case of C, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs just before the end of the third final round game, the time saving state notification that information about the time saving state is notified in the ending period. The round game period and the initial action period may be designed so that the initial action of the movable body is completed before the part (FIG. 52 (F13)) is started. Also, the final round is not limited to the above 3 rounds or 10 rounds, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body that is initializing emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body that is not initializing corresponds to the promotion effect (introduction part). However, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending production (introduction part), so that the movable body that makes the initial action even during the ending production is focused. becomes possible.

In addition, when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round and the power is turned on after that, when the movable body is moving by the operation confirmation control, the board LED 9d of the movable body that performs the initial operation and the board bottom LED 9d While the movable body LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating correspond to the ending effect (introductory part). By emitting light in this mode, it is possible to indicate that the movable body is moving under the operation confirmation control even during the ending effect.

In addition, when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round and the power is turned on after that, when the movable body is moving by the operation confirmation control, the board LED 9d of the movable body that performs the initial operation and the board bottom LED 9d Movable body LED 9e, frame upper movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light with low brightness in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) instead of the mode corresponding to the ending effect (introductory part). It is possible to reduce the load by suppressing the electric power.

In addition, not only the movable body LEDs, but also the frame LEDs 9a and 9b are designed to emit light at a lower luminance during the operation confirmation control period than when they emit light in a mode corresponding to the ending effect (introductory part). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on without deteriorating the decorative effect.

Mode 11 (Electrical interruption immediately after the start of the ending effect)
Next, the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power failure occurs immediately after the ending effect starts.

As shown in FIG. 91, after the end of the round interval effect in the 10th round game (final round) in the jackpots B, D, and E, immediately after the ending effect is started based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command. When the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after power failure occurs (hot-start processing is executed at the time of power failure recovery (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

Immediately after the ending effect is started, more specifically, the timing immediately after the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the ending effect based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command, that is, the CPU 103 controls the ending period. Including the timing immediately after the start (for example, the timing immediately after closing control of the big winning opening in the final round game (for example, after about 1000 ms)).

In this case, after being activated by the hot start, only power failure recovery specified command is received along with the recovery of the CPU 103, so the effect control CPU 120 is in the game state until it receives the next command (eg, customer waiting demo specified command, etc.) It is not possible to specify what kind of state is (whether it is an ending period or not). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a state corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a corresponding mode (eg, silence) during recovery. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. is displayed (see FIG. 97), and it is notified that the power failure is being restored until the next command is received.

After that, when receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f correspond to the high-base music (time-saving medium performance). Along with the light emission, output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to high-bass music (production during short working hours) is started. Incidentally, the chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, white lighting or extinguishing), and the attacker LED 9c extinguishes.

In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after a power failure occurs immediately after the ending effect is started, the operation check control is started during the ending period, and the operation check control is started before the ending period ends. It is supposed to end. In the operation confirmation control, the LED 9d of the movable body on the board, the LED 9e of the movable body on the board, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the LED 9g of the chance button emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) during the initial operation. It is designed to emit light with a lower luminance than when it emits light in operation control (movable body presentation in win/fail button presentation).

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect, the operation confirmation control is started during the ending period, and the movable body on the board that performs the initial operation is started. Movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but more than when they emit light in the effect operation control (movable body effect in win/fail button effect). Since the light is emitted at a low luminance, the power consumption at the time of turning on the power is suppressed and the load on the pachinko game machine 1 is reduced, and the movable body LED provided on the movable body is set to have a lower luminance than when the performance operation control is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable body from becoming difficult to check due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect, the information about the time saving state is notified during the ending period. The ending period and the initial motion period are set so that the initial motion of the movable body is completed before the state notification part (see (F32) and (F34) in FIG. 53) is started.

In the tenth form described above, an example of the operation of the jackpots B, D, and E in which the final rounds are 10 rounds is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the final rounds are the jackpots A, 3, and 3 rounds. In the case of C, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs just before the end of the third final round game, the time saving state notification that information about the time saving state is notified in the ending period. The round game period and the initial action period may be designed so that the initial action of the movable body is completed before the part (FIG. 52 (F13)) is started.

Also, in the above, the ending periods of the jackpots B, D, and E (10-round jackpot) have been described as an example, but the same operation is performed during the ending periods of the jackpots A and C (3-round jackpot), so a detailed explanation will be given. omitted.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can be used in the case where the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the variable display, and when the power is turned on after the power failure occurs immediately after the ending effect is started. While displaying the display 132SG510 during restoration on the image display device 5, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, and the frame movable body LED 9f are displayed in a mode corresponding to the restoration display 132SG510 (for example, the initial emphasis mode ; It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light with white light), and when power failure occurs during variable display, power failure occurs immediately after the power is turned on, and immediately after the start of the ending production, After that, when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect and the power is turned on after that, displays a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and at the same time, the movable body in initial operation. It is possible to illuminate the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the power failure occurs immediately after the ending effect starts. After that, when the power is turned on, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies that are not in the initial operation are displayed during restoration over the ending period. (in this embodiment, it is turned off), and the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during restoration. By doing so, even during recovery, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that operates by the operation confirmation control.

In the present embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g exclude the movable bodies that are in the initial operation during the recovery from the power failure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and light is emitted at a lower luminance than the emission luminance of the movable body LED in the production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production). good too.

In the present embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g exclude the movable bodies that are in the initial operation during the recovery from the power failure. However, this light emission mode (extinguishing) is not used for effect operation control (movable body effect in success/failure button effect). By doing so, even if the ending effect is being performed before the power failure, it is possible to notify that the restoration is being performed when the power is turned on.

Forms 12, 20 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during time saving)
Next, the relationship between the initial action and various displays during time saving will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an operation example of the movable body when the operation confirmation control is started based on the fact that power is cut off during the time saving and then the power is turned on. 93A is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 93B is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 92(A), in the time saving states B, C1, and C2, "BATTLE RUSH effect" is executed as the effect during time saving. In the BATTLE RUSH effect, a second background display 132SG320 showing a nighttime city landscape corresponding to the time-saving state and an image in which a friendly character and an enemy character are facing each other are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. . At the top of the screen, an effect mode display 132SG221 consisting of characters "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed. In addition, at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX remaining times", XX= 0 to 685) are displayed, and on the upper right side of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed promotion display 132SG430 consisting of the characters “Right-handed” and a right-pointing arrow is displayed, and at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, A number of consecutive jackpots/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 indicating the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of pitches during consecutive games is displayed.

In addition, in the display area 5SL on the upper left of the screen, the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and small patterns corresponding to the decorative patterns are displayed. A second reserved display area 132SG012 corresponding to memory is provided in the vertical direction, and for example, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, corresponding to the value of the second reserved memory number being 4. Four second suspension displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second suspension display area 132SG012.

As shown in FIG. 92(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the rendering position, the rendering section 32a can move vertically in a hatched area E1 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. , the support portion 32b can move vertically in a hatched area E2 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. Further, when the under-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the effect position, the effect part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the oblique line area E3 surrounded by the two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the second reservation display area 132SG012 in which the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 and the second reservation display 132SG002 are displayed is displayed at a position where only the support portion 32b of the on-board movable body 32A can overlap, and the second reservation storage number The display area 5SL where the display is displayed is displayed at a position where the production section 32a and the support section 32b can overlap, and the production mode display 132SG221 is displayed at a position where the production section 32a can overlap. On the other hand, the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 and the remaining time display 132SG201 are displayed at positions where part of the effect portion 32c and the support portion 32d of the lower board movable body 32B may overlap.

Next, the relationship between various displays when the upper-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B perform the initial motion will be described with reference to FIGS. 93(A) and (B). In addition, in FIGS. 93(A) and (B), description is abbreviate|omitted about production|presentation mode display 132SG221 and time saving remaining display 132SG201.

As shown in FIG. 93(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is positioned at the origin position, the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430, the second reserved storage number (display area 5SL), the second reserved display 132SG002 (second 2 reservation display area 132SG012), the number of consecutive games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, the time-saving remaining display 132SG201, and the production mode display 132SG221 do not overlap, so that the player can visually recognize all of the displays (Fig. 93). (A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the effect part 32a overlaps the front side of the second reserved memory number display (display area 5SL), so that the player cannot visually recognize the display. It becomes difficult (or impossible) (see FIG. 92(B)). After that, when the on-board movable body 32A moves to the intermediate position and the display of the second reserved memory number becomes visible, the supporting portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-handing promotion display 132SG430, so that the player can hit right-handedly. Visual recognition of the promotion display 132SG430 becomes difficult (or impossible) (see FIG. 92(C)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and descends to the production position, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible, but a part of the second reservation display 132SG002 (second reservation display area 132SG012) becomes visible. Due to the overlap of the effect part 32a on the front side, it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize the second reservation display 132SG002, but the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430, the second reservation memory number display, the number of consecutive games/total output Since the ball number display 132SG454, the time saving remaining display 132SG201, and the production mode display 132SG221 do not overlap the production section 32a and the support section 32b, the player can visually recognize these displays (see FIG. 92(D)).

When returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same. Since the movement speed of the retracting motion in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the performance position to the origin position is slower, the overlapping time is longer during the retracting motion than during the advancing motion, as shown in FIG. 93(A). Since it becomes longer, the time during which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize becomes longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93(B), when the under-board movable body 32B is positioned at the origin position, the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430, the second reserved storage number (display area 5SL), and the second reserved display 132SG002 are displayed. (Second holding display area 132SG012), the number of consecutive games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, and the short-time remaining display 132SG201 do not overlap, so the player can visually recognize all of the displays (Fig. 92 (D) reference).

Next, while the lower board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position and rises to the production position, and even after reaching the production position, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL), second reservation display 132SG002 (second reservation display area 132SG012), and production mode display 132SG221. Due to the overlapping of the effect part 32c and the support part 32d on the front side of a part of the number of balls display 132SG454 and the time saving remaining display 132SG201, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize these displays (Fig. 92 (D) , (E)). Incidentally, even when returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, after a power failure occurs during the time saving, when the initial operation is performed when it is activated by hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A is set to the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second The time when the player is difficult (or impossible) to visually recognize the reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) is the time when the underboard movable body 32B displays the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played) regarding the jackpot. Since each movable body is set to perform an initial motion so as to be shorter than the time overlapping the display 132SG454), the degree of influence on the game by the upper board movable body 32A and the lower board movable body 32B that perform the initial motion is reduced. The visibility of the high second reserved storage number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) is less likely to be hindered.

That is, in a time-saving state that is advantageous for the player by executing the variable display of the second special symbol by the right-handed operation, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second If the pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) is covered, the player misses the opportunity to generate the second start winning by the right hand operation during the period when the second start winning can be generated. , Since the player may suffer a disadvantage, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) maintain visibility compared to other big hit information displays. It is preferable that

In addition, while the number of consecutive games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454 does not change during the time saving state, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 show changes in the number of winnings and advance notice even in the time saving state. For example, the display mode can be changed. Therefore, the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial operation prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory that may change from being hindered by the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 that does not change. can.

Further, the initial action causes the on-board movable body 32A to move beyond the range in which the board-on movable body 32A overlaps the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012). It is preferable that the range overlapping the number of consecutive games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454 is larger. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory, which has a property, from being hindered more than the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 which does not change.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 93(A) and (B), when an initial operation is performed when a hot start is performed after a power failure occurs during the time saving operation and the recovery is performed, the on-board movable body 32A strikes rightward. The time during which the player cannot (or is not) visually recognizable due to the promotion display 132SG430 is longer than the time during which the underboard movable body 32B overlaps with the big win information display (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454). Since each movable body is set to perform an initial action so that the distance is shorter, the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 that has a high degree of influence on the game with the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial action is less likely to be hindered.

In other words, in a time-saving state that is advantageous for the player by executing the variable display of the second special symbol by the right-handed operation, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is overturned by the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial operation. If it is broken, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by the right-handed operation during the period when the second start winning can be generated, and the player may suffer a disadvantage. It is preferable that the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is maintained as compared with other big hit information displays.

It should be noted that when the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B operate in a manner common to the predetermined effect operation control (for example, moving from the origin position to the effect position) in the operation confirmation control, power is cut off during time saving. After the occurrence of , when the initial action is performed when it is activated by hot start and restored, the time when the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 and the player cannot see it (or is not possible). , When the time that the lower board movable body 32B overlaps with the big hit information display (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454) is almost the same or longer, the upper board movable body 32A and the lower board movable body 32B are moved. , The time when the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 and becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is the time when the lower-board movable body 32B displays the big hit information display (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played). It may be operated in a manner that is shorter than the time overlapping the numerical display 132SG454).

For example, the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B are not moved from the origin position to the position overlapping the second reserved memory number, the second reserved display 132SG002, and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 in the initial operation, and are not moved to the halfway position. It is sufficient to return to the origin position after moving. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory number, the second reserved display 132SG002, and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 from being hindered by the movable body that operates in the initial motion.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 93(A) and (B), when an initial operation is performed when a hot start is performed after a power failure occurs during the time saving operation and the recovery is performed, the on-board movable body 32A strikes rightward. The time when the player is difficult to see (or impossible) overlapping with the promotion display 132SG430 is the second suspension memory number (display area 5SL) or the second suspension display 132SG002 (second suspension display). By setting each movable body to perform an initial operation so as to be shorter than the time during which it is difficult (or impossible) to be visually recognized by the player overlapping the area 132SG012), the number of second reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories are set. The visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, which has a higher degree of influence on the game than the display 132SG002, is less likely to be hindered.

In addition, in forms 12 and 20, the upper board movable body 32A and the lower board movable body 32B, the right hitting promotion display 132SG430, the second reservation memory number (display area 5SL), and the second reservation display 132SG002 (second reservation display area 132SG012) and the big hit information display (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454) have been described, but in the present embodiment, in the operation confirmation control, the display is actually performed when the movable body performs the initial operation. However, regardless of whether or not the various displays are displayed, the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs the initial action. It is sufficient that the time overlapped with the above relationship is satisfied.

Mode 13 (power failure just before the end of the variation before the variation in which the button notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the fluctuation before the button announcement is completed will be described with reference to FIG. 94 . FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the button announcement is executed.

As shown in FIG. 94, after the variable display based on the predetermined losing variation pattern is started, the combinations of losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and immediately before the variable display ends (for example, The period during which the combination of missing symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fixed symbol display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the next variable display, etc. ), the pachinko machine 1 is hot-started (hot-start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and if there is a pending memory, the variable display is resumed. However, the variable display ends immediately, and the next variable display starts.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after receiving the power failure restoration designation command and the pattern confirmation command transmitted based on the restoration of the CPU 103, the next command Frame LEDs 9a and 9b, board top movable body LED 9d, board bottom movable body LED 9e, frame top movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off) until a certain variable display start designation command is received. , and the background sound (BGM) becomes a mode (for example, silence) corresponding to the restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. A restorative display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97), and it is notified that the power failure is being restored until the next command is received, that is, during the symbol fixed display period.

After that, based on the reception of the variable display start designation command and the variation pattern designation command, in the variable display notice effect determination processing (step S132SG610), the ready-to-win announcement to incite whether or not to enter the ready-to-win mode, and to enter the ready-to-win mode. Execution of a button notice prompting button operation is determined, and variable display is started in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the decided notice effect, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, board movable body LED 9d, board bottom The movable body LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the variation (background), and background sound (BGM) output corresponding to the variation (background) is started. Also, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) has passed since the power failure restoration designation command is received, the display of the activation preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the variation (background) is started.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has passed since the power failure restoration designation command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, the result notification part for notifying the results of the button advance notice is started.

In the button notice (result notification part), as shown in FIGS. 50(D6) and (D7), as a result of the player's operation of the chance button 631B, the result of whether or not the ready-to-win mode is reached is notified. If the initial motion of the movable body is being executed when the reporting part is started, the movable body that moves according to the initial motion hinders the visibility of the result reporting part, such as the reach mode, and the player is unable to obtain the result. There is a risk of misidentification.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the variation in which the button notification is executed, the button notification (result notification part) is performed. Since the movable body is controlled so that the initial motion ends before it starts, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the button notice (result notification part) from being obstructed by the movable body performing the initial motion.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, if power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the button announcement is executed, the period until the button announcement (result notification part) starts (Fig. 50 ( D1) to (D5)), the period from the start of fluctuation to the start of the button notice (result notification part) and the initial action period are set so that the initial action of the movable body is completed within the period.

In the present embodiment, the number of pending memories when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display is 1 or more. When the variable display is set, the execution of the button notice is determined in the variable display, and if the execution of the button notice is decided at the start of the variable display, the result notification part of the button notice after the start of the variable display is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds) until the button is executed, so that the power is cut off immediately before the fluctuation before the button notice is executed. has occurred, the initial action of the movable body is completed before the button notice (result notification part) is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the start winning occurs 2, when the CPU 103 determines that the button notice is a specific variation pattern to be executed, a specific effect control command that designates specific information related to the specific change pattern (for example, a prize-winning effect designation command that designates the execution of the button notice) ) is transmitted, and based on the specific effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial motion so that the initial motion ends before the start of the result notification part of the button advance notice. You may do so.

For example, when a start winning occurs during a predetermined variable display, if it is determined to be a specific variation pattern in which a button notice is executed, the specified variation pattern (with button notice) Winning time An effect designation command (specific information) is transmitted.

Then, after a power failure occurs just before the end of the predetermined variable display, when the power is turned on, a power failure recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (special figure information), a first reserved memory number notification command, a second reserved memory number A notification command is sent and the initial operation is started. Next, the design is stopped and displayed based on the transmission of the production design confirmation designation command, and after the design confirmation display period has passed, when the next variable display is started, the first reserved storage number notification command, the second 2 A pending memory count notification command, a game state background designation command, a first (or second) variable display start designation command, a pattern determination command, and a variation pattern designation command are transmitted.

Here, if a variation pattern specification command specifying a specific variation pattern (with button notice) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000 ms) after receiving a power failure recovery specification command, the initial operation being executed (about 20 Seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial action with a shorter action period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial action being executed.

Specifically, in the initial motion, the maximum advance motion and retraction motion of each movable body (reciprocation between the origin position and the effect position) are performed in order, while in the shortened initial motion, the minimum advance motion and retraction motion of each movable body are performed. An operation (for example, returning to the origin immediately after leaving the origin position) may be performed at the same time. Further, the switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion is, for example, when one movable body is in the maximum advance motion, the motion is interrupted to perform the retraction motion, and as soon as it returns to the origin position, the one movable body The minimum advancing motion and the retracting motion of each movable body including the can be performed at the same time. If the timing of switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion is just before the end of the initial motion (for example, 5 seconds before the end), even if the specific variation pattern designation command is received, it should not be switched to the shortened initial motion. Just do it.

For example, just before the button image is displayed in the action promotion effect, it is possible to perform a light gathering effect (light gathers in the center of the screen to form the button image) effect, and the light gathering effect is a effect that uses a large screen ), it may overlap with the execution period of the initial action, and it is possible to suitably notify that the button image is displayed.

For example, it is possible to cause the LED of the button to emit light (red ⇔ extinguished 150 ms cycle) when the button image is displayed in the action promoting effect, and the light emission mode in the light emission pattern emphasizes the movable body that performs the initial action. not included in the pattern.

In addition, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B at the start of the initial action (confirmation of the vibration motor 635E and notification of the start of the initial). At least one of the vibration period, period, and button LED light emission mode during vibration differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration during button image display. .

Mode 14 (Electrical interruption just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the notice at the start is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation for which the advance notice is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 95 . FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the change before the start notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 95, after the variable display based on the predetermined losing variation pattern is started, the combinations of losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and immediately before the variable display ends (for example, The period during which the combination of missing symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fixed symbol display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the next variable display, etc. , about 5000 ms before the end of the variable display), the pachinko machine 1 is activated by a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and the pending memory is In some cases, although the variable display is resumed, the variable display ends immediately and the next variable display starts.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after receiving the power failure restoration designation command and the pattern confirmation command transmitted based on the restoration of the CPU 103, the next command Frame LEDs 9a and 9b, board top movable body LED 9d, board bottom movable body LED 9e, frame top movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off) until a certain variable display start designation command is received. , and the background sound (BGM) becomes a mode (for example, silence) corresponding to the restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. A restorative display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97), and it is notified that the power failure is being restored until the next command is received, that is, during the symbol fixed display period.

After that, based on the reception of the variable display start designation command and the variation pattern designation command, in the variable display notice effect determination process (step S132SG610), execution of the start notice is decided, and the change pattern and the decided notice effect are determined. and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g correspond to the predetermined display change in the advance notice at the time of start. At the same time, the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the advance notice at the time of start is started. In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) has elapsed after receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the start notice (introduction part) is started. be.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has passed since the power failure restoration designation command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, a result notification part is started in which the result of the advance notice at the time of start is notified.

In the advance notice at the start (result notification part), as shown in FIGS. If the initial motion of the movable body is being executed when the reporting part is started, the visibility of the result reporting part, such as whether or not the pending display has changed, is hindered by the movable body that moves due to the initial motion. may misinterpret the results.

In the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the start notice is executed, the start notice (result notification part ) is started, the movable body is controlled so that the initial motion is completed before the start of the initial motion.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, if a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the start notice is executed, the period until the start notice (result notification part) starts (Fig. 48 (B2) to (B6)), the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the start notice (result notification part) and the initial action period are set so that the initial action of the movable body is completed within 48 (B2) to (B6)). there is

In the present embodiment, the number of pending memories when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display is 1 or more. When the variable display is started, the execution of the advance notice at the start is decided in the variable display, and if the execution of the advance notice at the start is decided at the start of the variable display, the advance notice at the start will be given after the variable display starts. By setting the time until the result notification part is executed to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds), the start time notice (result notification part) is executed. In the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the previous variation, the initial motion of the movable body is completed before the start notice (result notification part) is started, but the present invention is limited to this. If the CPU 103 determines that it is a specific variation pattern in which the notice at the start is executed when the start winning is generated, a specific effect control command that specifies specific information related to the specific variation pattern (for example, Winning production specification command for specifying execution of advance notice at start) is transmitted, and based on the specific production control command, the production control CPU 120 controls so that the initial operation is completed before the result notification part of the advance notice at start is started. Moreover, the execution period of the initial operation may be changed.

For example, if it is determined to be a specific variation pattern in which a notice at the start is executed when a start winning occurs during a predetermined variable display, it is specified that it is a specific variation pattern (with a notice at the start) A win effect designation command (specific information) is transmitted.

Then, after a power failure occurs just before the end of the predetermined variable display, when the power is turned on, a power failure recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (special figure information), a first reserved memory number notification command, a second reserved memory number A notification command is sent and the initial operation is started. Next, the design is stopped and displayed based on the transmission of the production design confirmation designation command, and after the design confirmation display period has passed, when the next variable display is started, the first reserved storage number notification command, the second 2 A pending memory count notification command, a game state background designation command, a first (or second) variable display start designation command, a pattern determination command, and a variation pattern designation command are transmitted.

Here, if a variation pattern specification command that specifies a specific variation pattern (with notice at the start) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000 ms) after receiving a power failure recovery specification command, the initial operation being executed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial action having a shorter action period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial action being executed.

Specifically, in the initial motion, the maximum advance motion and retraction motion of each movable body (reciprocation between the origin position and the effect position) are performed in order, while in the shortened initial motion, the minimum advance motion and retraction motion of each movable body are performed. An operation (for example, returning to the origin immediately after leaving the origin position) may be performed at the same time. Further, the switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion is, for example, when one movable body is in the maximum advance motion, the motion is interrupted to perform the retraction motion, and as soon as it returns to the origin position, the one movable body The minimum advancing motion and the retracting motion of each movable body including the can be performed at the same time. If the timing of switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion is just before the end of the initial motion (for example, 5 seconds before the end), even if the specific variation pattern designation command is received, it should not be switched to the shortened initial motion. Just do it.

Further, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B at the start of the initial action, and to vibrate the chance button 631B when the active hold changes to red in FIG. It is possible, and at least one of the vibration period, period, and button LED light emission mode during vibration differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration during the red color change. If the button vibrates when the color changes to red during the initial operation, the button vibration when the color changes to red is limited, and the limited button vibration is performed after the initial operation is completed.

Further, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B at the start of the initial action, and it is also possible to give a button vibration notice (an expectation level suggestion different from the start notice) in FIG. 48 (B1). At least one of the vibration period, period, and button LED light emission mode during vibration differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration notice. When button vibration advance notice is performed during the initial operation, the button vibration advance notice is limited, and the limited button vibration is performed after the end of the initial operation.

Mode 15 (Electrical interruption just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo continuous notice is executed)
Next, operation check control in the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the variation in which the pseudo continuous notice is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 96 . FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the variation in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 96, after the variable display based on the predetermined losing variation pattern is started, the combinations of losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and immediately before the variable display ends (for example, The period during which the combination of missing symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fixed symbol display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the next variable display, etc. , about 5000 ms before the end of the variable display), the pachinko machine 1 is activated by a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and the pending memory is In some cases, although the variable display is resumed, the variable display ends immediately and the next variable display starts.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after receiving the power failure restoration designation command and the pattern confirmation command transmitted based on the restoration of the CPU 103, the next command Frame LEDs 9a and 9b, board top movable body LED 9d, board bottom movable body LED 9e, frame top movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off) until a certain variable display start designation command is received. , and the background sound (BGM) becomes a mode (for example, silence) corresponding to the restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. A restorative display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97), and it is notified that the power failure is being restored until the next command is received, that is, during the symbol fixed display period.

After that, based on the receipt of the variable display start designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the variation pattern (pseudo-continuation) in which the pseudo-continuous notice that suggests whether the variable display is to be resumed is executed and the determined announcement effect Variable display is started in a manner corresponding to the (preview of movable body), and frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g correspond to the background (variation). In addition to emitting light in such a manner, output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the background (fluctuation) is started. Also, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) has passed after receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the background (fluctuation) is started.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has passed since the power failure restoration designation command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, a result notification part is started in which the result of the pseudo continuous notice is notified.

In the pseudo consecutive notice (result notification part), as shown in FIGS. 49(C6), (C10), and (C9), results such as whether or not the variable display has resumed are notified, so the result notification part starts. If the initial motion of the movable body is being executed when the initial motion is performed, the visibility of the result reporting part such as whether the variable display has resumed or not is hindered by the movable body that moves due to the initial motion, and the player misunderstands the result. there is a risk of

In the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the variation in which the pseudo-continuous notification is executed, the pseudo-continuous notification (result notification part ) is started, the movable body is controlled so that the initial motion is completed before the start of the initial motion.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the variation for which the pseudo-continuous notification is executed, the period until the pseudo-continuous notification (result notification part) is started (Fig. 48 (B2) to (B6)), the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the simulated continuous notice (result notification part) and the initial action period are set so that the initial action of the movable body is completed within 48 (B2) to (B6)). there is

In this embodiment, since the execution of the movable object advance notice is determined together with the execution of the pseudo-continuous advance notice, the movable object advance notice is executed when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display. is being executed, as described in the first embodiment, the effect operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B at the execution timing of the movable body notice is restricted, and effect display corresponding to the movable body notice is performed. Only sound effects may be output (see FIG. 66). Further, in the first embodiment, after the initial action is finished, the effects of the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B are executed. Although restricted, the effect operation of the advance notice of the movable body may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of pending memories when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display is 1 or more. When the variable display is started, the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice is determined, and if the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice is decided at the start of the variable display, the pseudo-continuous notice will be executed after the variable display is started. By setting the time until the result notification part is executed to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds), the variation in which the pseudo continuous notification (result notification part) is executed In the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the previous variation, the initial motion of the movable body is completed before the pseudo continuous notice (result notification part) is started, but the present invention is limited to this. If the CPU 103 determines that it is a specific variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive notice is executed when the start winning is generated, a specific effect control command that designates specific information related to the specific variation pattern (for example, Winning effect designation command for designating execution of pseudo consecutive notice) is transmitted, and based on the specific effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 controls the initial action to be completed before the result notification part of the pseudo consecutive notice is started. Moreover, the execution period of the initial operation may be changed.

For example, if it is determined to be a specific variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous notice is executed when a starting prize occurs during a predetermined variable display, the specified variation pattern (with pseudo-continuous notice) is specified. A win effect designation command (specific information) is transmitted.

Then, after a power failure occurs just before the end of the predetermined variable display, when the power is turned on, a power failure recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (special figure information), a first reserved memory number notification command, a second reserved memory number A notification command is sent and the initial operation is started. Next, the design is stopped and displayed based on the transmission of the performance design confirmation designation command, and after the design confirmation display period has passed, when the next variable display is started, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second 2 A pending memory count notification command, a game state background designation command, a first (or second) variable display start designation command, a pattern determination command, and a variation pattern designation command are transmitted.

Here, if a variation pattern specification command specifying a specific variation pattern (with pseudo continuous notice) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000 ms) after receiving a power failure recovery specification command, the initial operation being executed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial action having a shorter action period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial action being executed.

Specifically, in the initial motion, the maximum advance motion and retraction motion of each movable body (reciprocation between the origin position and the effect position) are performed in order, while in the shortened initial motion, the minimum advance motion and retraction motion of each movable body are performed. An operation (for example, returning to the origin immediately after leaving the origin position) may be performed at the same time. Further, the switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion is, for example, when one movable body is in the maximum advance motion, the motion is interrupted to perform the retraction motion, and as soon as it returns to the origin position, the one movable body The minimum advancing motion and the retracting motion of each movable body including the can be performed at the same time. If the timing of switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion is just before the end of the initial motion (for example, 5 seconds before the end), even if the specific variation pattern designation command is received, it should not be switched to the shortened initial motion. Just do it.

Also, for example, if the power supply is turned on after a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation before the movable body notice/pseudo continuous notice is executed, the movable body notice executed/restricted during the initial operation The effect action is performed during the introduction part of the pseudo-continuous effect (the short initial action is performed in FIG. 49 (C4), and the effect action in the restricted movable body announcement is performed in FIG. 49 (C5)).

Form 16 (relationship between initial operation and various displays in restoration during normal fluctuation)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays in recovery from normal fluctuation will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an operation example of the movable body when the operation check control is started based on power failure occurring during normal fluctuation and then power being turned on. FIG. 98 shows (A) a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 97(A), when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power failure occurs during variable display in the normal game state, the startup preparation displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing is displayed. After the display 132SG500 disappears, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is displayed in which characters "power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power is being restored, and the next command is received. It is notified that the power failure is being restored until

Then, during the period in which the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the detection switch provided in the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5 such as the gate switch 21, When it is detected that the player is playing a right-handed game, the effect control CPU 120 displays a left-handed promotion display 132SG530 consisting of characters "Return to left-handed" and a leftward arrow on the upper right side of the display screen. is displayed, and an operation to launch a game ball into the game area (first path) on the left side of the image display device 5 is promoted.

As shown in FIG. 97(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the rendering position, the rendering section 32a can move vertically in a hatched area E1 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. , the support portion 32b can move vertically in a hatched area E2 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. Further, when the under-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the effect position, the effect part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the oblique line area E3 surrounded by the two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the restoration in-progress display 132SG510 is displayed at a position where the effect portion 32a of the on-board movable body 32A and the effect portion 32c of the lower-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the left-handed promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the on-board movable body 32A. A portion of the effect portion 32a and the support portion 32b are displayed at positions where they may overlap.

Next, the relationship between various displays when the upper-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B perform the initial motion will be described with reference to FIGS. 98(A) and (B). 98(A) and (B) show the relationship between the upper-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B and the left-handed promotion display 132SG530, and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (Fig. 84, (see FIG. 93)).

As shown in FIG. 98(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either of the display 132SG510 during recovery and the display 132SG530 promoting left-handed hitting, so the player can All of the display becomes visible (see FIG. 97(A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, a part of the effect part 32a and the support part 32b overlap on the front side of the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530, so that the player can promote left-handed hitting. Visual recognition of the display 132SG530 becomes difficult (or impossible) (see FIG. 97(B)). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes and the left-handed promotion display 132SG530 can be visually recognized. , it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the display 132SG510 during restoration (see FIG. 97(C)).

When returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same. Since the moving speed of the retracting motion in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the performance position to the origin position is slower, the overlapping time is longer during the retracting motion than during the advancing motion, as shown in FIG. 98(A). Since it becomes longer, the time during which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize becomes longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98(A), when the underboard movable body 32B is positioned at the origin position, it overlaps with any of the left-handed promotion display 132SG530, the recovery-in-progress display 132SG510, and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. Therefore, the player can see all the displays (see FIG. 97(A)).

Next, while the lower board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the production position, and after reaching the production position, the display during restoration 132SG510 overlaps the production part 32a on the front side. As a result, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the display 132SG510 during restoration, but since it does not overlap with the display 132SG530 promoting left-handed throwing, the player can visually recognize the display 132SG530 promoting left-handed throwing ( See FIGS. 97(D) and (E)). Incidentally, even when returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, when the initial operation is performed when the power is cut off during the variable display in the normal state, and the hot start is activated and the recovery is performed, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530. It is set so that the time during which the player is difficult (or impossible) to visually recognize is shortened. Specifically, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the left-handed promotion display 132SG530 when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and is stopped at the production position or the origin position. Since they do not overlap, the visibility of the left-handed promotion display 132SG530 is less likely to be hindered by the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial movement of the left-handed promotion display 132SG530.

Also, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-handed promotion display 132SG530 is longer than the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. The hitting promotion display 132SG430 is displayed in a time-saving state or a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. Since an opportunity to generate a prize may be missed due to a hitting operation, the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 preferably maintains visibility compared to the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can display a left-handed operation promotion display 132SG530 and output a left-handed operation promotion notification sound as a left-handed operation promotion notification. When operation confirmation control is performed based on the fact that it has been started up, the left-handed operation promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, while the left-handed operation promotion notification sound is limited, and after the power failure occurs, hot start When the operation confirmation control is performed based on the activation in , it is preferable that while the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, the left-hand hitting operation promotion notification sound is output. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable left-handed operation promotion notification in consideration of the situation when the power is turned on.

In addition, when a game ball enters the gate switch 21 or the like provided on the right game area side in the normal state, it is possible to perform left-handed operation promotion notification, and in the normal state, the gate switch 21 has a specific number of game balls. (For example, 5 pieces) can perform a special left-handed operation promotion notification with a higher priority than the left-handed operation promotion notification based on the entry, and the period during which the movable body operates by operation confirmation control (for example , 20 seconds). It is possible to prevent the movable body operated by the action confirmation control from interfering with the special left-handed operation promotion notification.

Form 17, 18 (relationship between initial operation and various displays in recovery during jackpot)
Next, the relationship between the initial action and various displays in recovery from a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an operation example of the movable body when the operation check control is started based on the fact that power is cut off during the jackpot and then the power is turned on. FIG. 100A is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 100B is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 99(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start after power failure occurs during the round game in the jackpot game state, the startup preparation displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing After the display 132SG500 disappears, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is displayed in which characters "power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power is being restored, and the next command is received. It is notified that the power failure is being restored until

In addition, along with the power failure recovery designation command, when receiving a control command indicating that it is in a jackpot game state, such as during opening designation command or after opening designation command, during the period when the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed, the right side of the display screen A right hitting promotion display 132SG430 is displayed above, and the operation of hitting the game ball into the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5 is promoted.

As shown in FIG. 97(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the rendering position, the rendering section 32a can move vertically in a hatched area E1 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. , the support portion 32b can move vertically in a hatched area E2 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. Further, when the under-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the effect position, the effect part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the oblique line area E3 surrounded by the two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed at a position where the effect portion 32a of the on-board movable body 32A and the effect portion 32c of the lower-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 is displayed on the on-board movable body 32A. A portion of the effect portion 32a and the support portion 32b are displayed at positions where they may overlap.

Next, the relationship between various displays when the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B perform the initial motion will be described with reference to FIGS. 100(A) and (B).

As shown in FIG. 100(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is positioned at the origin position, it overlaps neither the recovery-in-progress display 132SG510 nor the right-handing promotion display 132SG430. All of the display becomes visible (see FIG. 99(A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the supporting portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the left-handed promotion display 132SG530 ( or impossible) (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 can be visually recognized. , it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the display 132SG510 during restoration (see FIG. 99(B)).

When returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same. Since the moving speed of the retracting motion in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the effect position to the origin position is slower, the overlapping time is longer during the retracting motion than during the advancing motion, as shown in FIG. 100(A). Since it becomes longer, the time during which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize becomes longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100(A), when the lower board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 or the recovery-in-progress display 132SG510. , all displays can be visually recognized (see FIG. 99(A)).

Next, while the lower board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the production position, and after reaching the production position, the display during restoration 132SG510 overlaps the production part 32a on the front side. As a result, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the display during recovery 132SG510, but since it does not overlap with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, the player can visually recognize the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 ( See FIG. 99(C)). Incidentally, even when returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, after the power failure occurs during the round game in the jackpot game state, when the initial operation is performed when it is activated by the hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A receives information corresponding to the round game ( For example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played display 132SG453, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played display 132SG454, etc.) are superimposed on the front side of the predetermined area (see FIG. 83A). Rather, it operates so as not to overlap the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, so the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be hindered. That is, a predetermined area where information corresponding to the round game (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.) is displayed (Fig. 83 (A ))), it is preferable to operate so that the period overlapping on the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period superimposed on the front side.

In addition, after a power failure occurs during the variable display in the normal state, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power is the production operation of the movable body notice that the support portion 32b overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (the movement between the origin position and the intermediate position). On the other hand, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power after the power failure occurs during the variable display during the big win or the time saving state overlaps with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. It is preferable that the action is performed in an action mode that does not include the performance action (the reciprocating action between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the advance notice of the movable body.

In addition, when the round game movable body production is performed at the start of the round game, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power is the operation that does not include the production operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the round game movable body production It is preferably performed in a manner.

In addition, after power failure occurs during the round game in the jackpot game state, when the initial operation is performed when it is activated by hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A is superimposed on the front side of the restoration in-progress display 132SG510. Since it operates so as not to overlap the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be hindered. That is, it is preferable to operate so that the period overlapping on the front side of the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period superimposed on the front side of the display 132SG510 during restoration.

In addition, after a power failure occurs during the variable display in the normal state, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power is the production operation of the movable body notice that the support portion 32b overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (the movement between the origin position and the intermediate position). On the other hand, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power after the power failure occurs during the variable display during the big win or the time saving state overlaps with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. It is preferable that the action is performed in an action mode that does not include the performance action (the reciprocating action between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the advance notice of the movable body.

In addition, when the round game movable body production is performed at the start of the round game, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power is the operation that does not include the production operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the round game movable body production It is preferably performed in a manner.

Also, the time during which the under-board movable body 32B stays at the effect position overlapping the restorative display 132SG510 may be shorter in the initial motion than in the motion of the movable body effect. For example, when power is turned on after a power failure occurs while variable display is not being executed, the stay time T1 of the movable body at the production position in the initial action and the stay at the movable body production position in the movable body production are shown. It is preferable that the time T2 is longer than the stay time T3 of the movable body at the presentation position in the initial operation when the power is turned on after the power failure occurs during execution of the variable display (T1=T2>T3). . By doing so, the power failure occurs during the advantageous state, and then the movable body that operates by the operation confirmation control that is performed when the power is turned on is not superimposed on the restoration display 132SG510 for a long period of time. , it is possible to provide a game machine which does not hinder determination of whether or not it is under restoration.

Form 19 (Relationship between initial operation and various displays in recovery during time saving)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays in restoration during time saving will be described with reference to FIG. 101 . FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an operation example of the movable body when the operation check control is started based on power failure occurring during the time saving and then power being turned on.

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power failure occurs during the variable display in the time saving state, the startup preparation display displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing After 132SG500 disappears, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is displayed in which characters "power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power is being restored, until the next command is received. It is notified that the power is being restored.

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the rendering position, the rendering section 32a can move up and down in a hatched area E1 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. , the support portion 32b can move vertically in a hatched area E2 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. Further, when the under-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the effect position, the effect part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the oblique line area E3 surrounded by the two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed at a position where the effect portion 32a of the on-board movable body 32A and the effect portion 32c of the lower-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 is displayed on the on-board movable body 32A. A portion of the effect portion 32a and the support portion 32b are displayed at positions where they may overlap (see FIG. 101(C)).

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is positioned at the origin position, it does not overlap with either of the recovery display 132SG510 and the right-handing promotion display 132SG430. All displays are visible.

Next, when the initial motion of the on-board movable body 32A is started, the variable display is stopped based on the transmission of the pattern confirmation command, the display of the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is finished, and the second background display 132SG320 is displayed. When displayed, when the board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the support portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, so that the player can visually recognize the left-handed promotion display 132SG530. becomes difficult (or impossible) (not shown). After that, the area where the on-board movable body 32A passes and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is displayed becomes visible, but when it descends to the production position, the production section 32a is displayed on the front side of a part of the restoration display 132SG510. overlap, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the in-restoration display 132SG510 (see FIG. 101(B)).

When returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same. Since the movement speed of the retracting motion in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the performance position to the origin position is slower, the overlapping time of the retracting motion is longer than that of the advancing motion. It will take longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101(A), when the lower board movable body 32B is positioned at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 or the recovery-in-progress display 132SG510. , all of the displays can be visually recognized.

Next, while the lower board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the production position, and after reaching the production position, the display during restoration 132SG510 overlaps the production part 32a on the front side. As a result, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the display during recovery 132SG510, but since it does not overlap with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, the player can visually recognize the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 ( See FIG. 101(C)). Incidentally, even when returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, after a power failure occurs during the variable display in the time saving state, when the initial operation is performed when it is started by hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A outputs information corresponding to the time saving state (for example , presentation mode display 132SG221, time-saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, etc.) are superimposed on the front side of the predetermined area (see FIGS. 101(B) and (C)). Since the operation is performed so as not to overlap the front side of the specific area (see FIG. 101 (A)) where the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the confirmation control is displayed, the display of the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is finished. When the normal state is restored, the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. That is, information corresponding to the time saving state (for example, production mode display 132SG221, time saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive homes / total number of balls displayed 132SG454, etc.) is displayed in a predetermined area (see FIGS. 101 (B) (C)) It is preferable to operate so that the period overlapping on the front side of the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period superimposed on the front side.

In addition, after a power failure occurs during the variable display in the normal state, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power is the production operation of the movable body notice that the support portion 32b overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (the movement between the origin position and the intermediate position). On the other hand, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power after the power failure occurs during the variable display during the big win or the time saving state overlaps with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. It is preferable that the action is performed in an action mode that does not include the performance action (the reciprocating action between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the advance notice of the movable body.

In addition, when the round game movable body production is performed at the start of the round game, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power is the operation that does not include the production operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the round game movable body production It is preferably performed in a manner.

Also, in forms 17-19, on-board movable body 32A and under-board movable body 32B, right-handed promotion display 132SG430, restoration display 132SG510, information corresponding to time saving state (for example, production mode display 132SG221, time saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.), but in the present embodiment, in the operation confirmation control, the above various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs the initial movement and Although the form of comparing the total overlapping time has been exemplified, regardless of whether or not the various displays are displayed, when the movable body performs the initial motion, the time overlapping the display area where the various displays are displayed is the above. As long as they are related.

Forms 21 to 24 (Startup order when executing initial motion control)
In the characteristic portion 132SG, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started or hot-started), the special symbol display device 4A, 4B and a special lamp, each LED (frame LED9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED9d, under-board movable body LED9e, on-frame movable body LED9f, chance button LED9g) was exemplified form to light at the same time, The present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting timing of the special figure lamp and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on) , the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g) may be lit at different timings.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 102A to 102G, when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 first starts to display the startup preparation display 132SG500. At the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds similar to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62) has elapsed from the start of display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, the lighting of the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B is started. (See FIGS. 102(A) and (B)).

Also, at this timing, the power supply to the solenoids 81 and 82 is resumed, so that the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are brought into the power-off state. That is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the power is cut off in the state where no hits occur, and then it is started by hot start. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and is started by a hot start after being cut off during the interval period, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are closed again. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the power is cut off during the occurrence of a normal game, and then started by hot start, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is opened and the power is cut off and then started by a hot start, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state. becomes.

After lighting these special lamps, and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in a state of power failure, each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e , frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) start to light up.

After that, as the initialization notification, the image display device 5 displays an initialization notification image, and each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g ), after the lighting in the initialization notification mode and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are started, initial operation control is performed by the board upper movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, The confirmation operation of the chance button 631B is executed (FIGS. 102(D) to (G)).

In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is not executed and the power is cut off and the cold start is performed, as shown in FIG. After that, first, when 3 seconds have passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 started to be displayed on the image display device 5, a power-on designation command is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 (power supply by the effect control CPU 120). Receipt of input designation command) is performed. When the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized at the timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are started to be lit, and the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized and the variable winning ball device is activated. 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 will be in the initial state (closed state).

In addition, the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B at this time emit light in the mode when the variable display result is lost as the initial light emission mode, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B at this time may emit light in a variable display result other than a loss or in a manner different from any variable display result.

In addition, after the lighting of these special lamps and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in the initial state, each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, Lighting of the frame upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g) is started.

Then, when 2 seconds have passed since the effect control CPU 120 received the power-on designation command (5 seconds have passed since the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500), the image display device 5 replaces the startup preparation display 132SG500 with the initial The display of the change notification display 132SG600 is started. After the initialization notification display 132SG600 starts to be displayed, each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) emits light in an initialization notification mode. is started, as an initial operation, confirmation operations of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the frame top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are executed.

By doing so, the power-on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily recognized by the player and the store clerk of the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed by the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, and the game A player or a store clerk of a game parlor where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed can confirm the lighting of the special lamp which greatly affects the game without being distracted by the confirming operation of each movable body. .

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being performed, the power is cut off and the hot start is performed, as shown in FIG. After that, first, when 3 seconds have passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 was started to be displayed on the image display device 5, a power failure recovery designation command is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 (power failure by the effect control CPU 120 Receipt of recovery designation command) is performed. When the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized at the timing, lighting of the special symbol lamps constituting these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B (and variable display of the special symbol by blinking of the special symbol lamps) is started. , the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are brought into the state before power cutoff. In addition, when 2 seconds have passed since the production control CPU 120 received the power failure recovery designation command (5 seconds have passed since the display of the start preparation display 132SG500), the image display device 5 is restored instead of the start preparation display 132SG500. The display of the middle display 132SG510 is started. After that, each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is turned on, and the upper board movable body 32A and the lower board movable body 32A are turned on as an initial operation. 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and confirmation operation of chance button 631B are executed.

When the variable display that has been executed before the power failure is stopped during the display of the activation preparation display 132SG500 and a new variable display is started, the new variable display is started as shown in FIG. At the stop timing of the variable display, the display of the display during restoration 132SG510 ends.

That is, the variable display of the special symbols is resumed while the boot preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 with the number of pending memories being 0, and the resumed variable display is during the display of the boot preparation display 132SG500. In the case of stopping, when a new variable display is started due to the occurrence of a new starting prize, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is switched to the restoration display 132SG510 during the new variable display. Furthermore, the display of the restoration in-progress display 132SG510 ends when the new variable display stops.

In the example shown in FIG. 103(B), during the restoration display 132SG510 which is executing the variable display, as the initial operation, the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are activated. A confirmation operation is initiated.

It should be noted that, as in FIG. 103(B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the image display device is started by hot start. 5, when the variable display that has been in progress since before the power failure is not stopped while the boot preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. After the display of the middle display 132SG510 is started, the variable display is stopped (at the same time, the display of the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is finished).

Also, as in FIG. 103 (B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the image display device is started by hot start. 5, even if the variable display that has been executed before the power failure is stopped while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the case where the pending memory exists when the variable display is stopped is shown in FIG. 104(B). As shown, a new variable display is started based on the pending memory after the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and the variable display is stopped. In this case, the display of the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 ends at the timing when the new variable display stops.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 103(A), (B) and FIGS. 104(A), (B), the background image and effect image corresponding to the variable display are displayed on the image display device 5. state, the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is not started. It is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being hindered by this.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 104 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the variable display is started by hot start. does not stop during the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) lights up and the initial operation is performed. As an example, the confirmation operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are started simultaneously, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the variable display is not stopped during the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 when starting up by hot start. LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and board movable body 32A and lower board movable body 32A as an initial operation. 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the confirmation operation of the chance button 631B may be started at different timings.

For example, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the variable display is started by hot start. is not stopped during the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, during the display period of the startup preparation display 132SG500 (more precisely, two seconds after the CPU 120 for effect control receives the power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103) each The LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) are started to light up in a manner corresponding to the state of restoration, and display 132SG510 during restoration. During the display period of (1), confirmation operations of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the frame top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial actions may be started.

It should be noted that each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) is lit in a manner corresponding to the restoration being performed, indicating that preparation for start-up is performed. 132SG500 may be continued even after the display of 132SG500 is finished, for example, when the confirmation operation of each movable body is finished.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 105 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the variable display is started by hot start. is stopped during display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 and a new variable display is not started, as shown in FIG. While starting to display a background image corresponding to being stopped, each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) Lighting may be performed in a mode corresponding to the image.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 103 to 105, the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, that is, in the state where the variable display can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1, after the power failure occurs, the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may experience a power failure even in a jackpot game state in which variable display is not executed.

Regarding the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off in the jackpot game state and activated by hot start, the power is cut off when the special variable prize winning ball device 7 (big prize winning opening) is in the open state during the round game. If it occurs, as shown in FIG. 106(A), after the power failure, the CPU 103 performs the effect control when three seconds have passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 started to be displayed on the image display device 5. Transmission of a power failure restoration designation command to the use CPU 120 (reception of a power failure restoration designation command by the effect control CPU 120) is performed. When the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized at the timing, lighting of the special symbol lamps constituting these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B (and variable display of the special symbol by blinking of the special symbol lamps) is started. , the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are brought into the state before power cutoff. That is, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened.

In addition, when 2 seconds have passed since the production control CPU 120 received the power failure recovery designation command (5 seconds have passed since the display of the start preparation display 132SG500), the image display device 5 is restored instead of the start preparation display 132SG500. The display of the middle display 132SG510 is started, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) corresponding to being restored Lighting in the mode is started.

After that, during the restoration display 132SG510, confirmation operations of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the frame top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are executed as initial actions.

After the initial action is finished and the round game is finished, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the open state to the closed state according to the end of the round game. Then, when the next round game starts, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the closed state to the open state, and the image display device 5 starts displaying an image corresponding to the round game, and each LED ( Frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) start to light up in a mode corresponding to the round game.

In the example of FIG. 106(A), power failure occurs during the round game, and when the pachinko game machine is started by hot start, the round game before the power failure ends after the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed. Although the case has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. Regarding the case where the previous round game ends while the activation preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and the next round game is started (the special variable winning ball device 7 is once closed from the open state and then opened again). , even after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, until the operation of confirming the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as the initial action is completed. , LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) may be lit in a manner corresponding to the state of recovery.

As shown in FIGS. 106(A) and 106(B), when power failure occurs when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state (during the round game) as a jackpot game, the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by hot start, each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) lights up in a manner corresponding to the round game Since the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is not executed when the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are lit in a mode corresponding to the round game, so that upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, It is possible to prevent troubles in confirming whether the confirmation operation of the chance button 631B is normally performed.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 103 to 105, the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, and described the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs, but FIG. 107 (A) As shown in , the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state before the power failure occurs, and the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of FIG. 107A, the performance control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command. to the end of the display of the start preparation display 132SG500), when a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state, that is, during the display of the start preparation display 132SG500, the second start In the event that a prize is won, after the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the image display device 5 displays the restoration display 132SG510 until the variable display stop timing corresponding to the second start prize is displayed, and the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed. As an initial operation control during display, confirmation operations of the board top movable body 32A, board bottom movable body 32B, frame top movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B may be started.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state before the occurrence of power failure, and the activation preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of FIG. 107(A), the effect control CPU 120 is A case where a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state during the two seconds from the reception of the power failure recovery designation command to the end of the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, the variable display of normal symbols has been executed before the occurrence of power failure, and the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by hot start, so that the image display device 5 displays the startup preparation display 132SG500. In the event that a normal hit occurs, as shown in FIG. 107(B), initial operation control is performed to check the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B. The variable winning ball device 6B may be controlled to be in the open state from the timing before the start of .

As described above, by executing the control of the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIGS. 107(A) and 107(B), the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101 are executed as the initial operation control. , the confirmation operation of the chance button 631B can be suitably executed.

In the example of FIG. 107(A), after the game ball has won the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 is switched to the display of the restoration display 132SG510. is not limited to this, and the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 may be switched to the display of the restoration display 132SG510 at the timing when the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state.

106A and 106B, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off in the jackpot game state and activated by hot start, the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is in the middle of the round game. 108, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening ) is in the open state during a round game, the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started, and the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 (Fig. In the example shown in 108, the special variable winning ball device 7 is temporarily changed from the open state to the closed state during 2 seconds from when the effect control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command until the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends. When the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the closed state to the open state again in the next round game, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 may be started after the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 is finished. .

As described above, by executing the control of the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 108, the confirming operation of the board upper movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is preferable as the initial operation control. It is possible to execute

In mode 3, a part of the fanfare effect started while the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed cannot be visually recognized by the player, and when the boot preparation display 132SG500 is hidden, the part that cannot be visually recognized continues. While the fanfare effect can be visually recognized, in forms 21 to 24, the effect display corresponding to the variable display started during the display of the activation preparation display 132SG500 is rendered invisible by displaying the restoration display. there is In other words, in the variable display, since there must be no mistake in the important information that is related to whether or not a big hit will be made, it is controlled so that it cannot be visually recognized. Since there is an operation direction notification part to promote the operation, it is controlled so that it can be visually recognized.

Form 25 (Relationship Between Initialization Notification Image and Initial Action) <Modification>
Next, the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation check control. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation check control.

In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start process after the power failure occurs, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing. ) has passed and the CPU 103 has recovered, a power-on designation command, a game state background designation command (normal background), and a customer waiting demo designation command are transmitted. Then, based on the reception of these effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the power has been turned on with initialization (started by cold start processing), and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b and the on-board movable body LED 9d , the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a predetermined initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting initialization notification sounds (FIGS. 61 and 62). reference).

In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5, the start preparation display 132SG500 is hidden, and based on the game state background designation command (normal background) Although the first background display 132SG310 is displayed, in this modified example, when the power is turned on with initialization, the initial display as described in FIG. Change notification display 132SG600 is displayed.

In this case, after starting the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initial operation by the operation confirmation control is started, and after the initial operation ends, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 is finished. By doing so, it is possible to quickly confirm that the pachinko game machine 1 has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body operated by the operation confirmation control, and the movable body operated by the operation confirmation control. It is possible to prevent the confirmation of whether or not the visual initialization notification has been completed from being hindered.

In addition, operation check control after power-on with initialization (start-up with cold start processing) is more effective than the period from power-on without initialization (start-up with hot-start processing) until operation check control is performed. is longer. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 from becoming invisible due to the operation confirmation control being performed immediately when the power is turned on with initialization.

Also, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds) and disappears after the predetermined execution period ends, and the start winning occurs during the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600. However, it is preferable that the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not started. By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform the operation check control.

Also, if the execution period of the variable display started based on the occurrence of the start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the display of the initialization display continues until the end of the execution period of the variable display. It may be done by By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform the operation check control.

Incidentally, when the starting prize is generated while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is being displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 may be immediately hidden and an effect image corresponding to the variable display may be displayed.

Also, after turning on the power without initialization (activation by hot start processing), the background display may be performed based on the game state background designation command without displaying the initialization notification display 132SG600. By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform the operation check control.

In addition, as in this modification, when the power is turned on with initialization (activation in the cold start process), after the initialization notification display 132SG600 is started to be displayed, the initial operation by the operation confirmation control is started. 109, in which the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 is completed after the initial operation is completed, the starting prize is generated after the initialization notification display 132SG600 is completed, and the movable body announcement is executed, as shown in FIG. is determined, while the advance notice of the movable object is executed, as shown in FIG. As described in Embodiment 1, during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, not only the performance operation by the advance notice of the movable body but also the effect display and the output of the effect sound are restricted, and the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 is terminated. Afterwards, it is possible to perform the performance operation by the advance notice of the movable body.

Form 26 (Operation Confirmation Control) <Modification>
Next, an operation example of operation confirmation control executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 14. FIG. FIGS. 111A to 111D are diagrams showing an operation example of operation confirmation control during cold start processing as a modified example. FIGS. 112A to 112D are diagrams showing an effect operation example of the win/fail button effect as a modified example.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57A to 57J, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when the power is turned on), the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs cold start processing. In the operation confirmation control executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on activation (or hot start processing), first, after the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the effect position and stops (FIG. 57 (B )), the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(C)). Next, after the chance button 631B moves downward from the effect position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(D)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the effect position and stops at the origin position. (See FIG. 57(E)). Next, after the lower board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops (see FIG. 57(F)), the frame top movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops. (See FIG. 57(G)). Next, after the upper frame movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the production position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(H)), the lower board movable body 32B moves downward from the production position and returns to the origin position. It stops, and the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 57(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) elapses, the initialization notification ends, and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends. can be changed to

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111A, the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is positioned at the origin position, and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is positioned at the origin position. As shown in FIG. 111(B), the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is positioned at the production position and the frame The separation distance L2 between the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B when the chance button 631B as the side movable body is positioned at the performance position is shorter.

In this modification, the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B, which have the above relationship, are set so that the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A are the origins so that their initial operation periods overlap in the operation confirmation control. Movement from the position to the performance position is started at the same time (see FIG. 111(B)), and then the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position so that the respective initial action periods do not overlap. After that (see FIG. 111(C)), the on-board movable body 32A may move upward from the performance position and stop at the origin position (see FIG. 111(D)).

By doing so, the first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B) can operate normally at the production position, and the second movable body (for example, the on-board movable body 32A) can normally operate at the production position. It is possible to simplify the confirmation work by simultaneously confirming that it is operable, and at the same time, the operation of the first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B), which is difficult to confirm, from the performance position to the origin position. , the movement of the second movable body (for example, the on-board movable body 32A) from the performance position to the origin position can be confirmed individually.

In this modified example, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the effect position, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the initial action periods overlap, for example, one of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A starts moving from the origin position and stops at the performance position, while the other moves from the origin position. It is sufficient if the movement to the performance position is started. In other words, at least a part of the advancement operation period of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A should overlap.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lower board movable body 32B is raised from the origin position to the production position in the hit/fail button effect. (For example, the under-board movable body 32B) may be used. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 112(A), in the success/fail button effect, when the operation promotion effect is being executed in the operation effective period or the operation effective period has passed, the on-board movable body 32A and the board In order not to overlap the performance operation period with the lower movable body 32B, the board top movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 112 (B)), and the board bottom movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position. (See FIG. 112(C)) to lift up the upper board movable body 32A. The on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B may simultaneously move from the performance position to the origin position (see FIG. 112(D)).

As for the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, which perform the performance action in which the first movable body and the second movable body contact (or overlap) in this manner, the operation confirmation control is performed as shown in FIG. 112(B). It is preferable to execute the initial motion in a motion mode that does not include the effect motion described in (D) (for example, a mode in which the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B are moved separately). By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform the operation check control.

In addition, an effect position sensor 132SG134 (see FIG. 2) capable of detecting that the second movable body (for example, the lower board movable body 32B) is placed at the effect position is provided, and is placed at the effect position in the operation confirmation control. The movement of the first movable body (for example, board top movable body 32A) toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (for example, board bottom movable body 32B) is detected by effect position sensor 132SG134. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform the operation confirmation control appropriately.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the movable bodies including the first movable body and the second movable body are arranged at the origin position in the operation confirmation control before the long initial movement control is started. When it is not, return control (for example, short initial operation control of board top movable body 32A, board bottom movable body 32B, chance button 631B, frame top movable body 132SG101) is performed to move the movable body to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform the operation check control.

Form 27 (operation check control)
Further, as shown in FIG. 57, the under-board movable body 32B provided on the game board 2 and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101 provided on the opening/closing door frame 3a can perform an initial action, and the under-board movable body 32B can perform an initial operation. moves from the origin position to the production position and stops at the production position (see FIG. 57(F)), the frame movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the production position, and then returns from the production position to the origin position. It is designed to move (see FIGS. 57(G) to (I)).

By doing so, it is indicated that the operation confirmation control is not finished by the first movable body (for example, the lower board movable body 32B) arranged at the effect position in the operation confirmation control, and the first movable body (for example , board lower movable body 32B) is placed at the production position, the second movable body (for example, the upper frame movable body 132SG101) is started to operate, so that the second movable body (for example, the upper frame movable body 132SG101 ) can be prevented from overlooking the operation check control.

Specifically, the frame-side movable bodies such as the frame-side movable body 132SG101 and the chance button 631B are easily mischievous because they can be touched by players. If the board-side movable body fails to operate normally in the same way as the movable body, if the initial movement of the board-side movable body is performed again, the board-side movable body can be intentionally moved to a dead end state ( See FIG. 113(A)).

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. Display an error image related to the malfunction of (for example, a telop such as "* Please check the frame movable body". Delete it when the frame side movable body can operate normally) on the background image, Initial operation at the time of error judgment of maximum 5 times (the number of times is more than that of the movable body on the board side, and the conditions up to the dead end are tightened considering that it is easy to be mischievous) (Only the movable body on the frame side. The operation mode is power-on.) If the frame-side movable body cannot operate normally even after the above-described operation is performed, only the frame-side movable body may be shifted to the dead end state.

In addition, an effect position sensor 132SG104 (see FIG. 2) capable of detecting that the second movable body (for example, the frame upper movable body 132SG101) is placed at the effect position is provided, and is arranged at the effect position in the operation confirmation control. The operation of the first movable body (for example, the lower board movable body 32B) toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (for example, the lower board movable body 32B) is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG104. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform the operation confirmation control appropriately.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these examples, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 or the like is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner inside the machine and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls given according to winning are added, the number of game balls used in the game is increased. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the amount is subtracted and stored. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be further described below based on the embodiment.

[Mode 1] (No. 1)
The game machine of form 1 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The size is smaller than the decoration identification information, and it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can reduce the size corresponding to the decoration pattern). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 134) for moving the decoration identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is switching display (for example, switching display; see FIG. 135(E)) for switching to other reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information,
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one decoration identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decoration identification information, and the reduced identification information is switched a plurality of times during a period until the display of the decoration identification information is finished. is possible (for example, one decoration pattern is displayed, and in the period Ta2 until the display of the decoration pattern finishes displaying, the small patterns are switched five times to the small patterns of the losing combination, and each is displayed over the period Ta1. (period Ta1<period Ta2), see FIG. 135(E)),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of a combination of the decoration identification information (for example, a combination of decoration patterns such as "111" and "326"),
The display result of the variable display of the reduced identification information is composed of a combination of the reduced identification information (for example, a combination of small patterns such as "111" and "326"),
When a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to the non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the variable display of the decoration identification information is performed. Before the display result is derived, the reduced identification information is switched so that the combination of the reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination in the variable display of the reduced identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , If it is decided to stop display the fixed decorative pattern of the lost combination (for example, "326"), start the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the lost combination (for example, "326") 135(E)), before stopping the display of the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the variable display of the reduced identification information is performed before the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is derived. Since the reduced identification information is switched so as not to become a combination of reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination, the non-specific combination is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information from the combination of the reduced identification information in the variable display of the reduced identification information It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest because the derivation is not known in advance.

[Mode 2] (No. 2)
The game machine of form 2 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of a combination of the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area among the plurality of decoration identification information displayed in the display area (for example, the decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C). , The part that becomes a big hit or loses by combining decoration patterns such as "111" and "326" stopped at the stop position of 5R),
When a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to non-specific display results other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information is effectively displayed. When stopped in the area, it is possible to display the decoration identification information in an enlarged form from the normal size and then return it to the normal size (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is out and variable based on the variation pattern). 149 to 151, 155, and 156), a portion that can execute a change stop action when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display;
When enlarging and displaying the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area, the decoration identification information not located in the effective display area is not displayed in an enlarged manner (see Modification 3 of FIG. 170),
During execution of the variable display of the decoration identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed. (For example, even when the effect control CPU 120 is executing the fluctuation stop action when temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, A portion where the loop light emission control of the movable body lamp 9d is performed (see FIGS. 155 and 156)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to the non-specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is displayed. By once enlarging the display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area, and to draw the player's line of sight even when a non-specific combination that is essentially meaningless to the player is derived. It can be pinned to the area where the decoration identification information is displayed. Also, when enlarging and displaying the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area, since the decoration identification information not located in the effective display area is not enlarged and displayed, the player's line of sight can be focused on the decoration identification information stopped in the effective area. In addition, the load of display control can be reduced. Further, even when the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed, so that the control of the light emission means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The game machine of form 3-1 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes front movement display (for example, scroll display) in which the decoration identification information is moved from the depth side toward the front side while increasing transparency and erased (see FIGS. 141 to 143). ,
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
While the decoration identification information is displayed moving forward, the other decoration identification information located on the far side with respect to the one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the other decoration identification information is displayed. While the character image of the information is displayed, the number image is not displayed, and after the one decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the other decoration identification information is displayed (for example, FIG. 143). As shown in (A) and (B), one decorative design (for example, decorative design "2") is displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R between frame-in display and frame-out display. Another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located on the far side so as to partially overlap with the decorative pattern "2" may be visible through the decorative pattern "2". While the character of the character display portion 002SG052 with the pattern "3" is displayed, the number ("3") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in FIG. 143(C), The part where the number (“3”) of the number display part 002SG051 of the decoration design “3” is displayed after the decoration design “2” is erased.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing the transparency and erased, the other decoration identification information located on the back side is displayed. The decoration identification information is visible through the one decoration identification information. At this time, the other decoration identification information located on the back side is displayed with the character image but not with the number image. Since the numeric image of the other decoration identification information is displayed after the one decoration identification information is erased, the numeric image of the one decoration identification information and the numeric image of the other decoration identification information are displayed overlapping each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the numeric image of the decoration identification information located on the front side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The game machine of form 3-2 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a forward moving display (for example, scroll display) in which the decoration identification information is moved from the near side toward the far side while increasing transparency and erased (see FIGS. 144 and 145). ,
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
While the decoration identification information is displayed moving forward, other decoration identification information located on the far side with respect to the one decoration identification information is visible through the one decoration identification information, and the one decoration identification is visible. While the character image of the information is displayed, the number image is not displayed, and after the other decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the one decoration identification information is displayed (for example, FIG. 144). As shown in (G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the back side, so frame-in display is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After the frame is displayed, another decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) located on the back side so as to partially overlap with one decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern "3") is displayed. "2") may be visible through the decorative pattern "3".At this time, while the character of the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, the number ( "2") is a portion that is difficult to see (or is not displayed).Modification 1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is moved from the front side toward the back side while increasing the transparency and is erased, the other decoration identification information positioned at the back side with respect to one decoration identification information is displayed. The decoration identification information is visible through the decoration identification information. At this time, the character image of the decoration identification information located on the front side is displayed, but the number image is not displayed. Since the numeric image of one decoration identification information is displayed after the other decoration identification information is erased, the numeric image of the other decoration identification information and the numeric image of the one decoration identification information are displayed overlapping each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the numeric image of the other decoration identification information located on the far side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Mode 4] (No. 5)
The game machine of form 5 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes rotating display in which the decoration identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 146 and 147),
The decoration identification information is in a semi-transparent state during the rotating display, and the decoration identification information is in a non-transparent state when the rotating display is stopped (see FIGS. 146 and 147),
The decoration identification information includes a number image (for example, number display unit 002SG051),
During the rotating display, the numeric image on the front side of the decoration identification information that is in a semi-transmissive state is displayed, while the numeric image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 147).
During the execution of the variable display of the decoration identification information, predetermined light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period is repeatedly performed, and the predetermined light emission control is continued even during the rotating display. (For example, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in the high base state, based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 137 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern, the order of white, blue, and yellow A portion where the light emission pattern of may be repeatedly executed.Modified example.Refer to FIG. 157)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is rotated to display the front side and the back side of the decoration identification information repeatedly, the decoration identification information is in a semi-transparent state, so only the front side of the decoration identification information is displayed. In this case, the numeric image on the front side of the decoration identification information is displayed, but the numeric image on the back side is not displayed. The image and the numeric image on the back side are not displayed overlapping each other, and it is possible to prevent the numeric image on the front side from becoming difficult to understand. Further, since the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed even during the rotating display, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Mode 5] (No. 6)
The game machine of form 5 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-reach state after the ready-to-reach state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area when the specific display result is derived; A specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) in which the same type of decoration identification information stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, the reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed, and it is possible to execute the reach line suggesting effect to be erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggesting effect),
After entering the reach state, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is transmitted at a first transparency (for example, a first transmittance F1) until the reach line suggestion effect is executed. state, and after executing the reach line suggestion effect, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to a second transparency lower than the first transparency (for example, a second transmittance F2). to make it transparent (see FIG. 165),
After the execution of the reach line suggesting effect, the timing at which the ornament identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggesting image is erased from the third area ( For example, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the transmittance (transparency) of the decoration pattern being displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C is set higher than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed. The timing for setting the second transmittance F2 having a low transmittance (transparency) is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIGS. 163 to 165).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. In addition, at the timing when the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes the second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decoration identification information is being variably displayed in the third area. The decorative identification information does not interfere with the reach line suggestion image.

[Mode 6] (No. 7)
The game machine of form 6 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
a means for emitting light;
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-reach state after the ready-to-reach state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area when the specific display result is derived; A specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) in which the same type of decoration identification information stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, the reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed, and it is possible to execute the reach line suggesting effect to be erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggesting effect),
When executing the reach line suggesting effect, enlarged display for enlarging the decoration identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and separation display for separating the decoration identification information after executing the enlarged display. and can be executed (see FIGS. 163 to 165),
The second period from the start to the end of the separated display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the period from the start to the end of the enlarged display). The second period te1 from the start to the end of the separation display is longer than the first period td1 (td1<te1; see FIG. 165),
The light emitting means includes specific light emitting means (for example, a movable body lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
It is possible to execute extinguishing control to extinguish the specific light emitting means during execution of the reach line suggestion effect (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the display screen of the image display device 5 Portions of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged in the periphery (nearby) that turn off the movable body lamps 9d (see FIGS. 163(F) to (H))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. In addition, the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area is enlarged and displayed for the first period, and then displayed separately for the second period longer than the first period, thereby forming the reach state. The identification information can be recognized by the player. Further, by turning off the specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggesting image can be made to stand out more.

[Mode 7] (No. 8)
The game machine of form 7 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
a means for emitting light;
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-reach state after the ready-to-reach state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area when the specific display result is derived; A specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) in which the same type of decoration identification information stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, the reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed, and it is possible to execute the reach line suggesting effect to be erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggesting effect),
The light emitting means includes specific light emitting means (for example, a movable body lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
It is possible to execute extinguishing control to extinguish the specific light emitting means during execution of the reach line suggestion effect (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the display screen of the image display device 5 Portions of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged in the periphery (nearby) that turn off the movable body lamps 9d (see FIGS. 163(F) to (H))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. In addition, by turning off the specific light emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestive image can be made to stand out more.

[Mode 8] (No. 9)
The game machine of form 8 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined operation display control for operating the decoration identification information in a predetermined operation mode is repeatedly performed over a first period (for example, for effect control When the CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative patterns at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative patterns is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special patterns is completed. (see FIGS. 136(C), 155, and 156),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode is repeatedly performed over a second period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 3. When the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d is repeatedly executed. (See FIGS. 137(B), 155, and 156),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may display the decoration symbols in the high base state in the decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5C). , a part that does not execute the loop action of the decoration pattern when the temporary stop display is made at the stop position of 5R (see FIG. 157),
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emitting period Tb4; see FIG. 137A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed in the sense of prompting the player to variably display the decoration identification information. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling annoyed by being urged to do so. Further, since the predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter period than the predetermined light emission control, the decoration identification information can be preferably highlighted.

[Mode 9] (No. 10)
The game machine of form 9 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
Information relating to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as pending storage information (for example, the CPU 103 stores the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the start winning judgment process of step S101, and the number of pending storage The part that performs the update process),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of combinations of the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area (for example, "111" stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, The part that becomes a big hit or loses by combining decorative patterns such as "326"),
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to the non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification When the information is stopped in the effective display area, the decoration identification information is displayed in an enlarged size from the normal size according to the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information, and then displayed in a mode of returning to the normal size. (For example, when the CPU 120 for effect control temporarily stops displaying the decoration pattern, the part that can execute the fluctuation stop action. See FIGS. 149 to 152),
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, when the decoration identification information is stopped in the effective display area, it is stored as the reserved storage information. Regardless of the number of reserved memories, the decoration identification information is maintained at a normal size (for example, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, regardless of the number of reserved memories When the variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed, the portion where the variable stop action is not executed and the temporary stop display is performed while maintaining the size (see FIGS. 152 and 157).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the movement when the decoration identification information is stopped is varied according to the number of retained memories to improve interest, while the average variable display period is short and the decoration identification information is visually recognized. In a special state where it is difficult to do so, by stopping while maintaining the size, it is possible to stop so that the visibility of the decoration identification information is not impaired.

[Mode 10] (No. 11)
The game machine of form 10 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of noon and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 153),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21; see FIGS. 155 and 156).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fade-out display basically gives the impression that the fade-out display has disappeared abruptly as it is executed in a short period of time. In some cases, the fade-out display of the identification information is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background, so that it can be noted that the variable display of the decoration identification information has started.

[Mode 11] (No. 12)
The game machine of form 11 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of noon and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 153),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display is different from the execution period of the background fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time; see FIGS. 155 and 156).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by synchronizing the identification information fade-out display and the background fade-out display, it is possible to prevent difficulty in understanding that the variable display of the decoration identification information has started.

[Mode 12] (No. 13)
The game machine of form 12 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of noon and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 153),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is In the scroll display of 5L, 5C, and 5R, the period longer than the fade-in display period B21 from the start of deceleration of the display speed to the temporary stop display (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).See Figures 155 and 156)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fade-in display basically gives the impression that the fade-in display is performed in a short period of time, so that the variable display of the decoration identification information and the background change may be performed at the same time. In some cases, it can be noted that the variable display of the decoration identification information ends when the identification information fade-in display is performed in a shorter period of time than the background fade-in display.

[Mode 13] (No. 14)
The game machine of form 13 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of noon and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 153),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display is different from the execution period of the background fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 155 and 156). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by synchronizing the identification information fade-in display and the background fade-in display, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration identification information ends.

[Mode 14] (No. 15)
The game machine of form 14 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
After the variable display is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to execute a specific effect of restarting the variable display (for example, The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is resumed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started to when the display result is derived and displayed. , a portion that can execute a “pseudo continuous notice” that incites whether or not to make one variable display look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner),
The decoration identification information has decoration identification information of a plurality of colors (for example, blue and red) including a numeric image,
When the variable display is restarted in the specific effect, a number image (for example, pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212) that can specify the number of times the variable display is restarted can be displayed in a plurality of colors (for example, blue and red). (See FIGS. 161 and 162),
In the specific effect, the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed are of the same type, and the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern and the number image are of the same type. When the first combination of different colors is obtained, the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern and the number of times when the variable display is restarted, the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern, and the number of times There is a case where both colors of the image are the same kind of second combination,
In the specific effect, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the first combination (for example, a pseudo In the consecutive notice, if the display color of the temporary stop displayed decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display is the first combination of non-same colors, and the temporary stop displayed decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display display color are the same color. There are cases where it becomes the second combination, and when the variable display is resumed with the second combination, the jackpot game state is more likely than when the variable display is resumed with the first combination in the pseudo consecutive notice. part where the controlled rate is high)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not the specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of numbers and colors of the number image and the number image of the decoration identification information temporarily stopped and displayed when the specific effect is executed. Therefore, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Mode 15] (No. 16)
The game machine of form 15 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The size is smaller than the decoration identification information, and it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can reduce the size corresponding to the decoration pattern). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
When the variable display is not being executed, it is possible to execute a standby effect that displays a predetermined image (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11, the variable A portion that can execute a “customer waiting demonstration effect” when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without receiving a control command such as a display start designation command (see FIG. 159),
When the standby effect is being executed, the display of the reduced identification information is continued while the decoration identification information is hidden (see FIG. 159),
When the condition for starting variable display is satisfied while the standby effect is being executed, the predetermined image is hidden after variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden. After being displayed, the decoration identification information is displayed and the variable display is started (for example, if the start winning occurs while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is not displayed). The variable display of the small symbols is started before it becomes, then the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, and the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first effect mode corresponding to the first effect mode) is displayed. 1 background image 002SG081), after which a decorative pattern is displayed and scroll display is started (see FIG. 160)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by starting the variable display of the decoration identification information after the predetermined image is hidden, the player can recognize that the variable display has started in accordance with the fulfillment of the condition for starting the variable display. However, since variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden, it is possible to ensure display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Mode 16] (No. 17)
The game machine of form 16 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 120), the specific identification information is variably displayed (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol variable display in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A portion that performs processing for displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area 138), a shift display portion for moving the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U to the active display area 5F and switching to the active display 002SG103.
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 134) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action. See FIG. 136 (A)),
In the normal state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary operation display is performed (for example, the first suspension display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure suspension storage display area 5U is moved and displayed to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is not started until the pending shift display period until switching display as the active display 002SG103 ends, and the above-described fluctuation start action is executed. , a portion where scrolling display (variable display) of decorative patterns is started after the pending shift display period ends (see FIGS. 139(C) to 139(F)),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process processing of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11),
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a portion that executes a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 and the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing a pre-operation display that operates in a manner different from the display, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required for performing the switching display. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous. can increase the interest of Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 17] (No. 18)
The game machine of form 17 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 120), the specific identification information is variably displayed (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol variable display in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A portion that performs processing for displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area 138), a shift display portion for moving the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U to the active display area 5F and switching to the active display 002SG103.
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 134) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action. See FIG. 136 (A)),
In the normal state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary action display is performed, and the scroll display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the left side in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U The first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the display area is moved to the active display area 5F, and is displayed by scrolling the decoration pattern until the pending shift display period ends until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ( (variable display) is not started, the above-described variable start action is executed, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started. )reference),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process processing of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11),
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a portion that executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing the pre-operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the movement display before starting the display, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required for performing the switching display. In addition, since the moving display of the decoration identification information is not started until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the moving display of the decoration identification information may start before the corresponding display is displayed. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous. can increase the interest of Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 18] (No. 19)
The game machine of form 18 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 120), the specific identification information is variably displayed (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol variable display in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A portion that performs processing for displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area 138), a shift display portion for moving the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U to the active display area 5F and switching to the active display 002SG103.
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 134) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action. See FIG. 136 (A)),
In the special state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary action display is performed (for example, the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure suspension storage display area 5U is moved and displayed to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is not started until the pending shift display period until switching display as the active display 002SG103 ends, and the above-described fluctuation start action is executed. , A portion where the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started after the pending shift display period ends.Modified example),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the process)

The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a portion that executes a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 and the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing a pre-operation display that operates in a manner different from the display, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required for performing the switching display. Further, since the pre-operation display is performed while the switching display is being performed in the special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state can be excited. Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 19] (No. 20)
The game machine of form 19 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 120), the specific identification information is variably displayed (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol variable display in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A portion that performs processing for displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area 138), a shift display portion for moving the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U to the active display area 5F and switching to the active display 002SG103.
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 134) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action. See FIG. 136 (A)),
In the special state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary action display is performed, and the movement display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the left side in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U The first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the display area is moved to the active display area 5F, and is displayed by scrolling the decoration pattern until the pending shift display period ends until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ( Variable display) is not started, the above-described variable start action is executed, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started.Modified example),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the process)

The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a shift display that switches and displays the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. See Figure 138)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing the pre-operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the movement display before starting the display, the period required for the switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the moving display of the decoration identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the moving display of the decoration identification information may start before the corresponding display is displayed. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by Further, since the pre-operation display is performed while the switching display is being performed in the special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state can be excited. Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 20] (No. 21)
The game machine of form 20 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of production modes (for example, first production mode to fourth production mode) including a first production mode and a second production mode,
When starting the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display). As the display becomes faster, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part where the display fades out),
In the first effect mode, a moving display for moving the decoration identification information is executed as the variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 133(A1) and (A2)),
In the second effect mode, as the variable display of the decoration identification information, a special variable display different in mode from the moving display is executed (see FIGS. 133(B1) and (B2)),
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is performed in the second effect mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is performed in the first effect mode ( For example, a portion (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22. See FIGS. 158(A) and (B)))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second effect mode, not only is the aspect of variable display of the decoration identification information different from that in the first effect mode, but also a fade-out from the start of the variable display until the decoration identification information is erased. Since the display period is lengthened, it is possible to draw attention to the decoration identification information for a long period of time.

[Mode 21] (No. 22)
The game machine of form 21 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of production modes (for example, first production mode to fourth production mode) including a first production mode and a second production mode,
When starting the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display). As the display becomes faster, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part where the display fades out),
any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns can be determined as the variable display pattern of the decoration identification information;
The execution period of the fade-out display differs between when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first effect mode and when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second effect mode (for example, the first effect mode 158 (A ) See (B)))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the execution period of the fade-out when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined differs between when the first effect mode is controlled and when the second effect mode is controlled. Since it becomes difficult for the player to predict the display pattern, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Mode 22] (No. 23)
The game machine of form 22 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the condition for starting variable display is established until the decoration identification information starts variable display, and a post-variable display period after the decoration identification information starts variable display. , including (for example, the variable display period of the special design is the pre-variable display period from the start of the variable display of the special design and the small design to the start of the scroll display of the decoration design, and the scroll display of the decoration design and a variable after-display period after is started),
the character image is displayed in the pre-variable display period and the post-variable display period;
After being displayed in the pre-variable display period, the related information image is erased before the start of the post-variable display period (for example, the name of the character displayed in the information display section 002SG053). Related information) is displayed during the pre-variable display period, that is, when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period is started, that is, the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started. The portion to be erased before (see Fig. 136(A) and Fig. 139)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character by drawing attention to the related information image before the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, that is, when the display is stopped. Also, by erasing the related information image before the start of the variable display, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, the advance notice effect, etc., rather than the related information image.

[Mode 23] (No. 24)
The game machine of form 23 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
In the normal state, control to one of a plurality of types of presentation modes including a first presentation mode (for example, first presentation mode) and a second presentation mode (for example, second presentation mode). Possible (for example, first production mode ~ fourth production mode. See Figure 133),
In the special state, it is possible to control the production mode including the third production mode (for example, the third production mode and the fourth production mode),
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first effect mode, decoration identification information is displayed in a manner including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 139),
In the second production mode and the third production mode, the decoration identification information is displayed in a manner not including the related information image (see FIGS. 141, 142 and 146).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first effect mode, by displaying the related information image to make the player pay attention to the related information image, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. By erasing the related information image in the 3-effect mode, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, the advance notice effect, etc., rather than the related information image.

[Mode 24] (No. 25)
The game machine of form 24 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The decoration identification information includes a numeric image (eg, numeric display unit 002SG061),
When the background image is normally displayed, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled (for example, the effect control CPU 120 will notify whether or not a big hit will be achieved. the part where the production can be executed),
In the notification effect, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification effect is executed in the variable display from which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect. is displayed (for example, in the SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, the combination of the jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, “222”) is temporarily stop display (see FIG. 166(F)),
Upon completion of the notification effect, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and when the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 166(G), with the end of the SP ready-to-win effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. A part where a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped when there is
a specific image (for example, a specific image 002SG075) is operatively displayed in proximity to the numeric image of the combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result being displayed when the normal background image is displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed for the number display portion 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmed decoration symbols displayed after the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. While the operation is displayed (see FIGS. 166(H) and (I)), in the high base state, flames are emitted to the number display portion 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmed decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP reach effect. 167(P) and (S)) where the specific image 002SG075 shown is not displayed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a normal state, the specific image is displayed in motion with respect to the numeric image of the decoration identification information displayed after the termination of the notification effect, thereby increasing the effect of the effect and making it lively, but the average variable display period is short. In the special state, the variable display can be given a sense of speed by not displaying the specific image with respect to the numerical image of the decoration identification information displayed after the end of the notification effect.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to form 17 or 18,
The production control means is
When the variable display of the specific identification information ends, the corresponding display (eg, active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (eg, active display area 5F) is erased. can display an erasing effect display (for example, erasing effect 002SG110) that emphasizes that the corresponding display has been erased when
If the suspension display is displayed when the deletion effect display is displayed, the deletion effect display is continuously displayed until the variable display corresponding to the suspension display is started (for example, the deletion effect 002SG110 It continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started as follows. part to be processed (see Fig. 138 (B3))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the presentation from deteriorating by not creating a blank period of the presentation after the variable display is finished and before the next variable display is started. In addition, the erasing effect display makes the player recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the finished variable display has been erased, and at the same time, displays a new corresponding display to recognize that a new variable display has started. can be made

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to form 17 or 18,
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (see, for example, FIG. 132),
In the special state, the decoration identification information of the first area, the second area and the third area are displayed in the same size (see, for example, FIG. 132),
The third area in the special state is arranged at a position closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 132).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a normal state, the decoration identification information of the first and second areas are made to appear large, and the decoration identification information of the third area is shifted to give a sense of depth and enhance interest. Also, in a special state in which the average variable display period is short, the decoration identification information is arranged at a position near the center of the display area, so that the degree of recognition of the decoration identification information can be enhanced.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

Next, the form for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings. In the following, the front side of FIG. 114 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the rear (rear, back) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, in the description of each step in the flow chart, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1", "normal reach" is "N reach", and "super reach" is "SP reach". It is sometimes abbreviated as

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 114 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization is generically called simply variable display.

In addition, on the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5, the number corresponding to the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0" etc.), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4" etc.) and the decoration pattern A display area 5S for displaying small patterns is provided, and the small patterns are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the decorative patterns.

In addition, the number of the first reserved memory, the number of the second reserved memory, the reserved display, the small pattern, the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, and the right hitting that prompts the player to perform the right hitting operation The notification image 002SG201 (see FIG. 133) and the time saving remaining display 002SG202 (see FIG. 133) indicating the number of remaining time saving are displayed on the front side (upper layer) than the effect image such as the character, so that the effect image While preventing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small patterns and error display from being reduced due to overlap, the decorative pattern is deeper than the effect image (lower layer) , it may be possible to prevent the visibility of the effect image from being lowered due to overlapping of the decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the small pattern is also referred to as a fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are displayed variably, for example, in a display device such as the image display device 5. The display changes depending on the movement. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable bodies 32A and 32B are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 entirely or Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when a part of the pattern is shielded, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variable display start command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variable display start command.

In addition, a fourth pattern display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 which is a predetermined location on the game board 2) such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED The pattern displayed on the device is also called a fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U , an active display area 5F). Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display. In addition, in the present embodiment, the common special figure pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A first special figure pending storage display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending storage display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which the execution of the second special symbol is suspended is displayed. , may be provided separately.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 115). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, thereby causing the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole. It will be in a closed state that does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start winning opening) by tilting the movable piece when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It is said that the mouth is open.) When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 114, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 115), and the special prize winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 114, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

Movable bodies 32A and 32B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (upper and lower positions of the image display device 5 in FIG. 114). A movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable bodies 32A and 32B. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 115).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 115).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting and extinguishing, the movement of the movable bodies 32A and 32B, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. 115, for example. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and a real-time clock 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 outputs a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable bodies 32A and 32B, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . It also performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and the area is switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. As a result, drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 superimposes (combines) a plurality of layers to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5, the image of each layer is drawn and stored in the VRAM area. a layer image drawing area for arranging, a display image creating area for generating an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area, and are placed. Note that each layer has a concept of upper, middle, and lower layers, and an image in a higher layer is given a higher display priority in the image display device 5, and an image in a lower layer is given a higher display priority in the image display device 5. is set low.

The VRAM area has a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images, and a layer for drawing and arranging layer 3 images. 3 image drawing areas are arranged. A displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area as an image to be displaced. This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes ( Display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image synthesized), or an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

The image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), and the image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area is image display. An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5 and an image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area have the highest priority in the image display device 5 . Each image is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low). That is, layer 1 is a higher layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is a lower layer with the lowest image display priority. layer.

Layer 1 image drawing area, in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5, the first special figure reservation storage display area 5U that displays the number of first special figure reservation storage and the number of second special figure reservation storage so as to be identifiable A drawing area for drawing an interface image and a second interface image including a small pattern whose display area is smaller than the decoration pattern and a display of the number of reserved memories in the upper left part of the display area of the image display device 5. be.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in order to perform variable display of the decorative patterns in the central portion of the display region of the image display device 5 .

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background image is drawn in order to display the background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5 .

In this embodiment, an image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images (images of layer 3) drawn and arranged in . In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (the first interface image and the second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority. The image (decorative pattern) displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area. The image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is displayed as a low layer image on the image display device 5 because the lowest display priority is set.

In the present embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) in order to make the overlapping portion of the upper layer image invisible to the player when superimposed on the lower layer image. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn/arranged in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable bodies 32A and 32B to the movable bodies 32A and 32B or a drive circuit for driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable bodies 32A and 32B (supply of signals to operate the movable bodies 32A and 32B, etc.) are for effect control. It may be executed by the CPU 120 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 116(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 116A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 116(A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 116B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability high base state, time reduction with probability variation state) in which both time saving control and probability variation control are performed. In addition, the probability variation state with time saving may simply be referred to as "probability variation state".

The command A0XXH is a win start specifying command (also called a "fanfare command") specifying display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big win game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "0" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

It should be noted that the commands shown in FIG. 116A are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be replaced with different commands. You can add different commands from For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the notification command of passing, and the remaining variable display frequency by which probability variation control and time saving control are performed.

FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 117, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby setting the random numbers MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which show a part.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 118 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as the display result determination table, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a "jackpot" to a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for judging the special symbol display result. is a table.

In the display result determination table, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), random for special figure display result judgment A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to a special figure display result of "big win" or "losing".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is data for judgment to be assigned. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display result assigned to. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in the present embodiment /30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or the time-saving state is higher. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase.

FIG. 119(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The big hit type determination table in the present embodiment, when it is determined to control to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as "big hit", based on the random number MR2 for judging the big hit type, any of a plurality of types of the big hit type. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described using FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A", "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C" that shifts to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to a low probability high base state " Non-probability variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal opening big-hit in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state by the ``non-probable variable jackpot'' is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

The variable probability control and the time saving control, which are started after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A to the variable probability big win C, are ended on the condition that the game state is controlled to the big win game state. In addition, the time saving control started after the end of the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot game state by the end of the variable display of 100 times or by the end of the variable display of the 100 times. terminated on the condition that Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is one of the variable probability big win A to variable probability big win C, the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state passes through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously without In other words, the variable probability state in the present embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result becomes a big hit regardless of the number of variable display times, while the time saving state in the present embodiment is a game state in which the variable display result does not become a big hit. If not, it is a game state controlled to a normal state by executing variable display 100 times. For this reason, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" are assigned different determination values for the jackpot types. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the big hit type as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C" to a big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 119 (A), whether the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-probable jackpot or a definite jackpot, it is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. ing.

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure In addition, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 120 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, three types of variation patterns are provided as super reach variation patterns: super reach (no pseudo run), super reach (one pseudo run), and super reach (two pseudo runs). The present invention is not limited to this, and four or more or two or less super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in the present embodiment is a variation pattern (PA2-2) that is different from the variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach (no pseudo run), As a variation pattern of super reach (1 pseudo-run), the variation pattern (PB1-3) where the variable display result is a big hit and a variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of step, as a variation pattern of super reach (2 pseudo-runs) There are provided a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a big hit, and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the result is not.

As shown in FIG. 120, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes "big hit", in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. , For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of variation pattern is first determined from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern, and then the A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game state, and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table A. -1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach (no pseudo consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach (one pseudo consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-4 (super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern). More specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 35%. , PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A to C, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern ), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (1-time pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach (pseudo-continuous effect 2) It is determined from the number of times) variation pattern of the jackpot). More specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%. .

Also, if the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 1 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-1 (no shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) fluctuation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, if the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

Also, if the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss fluctuation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

Also, if the gaming state is a high base state (time saving state or probability variable state), select the variation pattern determination table D for loss, and change the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table D for loss PA1-3 (shortened Variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (simulated continuous effect 1 time) fluctuation pattern) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined according to the type of the big win. The selection ratio of any one of the variation patterns for big wins (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied according to, for example, the gaming state, regardless of the type of the big win. By doing so, the variable display is performed in a variation pattern suitable for the game state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 115 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 002SG150, for example, as shown in FIG. there is The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. It has a control timer setting section 002SG153, a game control counter setting section 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 002SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) are stored in order of winning.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) are stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for winning type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment is held data, It stores until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data representing the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on is reserved data. Store until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 002SG151A and the second special figure suspension storage unit 002SG151B can be used to execute a special figure game using the first special figure or a special figure game using the second special figure. It shows that it is suspended, and it becomes suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in these special figure games.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning hole in this way, and the second starting winning hole When the holding information (second holding information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by the game ball passing (entering) is stored in association with the holding number in a separate holding storage unit, The variable display based on the second reserved storage information is preferentially executed over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 002SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 002SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it was detected by the gate switch 21, and the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 115 stores various data tables used for controlling the production operation in addition to the production control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns, and the like. there is

As an example, in the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 controls production operations by various production devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the production model, etc.). A performance control pattern table storing a plurality of types of performance control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern corresponds to various performance operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is composed of data indicating the content of the control. The effect control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 115 has a production control data holding area 002SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The effect control data holding area 002SG190 shown in FIG. 123(A) includes a effect control flag setting portion 002SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 002SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 002SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 002SG194. there is

The effect control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 002SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 002SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning command buffer 002SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 002SG194A at the time of start winning are associated with these starting entrance winning designation command and reservation storage number notification command , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores a command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 002SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 002SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The commands stored in the command buffer 002SG194A received at the time of start winning shown in FIG. 1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. , and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 123(B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number "0" is deleted. ' are shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "0". , the commands stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 124, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after the restoration process (step S4) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the restoration condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after the initialization process (step S6). The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt processing for game control shown in FIG. 125 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 125 as the special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special game using the second special is preferentially executed over the special game using the first special. ). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (002SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (002SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (002SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 002SG154, it should have specified the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. 002SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (002SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 002SGS101 (002SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage reaches the upper limit in 002SGS102 (002SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (002SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (002SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In 002SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (002SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 002SGS103 and 002SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "0", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (002SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way and the starting port buffer value are stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (002SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

CPU103, following the processing of 002SGS111, for example by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, to the effect control board 12 Settings are made for sending the pending storage count notification command (002SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 002SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "0" (Y at 002SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting buffer value is "2" (N at 002SGS114), the starting buffer is cleared, and after initializing the stored value to "0" (002SGS116), the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 126 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 128, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 002SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 002 SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

In step 002SGS141, when the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" (step 002SGS141; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "0" in the second special figure pending storage unit Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 002 SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 002 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" in the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 002 SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 002SGS144), it moves to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, at step 002SGS141, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 002SGS145). . The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 002 SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. Thus, the processing of step 002SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 002SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "0" in the first special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 002 SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 002 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the first special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the first special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" in the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 002 SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "0" (step 002SGS148), it moves to step 002SGS149.

In step 002 SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 118 is selected as a use table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, is a "big hit" or a "lose". to set. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or "loss" (step 002 SGS150). In addition, in this step 002 SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variable flag is off low probability state (low probability low base state if this characteristic part), if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, "big hit ”, and if not applicable, it is determined as “missing”.

As described above, in the display result determination table selected at step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big win" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, so step 002SGS150 In the processing, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high-probability state, different determination data (determination value) is used to determine the special figure display result as a "big hit" By determining whether or not, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) as a “jackpot” with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is judged to be a "jackpot" at step 002SGS150 (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 119(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 002 SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “probability variable jackpot B”, “probability variable jackpot C”, which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, determines which of a plurality of jackpot types should be selected (step 002 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 002 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is changed to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state ( Which game state is to be controlled from among the high-probability-high base state) is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a variable display result. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 002 SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "0". If it is "variable probability B" corresponding to B, it is "2", and if it is "variable probability C" that corresponds to variable probability big hit C, it is "3". After the processing of step 002SGS155, the process proceeds to step 002SGS156.

Further, when it is determined to be "missed" at step 002SGS150 (step 002SGS150; N), the processing of step 002SGS156 is executed without executing the processing of steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002 SGS156, the CPU 103 corresponds to the result of prior determination of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and the decision result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state. , Set a fixed special pattern. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 002 SGS 150a, if the big hit type at step 002 SGS 154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as the fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 002SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure in step 002SGS145 is "0" (step 002SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 002SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 129 is executed. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 129 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and also controls the effect control board 12. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit).

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32A. , 32B, and control to operate various production devices. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random value update process (step S77), a demonstration effect control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration effect in the pachinko game machine 1 and a background image displayed on the image display device 5 are changed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background image and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

Incidentally, in the background display update process of the present embodiment, the first background image corresponding to the first effect mode, the second background image corresponding to the second effect mode, and the third background image corresponding to the third effect mode , and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth effect mode. The first background image and the second background image can be displayed when the game state is the normal state, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is the low probability/high base state, and the third background image can be displayed when the game state is the low probability/high base state. 4 The background image can be displayed when the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Switching between the first background image and the second background image is performed, for example, when the variable display of SP reach swelling is executed, or when one of the background images is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time. It switches when the conditions are satisfied.

In the menu display process, in addition to the process of displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, in the state where the menu screen is displayed, the speaker is displayed in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B. It includes a process of adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R and a process of adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 .

In the demonstration effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, such as a timer for waiting for the start of the customer waiting demo effect, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the time-out of the timer without starting the variable display. In addition, when the variable display is started while the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration effect is interrupted, The display of the image display device 5 may be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 129 as effect control process processing. In the production control process shown in FIG. 130, the production control CPU 120 first starts the reservation storage display (first reservation display 002SG101 and second reservation display 002SG102) in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U of the image display device 5. A pending display update process for updating the display according to the stored contents of the received command buffer 002SG194A at the time of winning and performing shift display, etc., which will be described later, is executed (step S161). After executing the pending display update process, one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination for executing the pre-reading advance notice effect (for example, effect of changing the display color of the pending display, etc.) A pre-reading notice setting process in which determination, setting, etc. are performed may be executed together with the pending display update process.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, commands to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signals ), such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, various effect control during the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, operation|movement of CPU120 for production|presentation control is demonstrated. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002 SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer , are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 002 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273; Y ), for example, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer, buffer number 1 It is shifted upward by one piece (step 002SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) and the variation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In this embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Also, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command to a fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B to the probability variable jackpot C, an odd number other than "7" is used as the stop symbol. It is determined from a plurality of combinations of symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets a combination of decoration patterns in which three patterns are even numbers as the stop pattern. to decide.

In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the received variable display result designation command is the third variable corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B to the probability variable jackpot C As in the case of the display result designation command to the fourth variable display result designation command, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", "333", "555", "999 , etc.)) may be determined. In this case, by further sharing the effects during the variable display during the jackpot game and the variable probability state, it is possible to determine whether the game state is the variable probability state or the time reduction state until the variable display is executed 100 times. , the player can be made to pay attention to whether the time saving state ends after 100 times of variable display or continues until 10,000 times of variable display, and interest can be improved.

Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as the stop symbols. A combination of symbols (lost symbols) is determined. Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle A combination of reach-losses with different symbols (losing symbols) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern specification command read at step 002 SGS 275 is a variation pattern specification command of super reach (variation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) with pseudo-continuation. It is determined whether or not there is (step 002SGS277). If the variation pattern specification command read at step 002SGS275 is not a super reach variation pattern specification command, that is, if it is a normal reach variation pattern specification command (step 002SGS278; N), proceed to step 002SGS383.

When the variation pattern designation command read out at step 002 SGS275 is a variation pattern designation command of super reach, from the data indicating the stop design of the decorative design determined at step 002 SGS276 and stored in the decorative design display result storage area, reach The display colors of the stop symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5C forming the state are specified. Then, using the pseudo-repeat number display determination table shown in FIG. The display color of the pseudo repetition number display (for example, "x2") indicating that the variable display is started twice is determined and stored (step 002 SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designation command read out in step 002 SGS275 is a pseudo-run twice super reach variation pattern (step 002 SGS279), and when it is determined that it is a pseudo-run two times super reach variation pattern (Step 002SGS279; Y), using the pseudo-running number display determination table shown in FIG. The display color of the pseudo consecutive number display (for example, "x3") indicating that the variable display is started three times including the first variable display is determined and stored (step 002 SGS280).

Then, when it is determined in step 002SGS279 that the variation pattern is not two times of pseudo-repeated, or when the process of step 002SGS280 is executed, a start waiting timer for starting display of the number of pseudo-repetitions is set (step 002SGS281). , go to step 002 SGS 282 .

Next, at step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and a process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 002 SGS284). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 002SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of left, middle, right decorative patterns and small patterns into the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data written in is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of decorative patterns and small patterns. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 002 SGS287), and the variable display start setting process ends.

(decorative design and small design)
Next, decorative patterns and small patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135. FIG. FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining decorative patterns and small patterns. Figure 133 shows (A1) (A2) the first effect mode, (B1) (B2) the second effect mode, (C1) (C2) the third effect mode, (D1) (D2) the fourth effect FIG. 4 is a diagram showing aspects of modes; 134, (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative design in the first rendering mode, and (B1) and (B2) in the second rendering mode. Figure 135, (C1) and (C2) are the third effect mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the fourth effect mode, (E) is the decoration pattern and the small pattern. and FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a variable display mode.

In FIG. 132, the sizes of decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns are the same as those displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S. It is displayed as a ratio.

As shown in FIG. 132, when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are circular number pedestals and Numeral display section 002SG051 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number pedestal, and 10 types of characters corresponding to each number "0" to "9" of the number display section 002SG051 ( Illustration of all characters is omitted), a character display portion 002SG052, a rectangular information pedestal in front view, and information about characters displayed in front of the information pedestal (for example, in the present embodiment, , character name), and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 002SG054 that is displayed so as to surround the number display section 002SG051, the character display section 002SG052, and the information display section 002SG053. be.

In this embodiment, the information display section 002SG053 displays the name of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the information is related to the character displayed in the section 002SG052, various information other than the name (for example, information such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, and items possessed by the character) may be displayed.

In addition, when the game state is the high base state, the decorative patterns (for the high base state) displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are number display portions consisting of numbers "0" to "9". 002SG061 and a substantially rectangular pedestal display portion 002SG064 that is displayed so as to surround the number display portion 002SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state are not provided with the character display portion and the information display portion unlike the decorative symbols for the low base state.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided in the upper left part of the image display device 5, the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decoration pattern are displayed. The small patterns consist of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decoration pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative patterns and the numbers of the small patterns correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily correspond to each other. It may be a number from '1' to '5' which is less than the number '0' to '9', or it may be a symbol or figure different from the number of the decorative pattern.

Next, decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state) and small patterns will be described.

<Display timing of each pattern> Decorative patterns (for low base state) and decorative patterns (for high base state) are almost displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the power of the image display device 5 is on. Although it is always displayed, it may be erased (not displayed) when, for example, an SP ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect) is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo effect is executed. On the other hand, while the image display device 5 is powered on, the small pattern is always displayed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative pattern, and continues to be displayed even when the decorative pattern is erased as described above. Is displayed. When information having a higher display priority than small symbols (for example, error display) is displayed, it may be erased.

<Variable display mode of each pattern> Decorative patterns (for low base state) are displayed in a scroll display that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first production mode described later. , and in the second presentation mode, variable display is performed by scroll display that moves in a curved manner from the back side to the front side of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

The decorative pattern (for high base state) is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a third production mode, which will be described later. , In the fourth effect mode, variable display is performed by scroll display that linearly moves from the top to the bottom of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or production mode, the small symbols are displayed in a switching display (updated display in which the symbols are updated) in which the symbols “0” to “9” are switched in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR. executed.

In a broad sense, both the "scrolling display" and the "switching display" are included in the "switching display" in which patterns are switched and displayed. "Scroll display" means that a plurality of patterns are updated and displayed by frame-out display or fade-out display from the display area after moving and displaying the pattern. A plurality of symbols may be updated and displayed by repeating display and non-display (erasing) or rotating display without fade-out display, which may be distinguished from "switch display".

<Numerical display part> The decorative pattern (for low base state) and the decorative pattern (for high base state) have character display part 002SG052, information display part 002SG053, and pedestal display part 002SG054 in addition to number display parts 002SG051 and 002SG061. On the other hand, the small pattern is composed only of the number display portion.

In addition, the decorative patterns (for the low base state) are displayed in the same size in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R. By displaying in a size slightly smaller than the decorative pattern display area 5R, a sense of depth is created. On the other hand, the decorative patterns (for the high base state) are displayed in the same size in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and arranged linearly in the horizontal direction. The small patterns are displayed in the same size in each of the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC and 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are arranged substantially horizontally at approximately the center position of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction, but the middle decorative design display area 5C is arranged. is positioned slightly above the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R. In the high base state, the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged substantially horizontally at substantially the center position of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the decoration symbols stopped and displayed at the stop position of the middle decoration design display area 5C in the high base state are displayed more clearly than the decoration symbols stopped and displayed at the stop position of the middle decoration design display area 5C in the low base state. 5 is arranged near the center of the display screen (see FIG. 133).

In addition, when the size of the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a reference, the size of the number display portion 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display portion of the small pattern is large. is small. In other words, the size of the number display area is larger in order of decorative design (for high base state), decorative design (for low base state), and small design. (for low base state) > small pattern). In addition, the overall size of each pattern has the same relationship as that of the number display portion.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to appear large, and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are shifted to give a sense of depth. In addition, in the high base state where the average variable display period is short, the decoration pattern is arranged at a position near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, so that the degree of recognition of the decoration pattern can be improved. (See Figure 133).

In addition, the decorative pattern (for the low base state), the decorative pattern (for the high base state), and the number display portions of the small patterns are each formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created by 3DCG (a virtual solid is configured (modeled) with points placed on three-dimensional coordinates as vertices, and information for reproducing materials etc. is given to each surface, (reproduced by illuminating an object with arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.), but a three-dimensional display device (for example, from a right eye image (R image) and a left eye image (L image) an image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video), a backlight that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front of the image liquid crystal panel, and the image on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel. and a liquid crystal panel for a parallax barrier provided at a predetermined interval) may be an image that can be viewed stereoscopically.

In addition, among the numbers “0” to “9” of the decorative pattern, the odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” are controlled to a high-probability high base state after the jackpot is finished. , and for even numbers of "0, 2, 4, 6, 8", the normal design (non-probability design). It should be noted that even in the event of a variable probability big win, a predetermined big win combination may be obtained according to the normal symbols.

<Character Display Portion> The character display portion 002SG052 of the decoration pattern (for the low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the character display portion 002SG052 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Also, the character displayed on the character display portion 002SG052 performs a predetermined action (movement) when the variable display is started or stopped, as will be described later. On the other hand, the decoration pattern (for the high base state) and the small pattern are not provided with the character display portion.

<Information Display Portion> The information display portion 002SG053 of the decoration pattern (for the low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). The information display section 002SG053 may be formed with a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). The information display portion 002SG053 displays a "name" which is information about the character displayed in the character display portion 002SG052. It has become. On the other hand, the decoration pattern (for the high base state) and the small pattern are not provided with the information display section.

<Pedestal display part> In the pedestal display part 002SG054 of the decoration design (for low base state), the decoration part that decorates the character is displayed in front, and is formed with a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). . Also, the pedestal display portion 002SG064 of the decorative design (for the high base state) is formed with a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Note that both the pedestal display portion 002SG054 and the pedestal display portion 002SG064 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Further, when the size of the pedestal display portion 002SG054 of the decorative design (for the low base state) is used as a reference, the size of the pedestal display portion 002SG064 of the decorative design (for the high base state) is large. On the other hand, the small pattern is not provided with a pedestal display portion.

<Main colors> The color of the numbers displayed in the number display parts 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative design (for low base state) and decorative design (for high base state) is "blue" for normal patterns consisting of even numbers, and "blue" for odd numbers. The probability variation pattern is said to be "red". The pedestals for numbers other than the numbers, the pedestal display portions 002SG054 and 002SG064, etc. may be displayed in the same color as the numbers or in a different color from the numbers.

Also, the characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 may be configured in their original colors without being affected by the main colors. Also, the character corresponding to the variable probability symbol is preferably the ally character if, for example, the ally character and the enemy character are separated. Alternatively, it is preferable that the character is a main character of the story, such as a main character in the story among allied characters or a person closely related to the main character.

In addition, as described above, when the story concept of allies and enemies is adapted, the notice effect and SP reach effect are basically expressed from the point of view of the allies, and the allies and enemies fight in the SP reach effect. In the case of the effect configuration, it is notified that the player will be in an advantageous state (for example, a big win) when the ally side has an advantageous ending, such as when the ally side wins over the enemy.

Also, the main color having the highest occupation rate in the entire area of each of the decorative pattern (for low base state) and the decorative pattern (for high base state) may be the same color as the number. In addition, although the even-numbered normal symbols are "blue" and the odd-numbered probability variable symbols are "red", they may be of other colors.

Also, in the high base state, as described later, the scroll display is performed at high speed, so it is necessary to make it easier to see than the decorative symbols (for the low base state), so decorations such as the stop symbol notice and the fluctuation start notice are displayed. Since effects are often displayed in conjunction with the design, the decoration design (for high base state) is mainly composed of the number display section 002SG061, and is composed of a character display section and a number display section. It is characterized by a larger design size ratio than the decorative design (for low base state).

Although illustration is omitted in the present embodiment, the numbers of the decorative patterns (for high base state) are more complicated than the numbers of the decorative patterns (for low base state), and the design is more complicated. The high base state may be livened up by making the appearance more flashy, such as making it taller.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers of the small symbols is "yellow" for normal symbols consisting of even numbers, and "yellow-green" for probability variable symbols consisting of odd numbers. In the present embodiment, even-numbered normal symbols are "yellow" and odd-numbered odd-numbered odd-numbered symbols are "yellow-green", but other colors may be used. Also, the same number as the decorative pattern may be the same kind of color as the decorative pattern.

Regarding the design of the small pattern, it is possible to reduce the number material of the decorative pattern in the low base state or high base state as it is, but it is said that the design will enhance the effect. In order to improve visibility for the player, it is preferable that the design is simpler than the decorative numbers (for example, it is flat rather than three-dimensional, and has a simple color without gloss). .

As shown in FIG. 133, the effect control CPU 120 has, as effect modes, a first effect mode (see FIGS. 133(A1) and (A2)), a second effect mode (see FIGS. 133(B1) and (B2)), a Either of the 3 production modes (see FIGS. 133(C1) and (C2)) and the 4th production mode (see FIGS. 133(D1) and (D2)) can be executed. The first effect mode and the second effect mode are effect modes that can be executed when the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state. In addition, the third effect mode is an effect mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to the low probability and high base state, and the fourth effect mode is when the game state is controlled to the high probability and high base state. It is an executable production mode.

As shown in FIG. 133 (A1), in the first rendering mode, the decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is a landscape of a town in the daytime. A first background image 002SG081 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 133A2, the variable display of the decorative design is scroll display (first scroll display) in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R move linearly from top to bottom. executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134(A1) and (A2), each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then straight downward. , and is framed out downward from the lower sides of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set in the center of the vertical direction of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the subsequent decoration pattern (for example, the decoration pattern of "4") is displayed in the frame and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (A2), when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. However, after the preceding "3" decoration pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "3" decoration pattern and the subsequent "4" decoration pattern become visible. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly displayed. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the number of the first reserved memory, the number of the second reserved memory and the small pattern are displayed, and the special figure provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 In the pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F, the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed. be done. In addition, since the number of these first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, the small symbols, the special figure reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes, the explanation is omitted below. do.

As shown in FIG. 133(B1), in the second rendering mode, the decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is a wilderness landscape in the daytime. A second background image 002SG082 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 133B2, the variable display of decorative patterns is scroll display (second scroll display) in which the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are curved from the back side to the front side. A variable display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134(B1) and (B2), left and right decorative patterns approach the center of the screen from the upper left side of the left decorative design display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative design display area 5R. After that, it moves downward to the left and right sides of the screen, and moves sideways from the lower left side of the left decorative design display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative design display area 5R. displayed out of frame. The middle decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed so as to approach the front side of the middle decoration pattern display area 5C from the back side of the screen, and then displayed out of frame.

In addition, the previous decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the decorative pattern "2") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the center position in the vertical direction of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. Occasionally, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "3" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves toward the center of the screen. That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (B2), when the leading "2" decorative pattern is passing near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "3" decorative pattern are It can be visually recognized, but after the preceding decorative pattern "2" has passed the stop position, the following decorative patterns "3" and "4" can be visually recognized. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in FIG. 133 (C1), in the third production mode, the decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is the scenery of the town in the evening. A representative third background image 002SG083 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 133(C2), the variable display of the decorative design is performed by rotational display in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are rotated around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. be.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 135(C1) and (C2), the decoration pattern in the third production mode has a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b opposite to the first surface 5a. , the preceding decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces the front, it cannot be determined whether the subsequent decorative pattern (for example, "4" decorative pattern) is displayed on the second surface 5b. In other words, since the pedestal display portion 002SG064 has a low transmittance (opaqueness), the decoration pattern displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decoration pattern).

Also, the decorative pattern is rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view), and the first surface 5a, the second surface 5b, the first surface 5a, the second surface 5b, . . . By rotating, the numbers increase in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc. After "9", it returns to "0" and goes from "0" to "9". is repeatedly displayed. In other words, the decoration symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, so that the rotation display of the decoration symbols is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 135(C2), when the second surface 5b is displayed by rotating the first surface 5a by about 90 degrees or more from the state in which it faces the front, the second surface 5b has the first A decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern of "4") following the decorative pattern displayed on the surface 5a (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") is displayed. Next, although not shown in particular, when the first surface 5a is displayed by rotating about 90 degrees or more from the state in which the second surface 5b faces the front, the first surface 5a is displayed on the second surface 5b. A decoration pattern (for example, a decoration pattern of "5") following the decoration pattern (for example, a decoration pattern of "4") is displayed.

Further, in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and characters of "Right-handed" is displayed to notify the player to promote the right-handed operation. In the lower left part, a time saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, characters of "remaining XX times", XX=0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time saving control is executed is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 133 (D1), in the fourth effect mode, decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is a night townscape. A representative fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 133(C2), the variable display of decorative patterns is scroll display (third scroll display) in which the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R move linearly downward. A variable display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 135(D1) and (D2), each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then straight downward. , and is framed out downward from the lower sides of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set in the center of the vertical direction of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the subsequent decoration pattern (for example, the decoration pattern of "4") is displayed in the frame and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 135 (D1), when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. However, as shown in FIG. 135 (D2), after the leading "3" decorative pattern has passed the stop position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are visible. becomes. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing image 002SG201 including a right arrow and characters "Right-handed" is displayed for informing the player to promote the right-handed operation.

In addition, in the second effect mode, the name of the information display portion 002SG053 of the decorative pattern is always hidden even when the decorative pattern is stopped. In addition, in the third production mode and the fourth production mode, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner without including the information display section 002SG053. Thus, in the first effect mode, by displaying the information display section 002SG053 to draw attention to the name of the character, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. By hiding the information display section 002SG053 in the presentation mode, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the variable display and the notice presentation rather than the characters. It should be noted that not only the name displayed on the information display section 002SG053 but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in FIG. 135(E), the decoration pattern and the small pattern are different in variable display mode. For example, during the period in which the decorative patterns are scrolled and displayed at high speed, one decorative pattern passes through the frame-in display from the upper sides of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the frame-out display from the lower sides. A period Ta2 is required. That is, one decorative pattern is displayed, and it takes a period Ta2 until the display of the decorative pattern is finished. On the other hand, the small symbols are switched (updated) a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) to display the small symbols of the losing combination during the period Ta2.

Specifically, when the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (displaying 30 frames (frames) of images per second), from the start of the display of one decorative pattern to the end of the display An image of 10 frames is displayed at , and the period Ta2 is about 0.3 seconds.

On the other hand, small symbols of different combinations (for example, "635", "175", "461", "532", "913", etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). That is, during the period Ta2 from when one decoration pattern is displayed to when the display of the decoration pattern is finished, the small patterns of the losing combination are switched five times and displayed for each period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). It should be noted that the small symbols of each lost combination are displayed for the period Ta1, but since it is only a moment (about 0.06 seconds), it is difficult to visually confirm.

In addition, when it is decided that the display result of the variable display will be the result of the display of failure, the effect control CPU 120 decides to stop display the fixed decorative pattern of the failure combination (for example, "326"). , after starting the variable display of the decoration pattern and before stopping and displaying the fixed decoration pattern (for example, "326") of the lost combination, the small pattern of the lost combination of "326", which is the same as the decorative pattern, is not displayed. Switching display is performed as follows. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fact that the decorative symbols of the lost combination will be stopped and displayed in advance from the small symbols of the lost combination.

In addition, in the scroll display in the first production mode, the second production mode and the fourth production mode, and the rotating display in the third production mode, the decorative pattern changes the variable display speed from low speed to high speed at the start of the variable display, When the variable display stops, it changes from high speed to low speed, that is, the variable display speed can be changed. ing.

(Various actions with decorative patterns)
Next, various operation displays of decoration patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing (A) a decorative symbol variation start action, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in FIGS. 136(A) to 136(C), the decorative patterns for the low base state are moved within the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R or displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for variable display. It rotates within the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but apart from such variable display movements, it is possible to execute various actions (movements) that change the number display portion 002SG051 and the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative design. .

(variable start action)
As shown in FIG. 136(A), when the variable display is started in the first production mode and the second production mode, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 in the decoration pattern has its body orientation horizontally reversed. A "variation start action" that causes Specifically, the character is in a normal mode of putting both hands on the hips and facing diagonally forward right in the variation start action A1, and in a variation start action A2 with both hands spread upward and facing the front. In action A3, the character puts both hands on the waist and looks diagonally to the left. Here, for convenience of explanation, only three frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, and A3 are shown, but in reality, the character is displayed over several tens of frames within the variation start action period (A1 to A3). As a result, a variation start action (movement) is performed in which the orientation of the character's body changes in the order of diagonally forward right (A1), front (A2), and diagonally forward left (A3).

Next, after the character's body is turned diagonally forward to the left, the decoration pattern moves (rises) from the stop position to the side opposite to the scroll direction by a predetermined distance (A4), and then starts moving downward. to start the scroll display. These fluctuation start actions A1 to A4 are fluctuation start action period Tb1 (see FIG. 137) from when the variable display of the special design is started to when the scroll display of the decoration design (movement of the decoration design downward) is started. is executed over

Here, for convenience of explanation, only four frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are shown. A change start action (movement) is performed by displaying the movement of the character over ten frames.

In the present embodiment, as the variation start action, a mode in which the orientation of the character's body is horizontally reversed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation start action is Modifications other than those described above are possible. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. At least one of the number display portion 002SG051, the character display portion 002SG052, the information display portion 002SG053, and the pedestal display portion 002SG054, which form the decoration pattern, should be the one that takes action. In other words, the variable start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern starts scrolling display or rotating display, and is an action that changes in the scrolling display, that is, a separate action that operates in a manner different from the scrolling display. be.

Further, in the first effect mode, the name of the character (character-related information) displayed in the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden) during the variable start action period Tb1. In this way, while the character name is easy to see when it is stopped, the character name is not displayed after the scroll display is started, so that attention can be drawn to the scroll display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols is started until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols is started, and the scrolling display of the decorative symbols. and a variable post-display period after being initiated. The name of the character (character-related information) displayed on the information display section 002SG053 is displayed during the pre-variable display period, that is, when the change start action is being executed, and then the post-variable display period is started. , that is, before the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started. In this way, the name is erased before the variable start action period Tb1, that is, before the scroll display is started, so that the variable display, the advance notice effect, etc. can be noticed rather than the name.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols to the start of the scroll display of the decorative symbols is set as the pre-variable display period. However, the pre-variable display period is the period from when the condition for starting variable display is satisfied until the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, that is, the timing when the start winning occurs and the reserved memory. A period from when the variable display based on the display pattern is started to when the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started may be sufficient.

(fluctuation stop action)
As shown in FIG. 136(B), when the variable display ends in the first effect mode and the second effect mode (when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed), the decorative pattern is displayed on the character display portion 002SG052. "Variation stop action" is executed in which the character that is being displayed is enlarged and displayed.

Specifically, when the scroll-displayed decoration pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position, the character changes from the normal mode of placing the hand on the waist and facing diagonally forward to the right (fluctuation stop action B1) to the normal mode. After being enlarged and displayed so as to protrude far above the pedestal display portion 002SG054 (variation stop action B2), it is reduced and restored to the normal mode (variation stop action B3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation stop actions B1, B2, and B3 are shown. A change stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the movement of the character over ten frames.

In the present embodiment, a mode in which a character is enlarged and displayed is exemplified as a variation stop action. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. At least one of the number display portion 002SG051, the character display portion 002SG052, the information display portion 002SG053, and the pedestal display portion 002SG054, which form the decoration pattern, may take action. In other words, the change stop action is an action that is executed when the scrolling display of the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from the changing action such as the scrolling display and the rotating display.

(loop action)
As shown in FIG. 136(C), when the variable display ends in the first production mode and the second production mode (from the temporary stop display of the decoration pattern until the stop display (design determination)), the decoration pattern Then, the character displayed on the character display portion 002SG052 is repeatedly reduced and restored, and the number display portion 002SG051 repeats horizontal rotation around the vertical rotation axis, which is called a "loop action".

Specifically, in the loop action C1, the character puts both hands on the waist and looks diagonally forward to the right, while the number display section 002SG051 faces the front. The characters are displayed in a reduced size so that they can be accommodated, and the number display portion 002SG051 is rotated about 45 degrees to the right. In the loop action C4, the character is displayed in a reduced size so that it fits on the pedestal display portion 002SG054, and the number display portion 002SG051 is rotated leftward by about 45 degrees. In this loop action, the loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are sequentially executed over the loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action C1 is returned to, and the actions of the loop actions C1 to C4 are executed again over the loop action period Tb3. is executed. That is, in loop actions, loop actions C1 to C4 are periodically executed.

Here, for convenience of explanation, only four frames of the loop actions C1 to C4 are displayed, but in reality, the character is restored after being displayed in reduced size, and the number display section 002SG051 is rotated and restored. During the loop action period Tb3 up to, the loop action (operation) is performed by displaying the character and number display portion 002SG051 over several tens of frames.

In the present embodiment, as the loop action, the character is displayed in a reduced size and the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the loop action can be changed to a mode other than the above. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. At least one of the number display portion 002SG051, the character display portion 002SG052, the information display portion 002SG053, and the pedestal display portion 002SG054, which form the decoration pattern, should be the one that takes action. That is, the loop action is an action that is executed from when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position until it is stopped and displayed (design is confirmed), and is a separate action from the action that changes during the scroll display.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emission periods)
Next, various actions of decorative patterns and light emission control of lamps will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137, (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decoration patterns and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of the lamp.

As shown in FIG. 137(A), the variation start actions A1 to A4 (see FIG. 136(A)) of decorative symbols have a variation start action period Tb1, which is an execution period, of about 1.5 seconds (variation start action period Tb1=approximately 1.5 seconds), consisting of images of approximately 45 frames. In addition, the variation stop action period B1 to B3 (see FIG. 136B) of the decorative symbols has a variation stop action period Tb2 of about 0.8 seconds (variation stop action period Tb2=about 0.8 seconds). ), consisting of about 28 frames of images. In addition, the loop actions C1 to C4 (see FIG. 136(C)) of the decorative symbols have a loop action period Tb3, which is a cycle of 1, of about 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3=about 1.8 seconds). It consists of about 55 frames of images.

Further, as shown in FIG. 137(B), a movable body lamp 9d provided on each of the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, The main lamp 9a and the frame lamp 9b provided in the gaming machine frame 3 emit light based on the loop light emission control performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the game state is the low base state.

In this loop light emission control, for example, "white", "blue", and "yellow" are emitted in order over the loop light emission period Tb4, which is a period of 1, and after the end of the loop light emission period Tb4, the light returns to "white", and loop light emission is performed again. During the period Tb4, "white", "blue", and "yellow" are emitted in this order, and this is repeated periodically. That is, in the loop light emission control, "white", "blue", and "yellow" light emission is performed periodically.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4). In this way, in the low base state, the loop action is repeated in order to encourage the player to variably display the decorative symbols, while in the high base state, the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the low base state. can prevent the variable display from being excessively urged and making the user feel annoyed. In addition, since the loop action is repeated at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, the decorative pattern can be favorably highlighted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the loop light emission control has exemplified a form in which light emission of “white”, “blue”, and “yellow” is periodically executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one period can be changed in various ways. A light emission pattern in which light is emitted in order may be performed periodically, or a light emission pattern in which light emission of four or more colors is emitted in order may be performed periodically.

Incidentally, the various actions of the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 137(A) are executed when the game state is controlled to the low base state and the production mode is the first production mode or the second production mode. It is not executed when it is controlled to the high base state and the production mode is the third production mode or the fourth production mode. In the loop light emission control of the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b shown in FIG. 137(B), the game state is controlled to the low base state and the effect mode is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. However, it is not executed when the game state is controlled to the high base state and the effect mode is the third effect mode or the fourth effect mode.

(hold display)
Next, the pending display will be described with reference to FIG. 138, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an operation example of pending display.

As shown in FIG. 138 (A1), in the case of waiting for a game (reserved memory number "0"), special figure reserved memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of image display device 5, active display area 5F , the pending display is not displayed. The special figure reservation storage display area 5U consists of four display areas, the first display area from the left corresponds to the buffer number "1-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A, and the second display from the left The area corresponds to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-4". ing.

As shown in FIG. 138 (A2), when the start winning (for example, the first start winning) occurs during game standby, in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U, the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed. Next, the first suspension display 002SG101 moves diagonally upward to the left, and after the display is started (see FIG. 138 (A3)), it moves diagonally downward to the left toward the active display area 5F so as to draw a parabola. Then, when it reaches the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 138(A4)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 138 (A2), when the start winning a prize occurs, the first holding display 002SG101 is displayed in the special figure holding storage display area 5U and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but the first starting winning a prize When the first suspension display 002SG101 is displayed in the special figure suspension storage display area 5U based on the occurrence of , variable display of small symbols is started according to variable display of special symbols.

However, although the variable display has been started, as shown in FIG. 138 (A4), the first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is active display Since the display has not been switched to the active display 002SG103 after moving to the area 5F, that is, the shift display has not ended, if the scrolling display of the decorative symbols is started in a state in which the shift display has not ended, either The player may not know whether the scroll display corresponding to the first suspension display 002SG101 has started, and the player may feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is moved and displayed to the active display area 5F, and the pending shift display until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 The scrolling display (variable display) of the decoration pattern does not start until the period ends, the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scrolling display (variable display) of the decoration pattern starts. It has become so.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (B1), while the decoration pattern is being variably displayed, the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"). In the special figure reservation storage display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of 5, the first reservation display 002SG101 is displayed in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 is displayed in the active display area 5F. It is

As shown in FIG. 138(B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F is erased. An erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

The erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased. Display starts and then disappears. In this way, by not creating a blank period of the effect until the next variable display is started after the end of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest of the effect from deteriorating. In addition, the erase effect 002SG110 makes the player aware that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display has been erased, and a new active display 002SG103 is displayed to indicate that a new variable display has started. can be recognized.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the first suspended display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left (Fig. 138 (B3)), moving diagonally downward to the left toward the active display area 5F so as to draw a parabola, and moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, the active display 002SG103. Switching display is performed (see FIG. 138 (B4)).

Also, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left is horizontally moved to the left along with the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left. Start (see FIG. 138(B3)) and move from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 138(B4)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 138(B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased upon termination of the variable display, as shown in FIG. The first reserved display 002SG101 has not yet been moved to the active display area 5F, but when the moving display of the first reserved display 002SG101 is started, the variable display of the small symbols is started according to the variable display of the special symbols. .

However, although the variable display has been started, as shown in FIG. 138 (B4), the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is active display Since the movement to the area 5F (shift display) has not been completed, if the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started in this state, it is not known which scroll display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 is started. There is a possibility that the player will feel a sense of incompatibility.

Therefore, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 Hold shift display period Until the end of the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern, the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed before the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern It is supposed to start.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special figure reservation storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F are common aspects in the first production mode to the fourth production mode, so that the shift display shown in FIG. Although it is designed to be executed in a common manner in the first production mode to the fourth production mode, for example, when providing a special figure reservation storage display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each production mode, each It may be possible to execute a shift display in a mode corresponding to the production mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 138, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, non-reach variation patterns, reach variation patterns, etc.) common operation mode (for example, active from the special figure pending storage display area 5U Shift display is executed to switch the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 in the aspect in which the pending display moves up to the display area 5F in a mountain locus, but it corresponds to each variation pattern and each production mode. It may be possible to execute the shift display of a plurality of types of operation modes. Further, it may be possible to execute a shift display with different operation modes depending on whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state.

In addition, the operation mode common to multiple types of variation patterns in the shift display is at least one of a plurality of elements such as the display mode until the pending display is switched to the active display, the display speed, and the shift display period. Including those that have elements in common.

In addition, in the present embodiment, with the occurrence of the start winning, after the first pending display 002SG101 (or second pending display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special figure pending storage display area 5U, Although the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) has been exemplified as being displayed (shifted) from the special figure pending storage display area 5U to the active display area 5F, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, if the number of pending memories is "0", the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special figure pending memory display area 5U with the occurrence of the start winning, active display The active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the area 5F.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first pending display 002SG101 is stored as a switching display (shift display) for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display along with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Although the display is exemplified by moving from the first display area from the left in the display area 5U toward the active display area 5F non-linearly (for example, in a mountainous manner), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display may be linearly moved toward the left. In addition, the switching display (shift display) is not only for sliding display of the pending display, but also the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F and the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U The first suspended display 002SG101 that was displayed in the active display area 5F may be erased once, and the display of the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display may be started in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part at the start of variable display)
Next, an operation example of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 148. FIG. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first effect mode. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the second effect mode. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the details of the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in FIG. 141. FIG. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols as Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third effect mode. FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative design looks. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the fourth effect mode.

In the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, the diagrams represented by lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed-dotted lines, dotted lines, etc.) and arrows without symbols are displayed on the display screen. It is not intended to show an image that has been processed, but to explain the movement of the image.

(Operation example of variable display in the first production mode)
First, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the first effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. FIG.

FIG. 139(A) shows a state in which, in the first effect mode, the decorative designs scrolled in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2").

Then, as shown in FIG. 139(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as active. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 139(C), when variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, variable display of small symbols is started, The decorative design variation start action (see FIG. 136A) is started in the order of the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 139(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 139(C)), and the display area moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 139(D)).

The erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 139B continues for a while after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started. is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 139(E), when the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. When the actions A1 to A3 of the ornamental pattern that is displayed are finished, the action A4 of rising is started, and when the rising movement (action A4) is finished, as shown in FIG. 139F, downward movement is started to scroll Display starts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative patterns displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R are completed, the upward action A4 is started, and the upward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 139(G), downward movement is started and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C are completed, the upward action A4 is started, and the upward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 139(H), downward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. Until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed, the scroll display of the decorative designs displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is not started.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the variation start action is performed. can be recognized.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100% at high speed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 139(F) and 139(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 139(G) to 140(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed down immediately after the start of the variable display, and A fade-out display is executed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases with the acceleration.

(Operation example of variable display in the second production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the second effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. FIG.

FIG. 141(A) shows a state in which, in the second effect mode, the decorative designs scrolled in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). In addition, in the second effect mode, the name of the decorative design information display portion 002SG053 is always hidden, including when the decorative design is stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 141(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as active. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 141(C), when variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, variable display of small symbols is started, The decorative design variation start action (see FIG. 136A) is started in the order of the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 141(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 141(C)), and it moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 141(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 141B continues for a while after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 141(E), when the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. When the actions A1 to A3 of the ornamental symbols on the display screen are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and when the backward movement to the back side of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in FIG. is started to move and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the backward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 141(G), forward movement is started and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the backward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 141(H), forward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the variation start action is performed. can be recognized.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100% at high speed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 141(F) and 141(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 141(G) to 142(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed down immediately after the start of the variable display, and A fade-out display is executed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases with the acceleration.

In this manner, the scroll display in the second effect mode is designed to move from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency) and disappear. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 143(A) and 143(B), in the scroll display, the decorative design moves in a curved shape from the back side to the front side, so that the decorative design display area 5L, Between the frame-in display in 5C and 5R and the frame-out display, another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") positioned so as to partially overlap on the back side is displayed. A decorative design (for example, decorative design "3") may be visible through the decorative design "2". At this time, while the character of the character display portion 002SG052 with the decoration pattern "3" is displayed, the number ("3") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and the display of FIG. As shown, after the decoration pattern "2" is erased, the number ("3") of the number display portion 002SG051 of the decoration pattern "3" is displayed.

In addition, the other decorative pattern "3" positioned on the back side of the one decorative pattern "2" is visible through the one decorative pattern "2", but at this time, it is positioned on the far side. As for the other decorative pattern "3", the character of the character display portion 002SG052 is displayed, but the number of the number display portion 002SG051 is not displayed, and after the decorative pattern "2" is erased, the number of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. is displayed, the number "2" of one decorative pattern and the number "3" of the other decorative pattern are not overlapped and displayed, and the "2" of the decorative pattern positioned on the front side becomes difficult to understand. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 143(A), after the decorative design is frame-in displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, as shown in FIG. 143(C), the frame-out display is performed. Until the display speed is increased, the decorative patterns are moved and erased while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Since it is designed to be faded out, it is moved from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency) while being faded out according to the display speed. 143(A) to 143(C) from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display. Visual recognition of the decorative pattern becomes extremely difficult even on the side.

(Example of operation of variable display as modified example 1)
Next, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started as Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 and 145. FIG. In this modification 1, the ornamental patterns are scrolled in a curved manner in the same way as in the second production mode, but are moved from the front side of the screen to the back side, which is the opposite side of the second mode. there is

The flow of FIGS. 144(A) to 144(D) is the same as that of FIGS. 141(A) to 141(D), and detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 144(E), when the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. When the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration pattern that is displayed are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the forward movement to the front side of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in FIG. 144 (F), backward is started to move and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are completed, the forward action A4 is started, and the forward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 144(G), backward movement is started and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C are completed, the forward action A4 is started, and the forward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 144(H), backward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the variation start action is performed. can be recognized.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and when the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100%. For example, as shown in FIGS. 144(F) and 144(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 144(G) to 145(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed immediately after the start of the variable display, and the middle A fade-out display is performed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases as the speed increases.

In this manner, the scroll display as Modification 1 is configured to move from the front side of the screen to the back side while increasing the transmittance (transparency) and erase. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 144(G) and 144(H), in the scroll display, the decorative patterns move in a curved shape from the front side toward the back side. Between the frame-in display in 5C and 5R and the frame-out display, another decoration pattern (for example, decoration pattern "3") positioned so as to partially overlap on the far side with respect to one decoration pattern is displayed. A decorative design (for example, decorative design "2") may be visible through the decorative design "3". At this time, while the character of the character display portion 002SG052 of the decoration pattern "2" is displayed, the number ("2") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located on the back side of the one decorative pattern "3" is visible through the one decorative pattern "3", but at this time, it is positioned on the far side. As for the other decorative symbol "2", the character of the character display portion 002SG052 is displayed, but the number of the number display portion 002SG051 is not displayed, and after the decorative symbol "2" is erased, the number of the decorative symbol "3" is displayed. is displayed, the number "3" of one decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "2" are not displayed overlapping, and the decorative pattern "3" positioned on the front side becomes difficult to understand. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in the present modification 1, after the decorative patterns are frame-in displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and before they are framed-out, they are moved and erased while increasing the transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as described above, the decorative pattern is faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed. However, it is moved from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency). 144(F) to 144(H) from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display. Visual recognition of the decorative pattern becomes extremely difficult even on the side.

(Operation example of variable display in the third production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in the third effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG.

FIG. 146(A) shows a state in which, in the third effect mode, the decorative designs rotated and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-handed informing image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 146(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as an active display. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 146(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of the small pattern is started, but the high Since it is in the base state, the decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 136(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 146(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) starts (see FIG. 146(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 146(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 146B continues for a while after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 146(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, Rotating display of the decoration pattern displayed on 5R is started. In the high base state, the rotating display of the decorative designs displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. However, until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is moved to the active display area 5F, the decorative pattern display area 5L, Rotating display of decorative patterns displayed in 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends), and the rotating display is started after being displayed as the active display 002SG103. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity.

Further, when the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are started to rotate, the rotational display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100% at high speed. For example, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are slowed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. , the speed shown in FIG. 146(H). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases.

As shown in FIG. 147, the rotating display in the third effect mode is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated and the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are displayed repeatedly. , becomes non-transmissive when the rotating display stops. During rotating display, the number display portion 002SG051 on the side of the first surface 5a of the decoration pattern that is in a semi-transparent state is displayed, while the number display portion 002SG051 on the side of the second surface 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 147(A), in a translucent state in which the decorative design is rotated at a low speed and the transmittance is the first transmittance, it is displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As for the decorative pattern, the number "326" displayed on the first surface 5a is visible, but the number "437" displayed (to be displayed) on the second surface 5b, which is the back surface, is difficult to be visually recognized. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 147(B), in a translucent state in which the decorative design is rotated and displayed at medium speed rotation and the transmittance is the second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative design display area 5L, As for the decorative patterns displayed on 5C and 5R, the number "437" displayed on the second surface 5b is visible, but the number "548" (to be displayed) displayed on the first surface 5a, which is the back side, is visible. ” is considered to be difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 147(C), the decorative design is rotated at high speed and displayed, and in the translucent state where the transmittance is the third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative design display areas 5L and 5C are displayed. , 5R, the number "763" displayed on the first surface 5a is difficult but visible, and the number (to be displayed) displayed on the second surface 5b, which is the back surface "874" is in a state of being difficult to see. It should be noted that both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see during high-speed rotation display.

In this way, when the decorative pattern is rotated and the front and back sides of the decorative pattern are displayed repeatedly, the decorative pattern is in a semi-transparent state, so the surface of the decorative pattern (for example, the first surface 5a) is displayed. Not only the side but also the back side (for example, the second surface 5b) can be seen through. Since the numbers on the 2nd side 5b) side are not displayed, the numbers on the front side of the decorative pattern and the numbers on the back side are not displayed overlapping, preventing the numbers on the front side from becoming difficult to understand. can. In addition, even when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed in the high base state, the light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow is based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 137(B)). may be repeatedly executed. By doing so, the control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d can be simplified.

(Operation example of variable display in the fourth production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the fourth effect mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 148(A) shows a state in which, in the fourth effect mode, the decorative symbols scrolled in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-handed informing image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See FIG. 136(A))

Then, as shown in FIG. 148(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in a combination of failure, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as active. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 148(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of the small pattern is started, but the high Since it is in the base state, the decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 136(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 148(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) starts (see FIG. 148(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 148(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 148B continues for a while after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 148(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, The scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed on 5R is started. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative designs displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. However, until the shift display in which the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, the scroll display of the decorative pattern display area 5L, The scrolling display of the decorative designs displayed in 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and when the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100%. For example, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. , the speed shown in FIG. 148(H). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases.

As described above, in the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative symbol while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. The scroll display of decorative patterns is not started until the shift display for switching the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F as the active display 002SG103 is completed.

By doing so, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and during the shift display, the decorative symbols are displayed in a moving manner. By performing the variable start action to operate in a different mode, the period required for the shift display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is performed in the high base state which is more advantageous than the low base state, the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the high base state can be excited.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 in the effect control process processing of step S76, and the first type of variation pattern designation command ( For example, when variable display is executed based on a non-reach fluctuation pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of fluctuation pattern designation command (e.g., reach fluctuation pattern designation command), Since the common shift display can be performed, the common shift display is performed even when the variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, so the shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative symbol while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the special figure pending storage display. Until the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the area 5U is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F, the scroll display of the decoration pattern is not started, while in the high base state , The effect control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the decorative symbol variation start action is not performed when the pending shift display is performed with the start of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, In the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative pattern while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the first from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U. The scrolling display of decorative patterns may not be started until the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the display area is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing so, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and during the shift display, the decorative symbols are displayed in a moving manner. By performing the variable start action to operate in a different mode, the period required for the shift display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is performed in the high base state which is more advantageous than the low base state, the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the high base state can be excited.

In addition, even in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display of the decoration pattern based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the effect control process processing of step S76. When variable display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern designation command (e.g., non-reach fluctuation pattern designation command) and the second type of fluctuation pattern designation command (e.g., reach fluctuation pattern designation command) Variable display is executed based on Since it is possible to perform a common shift display regardless of when the display is performed, a common shift display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, thereby reducing shift display patterns. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed, the left , right, and center, the scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special patterns Displayed in one of the left, right, and middle decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed along with the start of the variable display. If the scrolling display of the displayed decorative pattern is started, the scrolling display of any of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started while the shift display is being performed. may

(Example of operation of each part at the time of symbol stop display)
Next, an operation example of each part when symbols are stopped will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 153. FIG. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the first effect mode (second effect mode). FIG. 150 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols following FIG. 151, (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first effect mode (second effect mode). 152, (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth effect mode (third effect mode).

(Operation example of symbol stop display in the first production mode [holding memory number "2 or less"])
First, an operation example of each part when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display based on the deviation variation pattern when the number of pending memories is 2 or less in the first production mode will be described based on FIGS. 149 and 150. do. It should be noted that the second effect mode is substantially the same as the first effect mode except for the background image, so detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 149(A), in a state in which decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and scroll display is being performed, when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches, first, high speed display is performed. The display speed of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L that has been displayed is reduced, and fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) is gradually reduced, and the visibility of the decorative patterns is improved. (See FIG. 149(B)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 149(C)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque) and the character display section 002SG052. (See FIG. 149(D)), and then the change stop action (see FIG. 136(B)) for restoring the original size is executed (see FIG. 149(E)). Then, the loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) is started in the state of the temporary stop display, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decoration symbols in the left decoration design display area 5L are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 149(F)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 149(G)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque) and the character display section 002SG052. (See FIG. 149(H)), and then the change stop action (See FIG. 136(B)) for restoring the original size is executed (See FIG. 150(I)). Then, the loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) is started in the state of the temporary stop display, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decoration symbols in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 150(K)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 150(K)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display section 002SG052. (See FIG. 150(L)), and then a change stop action (see FIG. 136(B)) for restoring the original size is executed (see FIG. 150(M)). Then, the loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) is started in the state of the temporary stop display, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the small symbols are stopped and displayed, and the loop action of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is completed and stopped. Active display 002SG103 is erased (see FIG. 150(M)).

(Example of operation example of symbol stop display in the first effect mode [number of pending memories "3"])
Next, an operation example of each part when the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first effect mode will be described based on FIGS. 151(A) to (G). . Note that the second effect mode is substantially the same as the first effect mode except for the background image, so detailed description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 151(A), in a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and are being scrolled at high speed, when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches, the display is first displayed at high speed. The display speed of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L that has been displayed is reduced, and fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) is gradually reduced, and the visibility of the decorative patterns is improved. (See FIG. 151(B)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 151(C)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display area 002SG052. The change stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 136(B)) is not executed. Also, after the temporary stop display, the loop action of the character (see FIG. 136(C)) is executed.

When the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the display speed of the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, which has been displayed at high speed, decreases, and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases. A gradual fade-in display is executed, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 151(D)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 149(E)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display section 002SG052. The change stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 136(B)) is not executed. Also, after the temporary stop display, the loop action of the character (see FIG. 136(C)) is executed.

When the decorative symbols in the right decorative design display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display speed of the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, decreases, and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases. A gradual fade-in display is executed, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 151(F)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 151(G)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display section 002SG052. The change stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 136(B)) is not executed. Also, after the temporary stop display, the loop action of the character (see FIG. 136(C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the small symbols are stopped and displayed, and the loop action of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is completed and stopped. The active display 002SG103 is erased (see FIG. 151(G)).

(Operation example of symbol stop display in the fourth production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display in the fourth effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 152(A) and (B). Note that the third effect mode is substantially the same as the fourth effect mode except for the background image, so detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 152(A), in a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and scroll display is being performed, when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches, the decorative patterns are displayed at high speed. The display speed of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R decreases all at once, and a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, thereby improving the visibility of each decorative pattern. is improved (see FIG. 152(B)).

Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, the transmittance of the decoration pattern is almost 0% (opaque), but the character change stop action (see FIG. 136(B)) displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is not executed. Also, the character's loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) is not executed after the temporary stop display.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished, the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are stopped and displayed, and the active display 002SG103 is erased. (See FIG. 152(C)).

Thus, in the low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less and the variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed), the decoration pattern is temporarily changed by the change stop action. While adding variation to the movement during the static display improves the interest, the high base makes it difficult to see the decorative patterns due to the short average variable display period and the number of retained memories being 3 in the low base state. In the state, if the variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed regardless of the number of retained memories, the display will be temporarily stopped while maintaining the size without executing the variation stop action, thereby impairing the visibility of the decoration pattern. can be stopped so that it does not

In the present embodiment, the data of animation (moving image) of various motions of decorative patterns are, for example, 1. From the start of the variable display to before the high-speed variable display, 2. high-speed variable display;3. 4. Low speed variable display to variable display stop; It is conceivable to create a video by combining materials for each period, such as a stop pattern. As for the high-speed variable display, as shown in FIGS. 133(A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the decorative pattern has a high transmittance and is almost transparent. Even if it can be recognized, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize which decorative pattern has passed (represented by arrows in FIGS. 133(A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). there). Therefore, even if there is animation data for high-speed variable display for each type of decorative pattern (a type corresponding to which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from), it does not make much sense, and the capacity of the ROM 121 is reduced. Since it is only pressing, it is preferable to use common data for the animation data of the high-speed variable display regardless of which decoration pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Example of background change operation)
Next, an example of background change operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154. FIG. 153, (A1) is a diagram showing the first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing the first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram for explaining background changes. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing the flow of background change in the first rendering mode.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the first rendering mode, the background images are a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 153 (A1)) showing a view of the town in the daytime from a distance, and a view of the town in the daytime. The first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 153(A2)) representing the . The switching of the background image is triggered when a predetermined switching condition (for example, when the SP reach is lost) is satisfied. In this embodiment, the SP reach is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of variable display) in the next variable display after loss.

In the present embodiment, the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are switched and displayed in the first effect mode, but the present invention is limited to this. Alternatively, although not shown, three or more background images including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A may be selectively displayed by switching. Also, the fulfillment of the switching condition is not limited to the above. It may be established when it is selected by an operation.

In addition, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before the decoration pattern becomes ready state. , any timing in the variable display period.

As shown in FIG. 153B, when switching display from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or switching display from the first predetermined background image 002SG081A to the first background image 002SG081), The first background image 002SG081 displayed with an opacity of 100% is faded out by gradually increasing the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081, while the first background image 002SG081 is hidden with an opacity of 0%. A fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) of the background image 002SG081A is gradually reduced. That is, a cross-fade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1=fade-in display period B1). . The fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are, for example, about 6 seconds, during which about 210 frames of images are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 154A, the transmittance (transparency) increases with the passage of time from the state where the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, making it difficult to see. (See FIG. 154(B)), the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A displayed in the lower layer of the first background image 002SG081 decreases and gradually becomes visible (see FIG. 154B). 154(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 is further reduced, and the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is increased (see FIGS. 154(D) and (E)), and finally, the first background image 002SG081 is transparent. When the transmittance reaches 100%, it is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A becomes 0%, making it easy to see (see FIG. 154(F)).

In this embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 have the same period. is not limited to this, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may partially overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may start after the fade-out display period A1 ends. may be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transmittance always increases at a constant rate in the fade-out display of the background image and the decorative pattern, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate in the fade-in display of the background image and the decorative pattern. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance in fade-out display or fade-in display of the background image is not necessarily limited to one that increases or decreases at a constant rate. Alternatively, the transmittance may slowly increase or decrease during the first period and then rapidly increase or decrease during the second period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the background image is switched and displayed in one rendering mode (for example, the first rendering mode or the second rendering mode) was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the first background image corresponding to the first rendering mode is switched to the second background image corresponding to the second rendering mode, and the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display of the second background image are also performed. It is also applicable to those whose periods are synchronized with each other.

(Example of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, an operation example of each part in variable display in each production mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158. FIG. FIG. 155 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the first effect mode. FIG. 156 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the second effect mode. FIG. 157 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the third production mode and the fourth production mode. FIG. 158 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first effect mode, (B) the second effect mode, and (C) the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode. .

(First production mode)
As shown in FIG. 155, in the first effect mode, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA1-1 of the non-reach loss with the number of pending memories being "2" or less is executed, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol , The small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that, the scroll display starts. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 158(A)).

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A21 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

Further, when the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is satisfied at the start of the variable display, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 is changed at the start of the variable display. While the fade-out display in which the (transparency) gradually increases is started, the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases to start the fade-in display in which it becomes opaque.

When the stop timing of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C are gradually decelerated in this order. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the display fades in. This fade-in display period B21 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when the temporary stop display is displayed, the variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative pattern ends and is stopped and displayed. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

The fade-out display period A1 in which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is set to be longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the high-speed display. (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21).

Further, the fade-in display period B1 in which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is from the start of deceleration of the display speed in the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the temporary stop display. (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).

Further, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, the movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are displayed in white, A light emission pattern in the order of blue and yellow is repeatedly executed. Background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second production mode)
Next, as shown in FIG. 156, in the second effect mode, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA1-1 of the non-reach loss with the number of pending memories being "2" or less is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is performed. Along with the start, the small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that, the scrolling display is started. In addition, the shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 158(B)).

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A22 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

Further, when the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is satisfied at the start of the variable display, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 is changed at the start of the variable display. While the fade-out display in which the (transparency) gradually increases is started, the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases to start the fade-in display in which it becomes opaque.

When the stop timing of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C are gradually decelerated in this order. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the display fades in. This fade-in display period B22 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when the temporary stop display is displayed, the variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is stopped and displayed, the loop action of the ornamental pattern is ended and stopped and displayed. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

The fade-out display period A1 in which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is set to be longer than the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the high-speed display. (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A22). By doing so, the fade-out display basically gives the impression that the fade-out display has disappeared abruptly in a short period of time. As for the fade-out display that may be executed at a certain time, etc.), it should be noted that the variable display of the decorative pattern is started by executing the fade-out display of the decorative pattern in a shorter period than the fade-out display of the background image. be able to.

Further, the fade-in display period B1 in which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is from the start of deceleration of the display speed in the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the temporary stop display. (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B22). By doing so, the fade-in display gives an impression that the fade-in display is basically performed in a short period of time, so that the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change occur at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped). Note that the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, and the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. can be made

Further, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode (the fade-out display period A21 <Fade-out display period A22, see FIGS. 158A and 158B). By doing so, in the second production mode, not only is the mode of scroll display of the decorative patterns different from that in the first production mode, but the display becomes high-speed after the start of the scroll display, and the decorative patterns can be visually recognized. Since the fade-out display period A22 until it becomes difficult is lengthened, it is possible to draw attention to the decorative pattern for a long period of time.

In the present embodiment, as the variable display of decorative symbols in the second effect mode, as a special variable display that is different from the first scroll display that moves linearly from top to bottom in the first effect mode, Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the second scroll display is applied in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are curved from the back side to the front side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first scroll display. The special variable display, which is different from the above, is not limited to moving the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in a curved shape from the back side to the front side as described above, as described in the first modification, Various scroll displays are applied, such as a scroll display that moves in a curved shape from the front side to the back side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, or a scroll display that moves in a straight line or curve from the bottom to the top. good too.

Further, when the non-reach loss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first effect mode and when the non-reach loss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second effect mode, fade-out display periods A21 and A22 different. By doing so, the player can predict that the determined variation pattern is the non-reach loss variation pattern PA1-1 because the fade-out display period is the same despite the different production modes. Since it becomes difficult, the amusement of the game is improved.

Also, the fade-out display period A1 in which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed and the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the high-speed display are different. That is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, at the start of the variable display), so that it becomes difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration pattern has started. can be prevented. Specifically, when the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first background image 002SG081 disappear together, making it difficult to understand that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. By erasing the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern can be made conspicuous.

Further, a fade-in display period B1 in which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed, and a period from the start of deceleration of the display speed in the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the temporary stop display. That is, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped). It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that the variable display has started. Specifically, when the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are synchronized, the decoration pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A appear together, making it difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration pattern has been stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, the decorative pattern can be made conspicuous.

Further, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, the movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are displayed in white, A light emission pattern in the order of blue and yellow is repeatedly executed. Background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(3rd and 4th production modes)
Next, as shown in FIG. 157, in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode, when the variable display based on the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern PA1-3 is executed, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol , the small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all start rotating or scrolling without performing a variation start action. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 158(C)).

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A23 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative designs in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually decelerated all at once to be displayed at low speed, and the transmittance is proportional to the decrease in speed. (Transparency) is also lowered and fade-in is displayed. This fade-in display period B23 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decoration symbols in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed all at once. In other words, the variable stop action and the loop action such as those in the first production mode and the second production mode are not executed, and the variable display is terminated as it is, and the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed together with the small pattern. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

Further, the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when the scroll display is executed in the fourth effect mode or the rotating display in the third effect mode. In addition, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode (fade-out). Display period A23<fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 158A to 158C).

Further, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are controlled based on the light emission control corresponding to the pattern of the high-bass music, and the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-bass music. It emits light according to the output such as. Also, high bass music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed in the high bass state, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are controlled based on the light emission control corresponding to the high bass music pattern. , the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of a high-bass song are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. 137(B)), the white, blue, and yellow light emission patterns are repeatedly executed in this order, and the background BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R. You may make it output. By doing so, the light emission control of the effect control CPU 120 can be simplified.

(Operation example of customer waiting demonstration)
Next, the customer waiting demonstration effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 160. FIG. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an operation example of the customer waiting demonstration effect. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an operation example when starting winning occurs during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

As shown in FIG. 159, the "customer waiting demonstration effect" is an effect in which a customer waiting (game waiting) state is notified. , is an effect started by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not shown, after the initial motions of the movable bodies 32A and 32B are executed in the initial motion control process when the power is turned on, the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 159(A)). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without the variable display being performed after the power is turned on, the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 disappears, and the customer waiting demonstration image 002SG400 is displayed. It is displayed, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is started (see FIG. 159(B)).

In the customer-waiting demo production, a plurality of allied characters appearing in various productions (images of enemy characters may be included) and moving images sequentially introducing the content are displayed (Fig. 159(B) to (E)), the movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position while the image of the group of allied characters is displayed (see FIG. 159(F)), and rises to the origin position after a predetermined time elapses. (See FIGS. 159(G) to (H)), the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, and the process ends (see FIG. 159(I)). When the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, a menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 159(J)).

When a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without the variable display being performed after the customer waiting demonstration effect is finished, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started again. Even after that, as long as the waiting state continues, the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed periodically. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the standby state, or may not be executed after being executed a predetermined number of times. Also, the production mode of the customer waiting demonstration production as the waiting production is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, during the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIGS. 159B to 159H), the small symbols are continuously stopped and displayed in the display area 5S, while the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, Decorative patterns are not displayed on 5R. In this way, the small symbols are displayed even when the decoration symbols are not displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

An operation example in the case where a starting prize is generated while such a customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 160(A), when the first start winning occurs (the condition for starting the variable display is met) while the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 160(B) , while the customer waiting demonstration image 002SG400 is being displayed, the variable display of the small symbols is started in the display area 5S.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(C), the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. . In addition, the special figure reservation storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F are displayed, and the first reservation display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special figure reservation storage display area 5U. Then, the movement display (shift display) from the special figure reservation storage display area 5U of the first reservation display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is started, and the variation start action of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is left, Starts in order from right to middle.

As shown in FIG. 160(D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F ends, as shown in FIG. The symbols move upward in order, the fluctuation start action ends, and the scroll display starts (see FIG. 160(F)).

In this way, when the starting winning occurs while the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, the variable display of the small patterns is started before the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, and then the customer waiting is performed. After the demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first effect mode), the decoration pattern is displayed. Scroll display is started.

That is, if the scrolling display of decorative patterns is started while the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is being displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand that the scrolling display has started with the occurrence of the first start winning. While starting the variable display of, after switching display from the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, the scroll display is started after the shift display of the pending display is finished. It is possible to make the player recognize that the scroll display has started with the occurrence of the first start winning. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is switched to the first background image 002SG081 and the scroll display is started after the shift display is finished, the time lag from the occurrence of the first start winning to the start of the scroll display is large. Therefore, the variable display of the small symbols is started before the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, so that the display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols can be ensured.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159(A), (I), and (J), after the customer waiting demonstration effect is completed, decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the case of the first production mode or the second production mode when the state is reached, the loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) of the decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed is executed, and the main lamp 9a, the frame Loop light emission control (see FIG. 137(B)) is executed for the lamp 9b and the movable lamp 9d. On the other hand, in the case of the third effect mode or the fourth effect mode, the loop action (see FIG. 136(C)) of the decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed is not executed, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp are not executed. In 9d, light emission control is executed in accordance with the rhythm, melody, time signature, etc. of the high bass music.

In this way, in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative pattern is repeatedly executed in a cycle shorter than that of the loop light emission control. That is, while it is possible to promote the resumption of the game, in the high base state, since neither the loop action of the decorative pattern nor the loop light emission control is executed, the production during the high base (third production mode and fourth production mode) can be brought to your attention that is being executed. It is not necessary to execute the loop action of the decoration design in the first production mode or the second production mode, or the loop action of the decoration design may be executed in the third production mode or the fourth production mode.

In addition, the loop action of the decoration pattern is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko game machine 1 is in a non-operating state that is not variably displayed. Suppressed.

In addition, although the "loop action" of the present embodiment is focused on "movement", for example, the position of the decorative pattern changes, shakes, or deforms. However, animation or the like may be performed in which the highlight is moved and displayed in the decoration pattern while it is still displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, and effect images (not shown) such as character images displayed as background images in the high-bass state are displayed in accordance with the high-bass music. Alternatively, the background image may be displayed as an animation such that the background image is displayed moving at a predetermined moving speed. In this case, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state as described above, although the loop action of the ornamental pattern is not executed, the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 is continued. can be

(Example of operation of pseudo consecutive notice)
Next, an operation example of the pseudo continuous notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing the flow of pseudo consecutive notices. 162, (A) is a diagram showing an example of pseudo-run count display and symbol colors, (B) is a diagram showing pseudo-run count display and symbol color types, and (C) is a pseudo-run count display color determination table. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;

As shown in FIG. 161, the "pseudo recurrence notice" indicates that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is started. This is an effect that prompts whether or not to resume, that is, whether or not one variable display is simulated as multiple variable displays.

As shown in FIG. 162(A), the pseudo-continuous notice includes a "pseudo-continuous one-time pattern" in which the total number of times of variable display is two, the first time variable display and one re-variable display, and the first time variable display and two times. It is possible to execute a "pseudo consecutive 2 times pattern" in which the total number of times of variable display is 3 times with re-variable display, and when the super reach (pseudo consecutive 1 time) variation pattern is selected The "pseudo-run 1-time pattern" is executed, and when the super reach (pseudo-run 2-time) variation pattern is selected, the "pseudo-run 2-time pattern" is executed. Incidentally, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the "pseudo-run 2-time pattern" than in the "pseudo-run 1-time pattern".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161(A), when the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive notice is executed is started, the left decoration symbol display area A decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and then a decorative pattern having the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R to enter a ready-to-win state. Afterwards (see FIG. 161(B)), the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern with the characters "NEXT!" ).

After that, in the case of the variable display in which the pseudo continuous notice is executed, the pseudo continuous decoration symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 161(D)), and the first re-variable display is performed. is started, that is, a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 of "x2" indicating that the second variable display is started is displayed above the center decoration symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 161(F)). , the left decorative design display area 5L, the middle decorative design display area 5C, and the right decorative design display area 5R, the variable display of decorative designs is resumed (see FIG. 161(G)). In addition, in the case of variable display in which the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed, the pseudo-continuous symbol passes through the stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and one of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. A decoration pattern with a large number is displayed in a stationary manner, and a variable display result of failure is displayed (see FIG. 161(E)).

In FIG. 161(G), after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of the pseudo-continuous notice of "pseudo-continuous one-time pattern", after a predetermined period of time has passed, the left decorative symbol display area 5L is variably displayed. 161(L)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. 161(M)), and develops into SP reach performance.

In addition, after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed in FIG. 161(G), in the case of the pseudo-continuous notice of "pseudo-continuous double pattern", the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L, and then , The decorative pattern with the same number as the one temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. The pseudo-continuous decoration pattern displayed with is decelerated and displayed before the stop position in the middle decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 161(H)).

Next, the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 161(I)), and the second re-variable display is started, that is, the third variable display is started. After the pseudo run number display 002SG213 of "x3" indicating that the display is started is displayed above the middle decoration symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 161(J)), the left decoration symbol display area 5L and the middle decoration symbol display area 5C are displayed. The variable display of the decoration design is resumed in the design display area 5C and the right decoration design display area 5R (see FIG. 161(K)).

After that, the decorative design that has been variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 161(L)), and the decoration with the same number as the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L. The symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R to enter the ready-to-win state (see FIG. 161(M)), and the SP ready-to-win effect develops.

In addition, the pseudo-continuous notice is an introductory part as a period to instigate whether or not the variable display will be resumed (Fig. 161 (A) to (C), (G), (J), (K), (L) ), and a result notification part (see FIGS. 161 (D) to (F), (H), (I), and (M)) as a period for notifying the result of whether or not the variable display has been restarted. .

As shown in FIG. 162(B1), in the pseudo continuous notice, the variable display is resumed when the variable display is resumed after the pseudo continuous decoration symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration symbol display area 5C. A pseudo-run count display is displayed that allows you to specify the number of times you have played. Specifically, the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 (FIGS. 161(F) and (G)) of "x2" indicates that the first re-variable display is started, that is, the second variable display is started. ), or a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 (see FIGS. 161(J) and 161(K)) of "x3" indicating that the second re-variable display is started, that is, that the third variable display is started. ) is displayed.

The pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 162(B1) and the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 162(B2) are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes in red. Further, as described in FIG. 132, the normal symbols of even numbers are "blue", and the probability variable symbols of odd numbers are "red". The display color of such a pseudo-repeated number display is determined using the pseudo-repeated number display color determination table shown in FIG. be.

Specifically, in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, when the display color of the pseudo-running number display 002SG212 is determined, when the variable display result is "probable variable big hit", the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 is used. A display color that is not the same color (for example, the symbol color is blue and the pseudo-running number display color is red/the symbol color is red and the pseudo-running number display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 10%, and is determined in step 002 SGS276. A display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorated pattern (for example, the pattern color and the pseudo-running number display color are blue/the pattern color and the pseudo-running number display color are red) is determined at a rate of 90%.

Further, when the variable display result is "unprobable variable jackpot", a display color that is not the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002 SGS276 (for example, the symbol color is blue, and the pseudo consecutive number display color is blue). Red/symbol color is red, pseudo-running number display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 30%, and a display color that is the same as the symbol color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002 SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo Blue for the consecutive number display color/red for the pattern color and pseudo consecutive number display color) is determined at a rate of 70%.

Further, when the variable display result is "miss", a display color that is not the same color as the decorative pattern color determined in step 002 SGS276 (for example, the pattern color is blue and the pseudo-running number display color is red/ The symbol color is red and the pseudo-run number display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the display color (for example, the symbol color and the pseudo-run number) is the same color as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276. The display color is blue/the pattern color and the pseudo-run number display color are red) is determined at a rate of 10%.

As described above, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display are the first combination of non-identical colors, and the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display are the first combination. There is a case where the display color becomes the second combination of the same color, and the case where the variable display is restarted with the second combination is more favorable than the case where the variable display is restarted with the first combination in the pseudo-continuous notice. The ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is high.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a big hit, when the normal symbol (blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS276, the number of pseudo-runs of the first pseudo-run and the second pseudo-run is displayed as follows. The rate of determination of the same color blue is higher than the rate of determination of the non-same color red. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a failure, when the normal symbol (blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the same color is used as the pseudo-run number display for the first and second pseudo-runs. A blue color is determined less frequently than the non-identical color red.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, when the probability variable symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS276, the same color is displayed as the number of pseudo-runs for the first and second pseudo-runs. A red color is determined more frequently than a non-identical blue color. On the other hand, when the variable display result is lost, when the probability variable symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS 276, the same color is displayed as the number of pseudo-runs for the first and second pseudo-runs. A red color is determined less frequently than a non-identical blue color.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a big hit, when the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276 (see FIG. 162 (B1)), the pseudo-running number display 002SG212 is changed to " For the first pseudo run of "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo run number display 002SG212 and the display color are the same type of blue are displayed. This is determined at a higher rate than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo-running number display 002SG212 are of the same type, but the display color is red. .

In addition, for the second pseudo-run where the pseudo-run number display 002SG213 is "x3", the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo-run number display 002SG212 are different, but the display color is the same blue color. The 3 combination ("x3", blue) is better than the 4th combination ("x3", red) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 are red. Determined by a high percentage.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is lost, when the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the number of pseudo-runs of the first pseudo-run and the second pseudo-run is displayed. , the rate at which blue, which is the same color, is determined is lower than the rate at which red, which is the non-same color, is determined.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit, when the probability variable symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the pseudo-run number display 002SG212 becomes "x2" for the first pseudo-run. , the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo-running number display 002SG212 are different, but the third combination ("x2", red), which is the same kind of display color and is red, is displayed temporarily stopped. It is determined at a higher rate than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the display color is different from the numbers of the decorative symbols and the number of pseudo-running display 002SG212.

In addition, for the second pseudo-run where the pseudo-run number display 002SG213 is "x3", the second combination ("x 3", red) is better than the first combination ("x3", blue) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 are the same type, but the display color is different blue. Determined by a high percentage.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is lost, when the normal symbol ("3", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS276, the number of pseudo-runs of the first and second pseudo-runs is displayed. , the rate at which blue, which is the same color, is determined is lower than the rate at which red, which is the non-same color, is determined.

As described above, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the numbers of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 and 002SG213 are of the same type, and the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive number display are different. There are cases where it is the first combination, and cases where both the decoration symbol displayed temporarily and the number and display color of the pseudo-running number are the same type, and the first combination is the first combination in the pseudo-running notice. Whether or not the pseudo continuous notice is executed by increasing the ratio of control to the jackpot game state when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the second combination. In addition, when executed, it is possible to draw attention to the combination of numbers and colors of the decorative symbols displayed temporarily and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pseudo-run announcement, the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher when the super reach variation pattern of two pseudo-runs is determined as the variation pattern than when the super reach variation pattern of one pseudo-run is determined. , The decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the second pseudo-run are more likely to be displayed in the second pseudo-run than when both the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the first pseudo-run and the number and display color of the pseudo-run number display are the same second combination. and the second combination of the same type in both the number and display color of the number of pseudo-runs, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher. It is possible to attract attention by the number of times displayed and the display color.

Also, in the second pseudo run, if both the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and the number and display color of the pseudo run number display are the same type of second combination, the decorative design becomes a variable pattern, so it is simulated as a variation pattern. The ratio of control to the probability variable big win game state may be higher when the super reach variation pattern of two pseudo-reams is determined than when the super reach variation pattern of one ream is determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display is exemplified by determining one of a plurality of colors according to the number of the ornamental symbol displayed temporarily, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display color of the display of the number of pseudo-runs is not limited, and may be a display color that is predetermined for each number of pseudo-runs.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, 002SG213, the form of "x2" or "x3" was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Display of the number of repetitions can be changed in various ways as long as the number of pseudo repetitions can be specified. It can be displayed in various forms such as.

In the present embodiment, the number of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the number of the pseudo consecutive number display are the same type and the same color in the pseudo consecutive notice. is a normal symbol (“2”, blue) and the number of pseudo-runs is indicated by 002SG212 (“x2”, blue) There were two patterns in the case of the number of times display 002SG213 (x 3, red), but in addition to the above, the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed is the normal pattern ("4", green), and the pseudo consecutive number display (x 4) , green) may be used, and the number color of the decoration pattern, the number color of the number of pseudo-runs, and the number of pseudo-runs can be changed variously.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive notice, even if the number of the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number of the pseudo consecutive number display, the pseudo consecutive notice It is decided whether or not the consecutive number display color should be the same color as the number of the decoration symbol displayed temporarily. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the numbers of the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed are numbers other than "2" and "3" corresponding to the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display. In some cases, a predetermined display color (for example, white) may be uniformly determined without determining the pseudo-repetition display color.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the decorative symbols of the same number as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L are temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R to enter the reach state. After that, the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern with the characters "NEXT!" The present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo-continuous pattern can be changed variously. In addition, after a decorative design with a different number from the decorative design temporarily displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R, the left decorative design display area 5L or the right decorative design display area 5R. The re-variable display may be started by temporarily stopping and displaying the decoration pattern or the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern temporarily stopped at the stop position in the middle decoration design display area 5C.

Incidentally, the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the pseudo consecutive notice may not necessarily be the same as the fixed decoration symbols stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display. Further, for example, after the normal symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo-run, the probability variable symbols, that is, different symbols from the first pseudo-run may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the second pseudo-run. Also, the number of pseudo-runs is not limited to the above two times, and three or more pseudo-runs (re-variable display) may be executed.

(Operation example of reach production)
Next, an operation example of the ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165. FIG. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect following FIG. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an operation example of each part in the ready-to-win effect. In the following, an operation example of the ready-to-win effect in the first effect mode will be explained, but the same ready-to-win effect may be executed in the second to fourth effect modes as well.

As shown in FIG. 163(A), when the variable display based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern or the super reach fluctuation pattern is started, at the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display was started, the left decoration symbol display area 5L A decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 163(B)), and then a decorative design with the same number as the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. Then, the mode of variable display of the decoration pattern becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 163(C)). At this time, decoration designs are displayed at high speed in the middle decoration design display area 5C. Also, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B are lit based on the aforementioned loop light emission control (see FIG. 137(B)).

Incidentally, in FIGS. 163(B) and (C), the form in which the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , and the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R may be temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 163(D), when the ready-to-win effect is started, the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decoration design display area 5L and the right decoration design display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, and the middle decoration design is displayed. A reach line effect display 002SG250 as a reach line suggesting image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the ornamental pattern (substantially transparent and invisible) being variably displayed in the area 5C, and the reach line suggesting effect is started. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display emphasizing the reach line connecting the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design is displayed on the reach line. This is a display suggesting that the decoration pattern in the area 5C will be stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 163(D), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are enlarged only for the characters in the character display section 002SG052 as in the above-described fluctuation stop action. Instead of being displayed, the number display portion 002SG051, character display portion 002SG052, information display portion 002SG053, and base display portion 002SG054 forming decorative patterns are all enlarged and displayed at the same ratio. In this manner, by providing an enlarged display that is different in mode from when the variable display is stopped, it is possible to make the user recognize that the variable display is not stopped but in the ready-to-reach mode.

The reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed in a small size so as to be superimposed on the decorative pattern being variably displayed near the stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C when the ready-to-reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 163(D). 163(E)), and after reaching the left and right sides of the display screen (see FIG. 163E) 163 (F)), after the mode changes so that the vertical dimension expands (see FIG. 163 (G)), the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases due to fade-out display (see FIG. 163 (H)), and finally 164(I)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 163(F), it is possible to change (enlarge) the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 in the reach line suggestion production, and to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250. When changing, turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged around (near) the display screen of the image display device 5 makes the surroundings of the display screen darker than usual. , the reach line effect display 002SG250 can be made more conspicuous.

Also, as shown in FIG. 163(D), after the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, the left decorative design is moved to the left and the right decorative design is displayed. The decorative patterns start moving rightward, that is, in a direction away from each other (see FIG. 163(E)). In addition, while being spaced apart from each other, they are rotated by a predetermined angle around the rotation axis facing the vertical direction (see FIG. 163 (F)), and when they reach the farthest spaced position on the left and right of the display screen, the movement and rotation display are completed. 163(G)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 163(H), the left and right decorative patterns displayed at the left and right separated positions while being enlarged are reduced and rotated from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. moved and restored to its normal viewing position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 164(I), when the decorative patterns are restored in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and hidden, the variable display is performed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. The scroll display speed gradually decreases, and the transparency (transparency) of the decoration pattern that has been displayed is gradually reduced to fade-in display (see FIGS. 164(J) to (K)), and finally the decoration pattern becomes transparent. The rate becomes 0% (opaque), and scroll display is performed at a low speed (see FIG. 164(L)).

As shown in FIG. 165, when executing the reach line suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 expands and enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R. , and a separation display in which the decorative pattern is separated after the enlarged display is executed, and the separation display is started and ended before the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display. Since the second period te1 until the game is played is longer (td1<te1), the player can be made to recognize the decoration pattern forming the ready-to-win state.

In addition, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative pattern is restored to the original figure (td2 < tf1 ), while allowing the player to recognize the decoration pattern forming the ready-to-win state, it can be quickly reduced in size when restored to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, attention is paid to which decorative design is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative design display area 5C. Since the left and right dimensions are narrowed and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative patterns, the left and right decorative patterns are moved away from each other. It is possible to make the user pay attention to the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C.

In addition, the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been exemplified in a form displayed immediately after the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decoration design display area 5L and the right decoration design display area 5R and the reach state is reached. It is not limited to this, and may be displayed at the same time as the ready-to-reach mode.

Also, the movable body lamp 9d displays the decorative patterns temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R, and after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed. Although the form in which the lights are turned off when changing has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lights may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Further, the luminance is not limited to being extinguished, and the luminance may be lowered more than when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable bodies 32A and 32B provided above and below the image display device 5 are provided with built-in specific light emitting means that are turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of board-side lamps including an attacker lamp 9c provided on the game board, and a main lamp 9a provided on the game machine frame 3 , frame lamps 9b, etc., and particularly if the lamps are provided near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is made conspicuous by turning off the lamps. be able to.

Further, after execution of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C is set higher than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed. The second transmittance F2 with a low transmittance (transparency) is set to the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration design display area 5C, and is displayed variably in the center decoration design display area 5C. The decorative pattern inside does not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decoration design display area 5C, the transmittance of the decoration design in the middle decoration design display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display). However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration design display area 5C, the transmittance may change to the second transmittance F2 after a predetermined time has passed.

(Operation example of SP reach production)
Next, an operation example of the SP ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168. FIG. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP ready-to-win effect. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP ready-to-win effect following FIG. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing an operation example of each part in the SP ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIG. 166 (A), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when it is controlled to the low base state, after becoming the reach mode described in FIG. 163 (C), the type of SP reach production The reach title display 002SG070 is displayed to notify the reach title, and the SP reach performance as a notification effect to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) ) is started (see FIGS. 166(B) and (C)). In the SP reach effect, a fifth background image 002SG085 representing the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed, which is different from the first background image 002SG081 and the second background image 002SG082 which are normal background images. In addition, the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image having a different aspect according to the type of the SP ready-to-win effect.

Next, during the period from the timing when the battle is settled until the predetermined operation validity period elapses, an operation promotion display 002SG071 consisting of characters "Press!!" prompting the operation of the push button 31B and a button display imitating the push button 31B. 002SG072 is displayed (see FIG. 166(D)).

Then, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation effective period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period elapses, the operation prompting display 002SG071 and the button display 002SG072 are hidden, and the process ends. . Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined luminescent color while the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect display 002SG073 that emphasizes the movable body 32B is displayed. At the same time, a predetermined production effect sound is output, and it is notified that the game state is controlled to a big hit (see FIG. 166(E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image. , a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 166(F)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 166(G), with the end of the SP ready-to-win effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. A combination of jackpot confirmation symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, a character 002SG074 appears with a lit ignition device in hand, and after displaying a frame-in from the lower right side of the display screen, it runs toward the left and temporarily appears in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The number display portions 002SG051 of the decoration symbols that are stopped and displayed are ignited (see FIG. 166(H)).

As shown in FIG. 168(A), a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame displayed by being ignited at a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display portion 002SG051 of each pattern is shown in FIGS. 168(B) to (D). , it increases along the periphery of the number display portion 002SG051 and is displayed near the number of the number display portion 002SG051. In addition, as for the flame image that constitutes the specific image 002SG075, as shown in the middle enlarged view of FIG. By doing so, the movement is displayed as if the flame is swaying. Finally, the specific image 002SG075 is hidden, the small symbols and the decorative symbols are stopped, and the big hit display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 166(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the effect position, and after the result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 166 (K)) In the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of confirmed symbols that are not a big hit combination (for example, "232 ”) is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 166(L)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 166(M), with the end of the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. is displayed, a combination of deviated confirmed symbols (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the result of the misalignment display is derived and displayed (see FIG. 166(N)).

In addition, in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern in the case of being controlled to the high base state, after the notification effect of notifying that it is controlled to the jackpot game state is performed (see FIG. 166 (E)), the ally When the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image in the notification effect after the result display (not shown) indicating that the character has won the battle with the enemy character is displayed. 167(O).

Then, as shown in FIG. 167(P), with the end of the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed to display the fourth background image 002SG084. is displayed, the combination of the big hit confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without displaying the specific image 002SG075, and the big hit display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 167(Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the effect position, and after the result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 166 (K)) In the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of confirmed symbols that are not a big hit combination (for example, "232 ”) is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 167(R)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 167(S), with the end of the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. is displayed, a combination of deviated confirmed symbols (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed without displaying the specific image 002SG075, and the result of the display of deviation is derived and displayed (see FIG. 167(T)).

In this way, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in operation on the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmed decoration pattern displayed after the end of the notification effect. (See FIGS. 166(H) and (I)), in the high base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not operatively displayed on the decorative pattern number display portion 002SG051 displayed after the end of the notification effect. (see FIG. 167(S)), it is possible to give a sense of speed to the variable display.

In the present embodiment, in the low base state, a specific image 002SG075 showing flames is displayed in close proximity to the numerical display portion 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmed decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. Although the form was exemplified, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing flames as described above, and images other than flames (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may be applied. good.

In addition, the movement display of the specific image may include not only the manner in which the flames fluctuate as described above, but also the specific image rotating around the number display portion 002SG051, or changing in form or display color. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the character 002SG074 acts on each of the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, so that the specific image 002SG075 is displayed around the number display portion 002SG051. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image is displayed without the character 002SG074 acting on the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. may be displayed.

(Modification 2)
Next, Modification 2 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 169, (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing Modification 2 of the present invention.

In the variable stop action in the above embodiment, the characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 are enlarged and displayed when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after passing through the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the decorative patterns are moved in the opposite direction and restored to the stopped positions. may be moved and displayed.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 169A1 and 169A2, the decorative pattern moves gradually downward in the direction of the white arrow while decelerating toward the stop position, and reaches the stop position. When the temporary stop display is performed (see FIG. 169 (A3)), the pedestal display portion 002SG054 and the information display portion 002SG053 remain temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, and the number display portion 002SG051 and the character display portion 002SG052 pass through the stop position. Then, the downward movement display is continued.

At this time, the movement distance L2 from when the number display portion 002SG051 passes the stop position until the temporary stop display is displayed is the movement distance from when the character display portion 002SG052 passes the stop position until the temporary stop display is displayed. It is larger than L1 (L1<L2).

After that, the number display portion 002SG051 and the character display portion 002SG052 that have passed the stop position move upward, and while the character display portion 002SG052 is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIG. 169 (A5)), the character display portion 002SG052 The display unit 002SG052 passes the stop position again and moves upward (see FIG. 169 (A6)). In this way, the movement distance L3 from when the number display portion 002SG051 passes the stop position upward until the temporary stop display is displayed is (L3<L2). Finally, the number display portion 002SG051 moves downward and is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 169 (A7)).

Note that the action in which only the character display portion 002SG052 passes the stop position and moves upward in FIG. It can be made to recognize the difference from the start action.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stop position, it is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of arrival, but after at least a part of the plurality of seed display parts forming the decorative pattern has passed the stop position, the reverse display is performed. By moving to the side and returning to the stop position, it is possible to make it look as if a part of the display has passed by with momentum, so it can be made more realistic.

In addition, while the first display unit (for example, the base display unit 002SG054 and the information display unit 002SG053) among the plurality of display units is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, the other second display unit (for example, the number display unit 002SG051 and By causing the character display portion 002SG052) to pass through the stop position, movement can be given while the stop position is not ambiguous. Furthermore, by making the movement distances of the number display portion 002SG051 on one side and the character display portion 002SG052 on the other side of the second display portion different, it is possible to display the action according to the size and appearance of the display portion. .

(Modification 3)
Next, Modification 3 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 170(A) to (D) are diagrams showing the modification 3 of the present invention.

In the above-described embodiment, in the first effect mode, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIG. Although the decorative patterns before and after the stopped decorative pattern are not temporarily stopped and displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. Thus, when one of the decorative patterns (for example, decorative pattern "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, one of the preceding and following decorative patterns (for example, decorative pattern "2" and decorative pattern "4") The part may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, when one of the variably displayed decoration symbols (for example, decoration symbol "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIGS. 170(A) and (B)), the variation stop action is performed. In this case (see FIGS. 170(C) and 170(D)), the object to be subjected to the fluctuation stop action is the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in an area other than the stop position. It is preferable not to execute the fluctuation stop action for the decoration pattern.

By doing so, when a winning combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the result of the losing display, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, temporary stop display is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By temporarily enlarging and displaying the displayed decorative patterns, the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be made to attract the player's attention, and a combination that is originally meaningless to the player is derived. Even when the decoration pattern is displayed, the player's line of sight can be kept on the area where the decoration pattern is displayed. Further, when enlarging and displaying the temporarily stopped decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the decorative patterns that are not positioned in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are not displayed in an enlarged manner. It is possible to concentrate on the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and reduce the load of display control.

In addition, since the loop light emission control is continuously performed even when the decorative patterns to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged and displayed (see FIGS. 155 and 156), the main lamp 9a and the frame lamp 9b, the control of the movable lamp 9d can be simplified. Incidentally, when a plurality of effective stop positions are set, the fluctuation stop action may be executed for the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed at each effective stop position.

(Other modifications)
Further, after the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-win mode, when it develops into the SP ready-to-win effect, the left and right decorative patterns forming the ready-to-win mode move to the front side of the display screen in a first predetermined operation and to the back of the display screen. Only the number display part 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position (for example, upper left and right sides of the display screen) on the display screen where the SP reach effect is displayed by a specific action including a second predetermined action of moving to the side. In this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative pattern is faster in the second predetermined motion than in the first predetermined motion.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, the decorative patterns are the number display portion 002SG051 and the information display portion 002SG053. In addition to being able to execute the variation start action for the information display section 002SG051, the information display section 002SG053 may also be made capable of executing the information display variation start action in conjunction with the number variation start action of the number display section 002SG051. In this case, the information display variation start action may be completed and the information display section 002SG053 may be erased before the number variation start action is completed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute either the first effect mode or the second effect mode in the low base state, the third effect mode in the low probability high base state, and the fourth effect in the high probability high base state Although the form in which the mode can be executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute three or more types of production modes in the low base state, or three or more types of effects in the high base state. The mode may be made executable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the first effect mode, the first scroll display in the vertical direction, in the second effect mode, the second scroll display that curves and moves from the back side to the front side, in the third effect mode, the rotating display, the fourth Although the form in which the third scrolling display in the vertical direction is executed in the production mode has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the form of variable display of decorative patterns in each production mode can be changed in various ways. .

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state is a time-saving state or a variable probability state. , Small hit game state and the like may be applied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal state and the low probability low base state, the special state with a short average variable display period and the low probability high base state and high probability low base state and the variable display is likely to be executed than the normal state However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state, and the special state may be a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the normal state (low base state), the time saving state (low probability high base state), the probability variable state (high probability high base state) are provided as the game state, and the time saving state or probability change at the end of the big hit game Although the form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the state is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a part of the case where the variable display result is wrong in the low probability state. Therefore, it is possible to control the time saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, or it is advantageous in a low probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays without being controlled by the state. In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after the big hit game is the time-saving state A, and in a low-probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1), it is predetermined without being controlled to the advantageous state. The time saving state controlled based on the number of times the variable display is performed is the time saving state B, a part of the case where the variable display result is lost in the low probability state, and the variable display result is displayed as a specific result. The time saving state controlled based on what is done should be the time saving state C.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine that can be controlled in the time-saving state C, a plurality of types of variable display results are provided for winning the time-saving state C, and depending on the type of variable display result when winning the time-saving state C You may vary the variable display frequency|count by which time saving control is performed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state corresponds to non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes variable display of specific identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
a movable body;
game control means;
display means;
movable body control means;
and a production control means,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information,
The effect control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
In one production mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed,
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is capable of executing a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually reduced when executing
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased,
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced,
an execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than an execution period of the identification information fade-in display;
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
The game control means is
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-to-enter state in which game media can easily enter,
When a power failure occurs while the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on, special control can be performed to put the variable means in the easy-to-enter state again,
The display means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display the startup preparation display,
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a restoration in progress display,
In the advantageous state, when a power failure occurs while the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on,
The boot preparation display is displayed,
After that, the special control is performed,
After that, the display during recovery is displayed,
After that, the confirmation movable control is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images